Amadeus System Certification Course Guide May 2012
User Manual:
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 259 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
- Before You Start
- Getting Started
- Objectives
- Signing In and Out
- What Are Duty Codes?
- Table: Duty Codes
- How to Sign In to the System
- What Are Work Areas?
- How to Sign In to Work Areas
- How to Identify Your Work Area Status
- What Is a Terminal Address?
- What Is an Office ID?
- How to Display Corporate Codes
- How to Move Between Different Work Areas
- How to Move to and Sign In to Another Work Area
- How to Temporarily Deactivate a Work Area
- How to Sign Out of the System and Work Areas
- Remote Terminals and Offices
- What Are Duty Codes?
- Viewing Office Profiles
- Working with Agent Preferences
- Working with Local Security
- What Are Security Levels?
- LSA Rights During Office Creation
- How to Create a Permanent LSA Sign
- What Is a Sign Bank?
- How to Display the Sign Bank
- How to Create an Agent Sign and Profile
- How to Copy an Agent Sign and Profile
- How to Update an Agent Profile
- How to Reset an Agent Profile
- How to Delete an Agent Sign
- How to Display Sign History
- How to Display the Default Office Security Settings
- How to Update the Default Office Security Settings
- How to Reset the Default Office Security Settings
- What Are Security Levels?
- Working with Information in the Amadeus System
- Encoding and Decoding
- Using Timatic
- Air
- Before You Start
- Objectives
- Introduction
- Working with an Availability Display
- Understanding the Display
- What Is a Carrier?
- What Is a Flight Type?
- What Is an Availability Display?
- How to Request an Availability Neutral Display
- Sample Availability Display
- What Is a Status Code?
- What Is a Codeshare?
- What Is an Alliance?
- How to Add Options
- How to Request a Dual-City-Pair Display
- How to Perform a Seven-Day Search
- How to Move to the Previous Availability Display
- Viewing Flight Information
- Understanding Access Levels
- Using Carrier-Preferred Displays
- Working with Direct Access
- Understanding the Display
- Working with a Schedule Display
- Working with a Timetable Display
- Changing the Display
- Requesting Minimum Connecting Times
- Passenger Name Records
- Before You Start
- Objectives
- Introduction
- PNR Basics
- Name Element
- Itinerary Element
- Contact Element
- Ticketing Arrangement Element
- Received From Element
- End Transaction
- Ignore Transaction
- PNR Header
- Using Optional Elements
- Individual PNR Security
- Using Special Segments
- Booking Special Passengers
- Retrieving PNRs
- Purged PNRs
- Modifying PNRs
- Printing a PNR
- Displaying PNR History
- Fares and Pricing
- Before You Start
- Objectives
- Introduction
- Working with Fare Displays
- Displaying Fare Notes
- Working with Follow-up Transactions
- Working with Fare Quote Tools
- Working with Informative Pricing
- Working with Itinerary Pricing
- Using Amadeus Best Pricer
- Using Master Pricer Expert
- Ticketing
- Before You Start
- Objectives
- Introduction
- Understanding TSTs
- Issuing Tickets
- Working with Agreement Tables
- Re-issuing Tickets
- Using Amadeus Ticket Changer
- Queues
- Before You Start
- Objectives
- Introduction
- Working with Queues
- What Is the Queue Bank?
- How to Display the Queue Bank
- How to Display Only Active Queues That Contain PNRs
- How to Perform a Queue Count Reset
- How to Start a Queue
- How to Remove the Current PNR and Display the Next One
- How to Delay a PNR
- How to Ignore Changes and Exit a Queue
- How to Confirm a Status Change
- How to Remove a PNR from a Queue
- How to Redisplay a Queue Message
- What Is Queue Placement?
- How to Manually Place a PNR in a Queue
- How to Browse a Queue
- How to Display a List of PNRs in a Specific Queue
- How to Display the Queue Planner by PNR Record Locator
- How to Display All Queues That Contain the PNR, from the PNR
- How to Print a Queue
- What Is the Queue Count Planner?
- How to Display a Time-Deferred Queue Count
- How to Display a Date-Deferred Queue Count
- How to Display a Month-Deferred Queue Count
- How to Copy a PNR from the Queue Planner
- How to Add a Queue
- How to Customize Queues and Categories
- How to Delete a Queue
- How to Remove All PNRs from a Queue
- Profiles
- Before You Start
- Objectives
- Introduction
- Working with Traveller Profiles
- How to Create a Traveller Profile
- How to Add PNR Transferable Data
- Modifying Profiles
- Working with Company Profiles
- Working with Agency Profiles
- Working with the Management Profile
- Profiles and PNRs
- Itinerary and Invoice
- Index
Amadeus System
Certification
Course Guide
YOUR USE OF THIS DOCUMENTATION IS SUBJECT TO THESE TERMS
Use of this documentation
You are authorized to view, copy, or print the documentation for your personal use only.
None of the Amadeus data included in the documentation may be sold, transferred, redistributed, retransmitted, published or commercially
exploited in any way without the express advance written permission of Amadeus.
This documentation is provided on an “AS IS” basis and Amadeus does not warrant any maintenance or support in using this documentation.
Data ownership
This documentation is protected by Intellectual Property rights and is the exclusive property of Amadeus. No licence over these Intellectual
Property rights is herein being granted. You acknowledge that the documentation is the valuable intellectual property of Amadeus and that if you
use, modify or distribute the documentation for unauthorized purposes, you will be liable to Amadeus for any damages it may suffer.
The examples in this document are for illustrative purposes only. The naming of particular airlines, hotels, car rental agencies, or other companies
in these examples does not constitute an endorsement, express or implied, of Amadeus by these companies or of these companies by Amadeus.
Product offers, prices, terms and other information provided herein are subject to change without notice. You should determine the appropriateness
of any product for your intended purpose and needs.
Amadeus makes no warranty of any kind including but not limited to the implied warranty of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s.
All Rights Reserved.
Edition 3.1 For [Product Name] [Release]
Job Number 3017 FE mmyy
Published by:
Amadeus Global Learning Services (Distribution and IT)
e-mail: learning@amadeus.com
March 2012
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved i
Table of Contents
Before You Start ...................................................................................... 1
Introduction............................................................................................ 1
Audience................................................................................................ 1
Course Objectives ................................................................................. 1
Course Guide Objectives....................................................................... 1
What Is New In This Guide?.................................................................. 2
Chapter 1
Getting Started......................................................................................... 3
Objectives.............................................................................................. 3
Signing In and Out................................................................................. 3
Remote Terminals and Offices....................................................................11
Viewing Office Profiles......................................................................... 13
Working with Agent Preferences ......................................................... 15
Working with Local Security ................................................................ 17
Working with Information in the Amadeus System.............................. 22
Amadeus Information Pages .......................................................................24
Amadeus Online Help..................................................................................26
Encoding and Decoding ...................................................................... 28
Using Timatic....................................................................................... 32
Chapter 2
Air............................................................................................................ 35
Before You Start.................................................................................. 35
Objectives............................................................................................ 35
Introduction.......................................................................................... 36
Working with an Availability Display .................................................... 37
Understanding the Display ..........................................................................37
Viewing Flight Information ...........................................................................44
Understanding Access Levels .....................................................................45
Using Carrier-Preferred Displays ................................................................49
Working with Direct Access.........................................................................50
Working with a Schedule Display ........................................................ 53
Working with a Timetable Display ....................................................... 54
Changing the Display .......................................................................... 56
Requesting Minimum Connecting Times............................................. 57
Chapter 3
Passenger Name Records .................................................................... 61
Before You Start.................................................................................. 61
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
ii Edition 3.1
Objectives............................................................................................ 61
Introduction.......................................................................................... 61
PNR Basics ......................................................................................... 63
Name Element.............................................................................................63
Itinerary Element .........................................................................................67
Contact Element..........................................................................................70
Ticketing Arrangement Element..................................................................71
Received From Element..............................................................................73
End Transaction ..........................................................................................73
Ignore Transaction.......................................................................................74
PNR Header ................................................................................................75
Using Optional Elements..................................................................... 75
Passenger and Segment Association .........................................................76
Special Service Requests............................................................................77
Other Service Information............................................................................80
Seat Requests.............................................................................................81
Frequent Flyer Information ..........................................................................83
Remarks ......................................................................................................85
Queue Option Indicators..............................................................................87
Ticketless Bookings.....................................................................................88
Individual PNR Security....................................................................... 89
Using Special Segments ..................................................................... 92
Married Segments .......................................................................................92
Open Segments...........................................................................................93
Waitlist Segments........................................................................................94
Information Segments .................................................................................95
Passive Segments.......................................................................................97
Auxiliary Segments....................................................................................100
Booking Special Passengers............................................................. 101
Unaccompanied Minors.............................................................................101
Stretcher Passengers................................................................................102
Extra Seats for Cabin Baggage.................................................................103
Extra Seats for Comfort.............................................................................105
Group PNRs ..............................................................................................106
Retrieving PNRs................................................................................ 107
Purged PNRs..................................................................................... 111
Modifying PNRs................................................................................. 112
Deleting PNR Elements.............................................................................112
Rebooking PNRs.......................................................................................115
Changing PNR Ownership ........................................................................118
Copying PNRs...........................................................................................119
Splitting PNRs ...........................................................................................121
Handling Non-Homogeneous PNRs..........................................................122
Printing a PNR................................................................................... 124
Displaying PNR History ..................................................................... 126
Chapter 4
Fares and Pricing ................................................................................ 129
Before You Start................................................................................ 129
Objectives.......................................................................................... 129
Introduction........................................................................................ 129
Fares and Pricing Entries ..........................................................................130
Working with Fare Displays............................................................... 131
What Fares Are Displayed?.......................................................................131
Fare Display Elements ..............................................................................132
Types of Fare Displays..............................................................................134
Fare Display Options.................................................................................137
Table of Contents
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved iii
Displaying Fare Notes ....................................................................... 139
Working with Follow-up Transactions................................................ 142
Taxes.........................................................................................................142
Booking Codes ..........................................................................................143
Routing and Mileage..................................................................................144
Extra Mileage Surcharge...........................................................................146
Fares and Currency...................................................................................147
Working with Fare Quote Tools......................................................... 148
Mileage ......................................................................................................148
Currency and Exchange Rates .................................................................149
Excess Baggage........................................................................................152
Working with Informative Pricing ....................................................... 152
What Is Informative Pricing?......................................................................152
Pricing with Informative Pricing .................................................................153
Working with Itinerary Pricing............................................................ 156
What Is Itinerary Pricing? ..........................................................................156
Pricing a PNR ............................................................................................157
Pricing Override Options ...........................................................................160
Using Amadeus Best Pricer............................................................... 162
What Is Amadeus Best Pricer? .................................................................162
Amadeus Best Pricer with Automatic Rebooking......................................162
Amadeus Best Pricer with Manual Rebooking ..........................................164
Amadeus Best Pricer Options ...................................................................166
Using Master Pricer Expert................................................................ 167
What Is Master Pricer Expert?...................................................................167
Recommendation Options.........................................................................169
What Is a Ticketability Check? ..................................................................170
Chapter 5
Ticketing............................................................................................... 173
Before You Start................................................................................ 173
Objectives.......................................................................................... 173
Introduction........................................................................................ 174
Understanding TSTs.......................................................................... 174
What Is a TST?..........................................................................................174
Types of TSTs ...........................................................................................175
Updating TSTs...........................................................................................178
Working with TSTs ....................................................................................182
Issuing Tickets................................................................................... 186
Working with Agreement Tables........................................................ 191
Re-issuing Tickets ............................................................................. 194
How to Re-issue a Ticket...........................................................................195
Using Amadeus Ticket Changer........................................................ 196
Chapter 6
Queues ................................................................................................. 199
Before You Start................................................................................ 199
Objectives.......................................................................................... 199
Introduction........................................................................................ 199
Queue Types.............................................................................................200
Commonly Used Queues ..........................................................................200
Nightly File Maintenance ...........................................................................201
Working with Queues ........................................................................ 201
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
iv Edition 3.1
Chapter 7
Profiles ................................................................................................. 217
Before You Start................................................................................ 217
Objectives.......................................................................................... 217
Introduction........................................................................................ 218
What Is a Profile? ......................................................................................218
What Is Profile Mode? ...............................................................................221
Working with Traveller Profiles.......................................................... 221
Modifying Profiles .............................................................................. 226
Working with Company Profiles......................................................... 230
What Is a Company Profile?......................................................................230
Working with Agency Profiles............................................................ 231
What Is an Agency Profile? .......................................................................231
Working with the Management Profile............................................... 232
What Is a Management Profile?................................................................232
Profiles and PNRs ............................................................................. 234
Chapter 8
Itinerary and Invoice............................................................................ 237
Before You Start................................................................................ 237
Objectives.......................................................................................... 237
Introduction........................................................................................ 237
Itineraries........................................................................................... 238
Type of Itineraries......................................................................................238
What Is Displayed on an Itinerary? ...........................................................238
Working with Itineraries .............................................................................239
Invoices ............................................................................................. 240
Types of Invoices.......................................................................................240
What Is Displayed on an Invoice? .............................................................241
Working with Invoices................................................................................241
Sending Documents .......................................................................... 243
Using Remarks.................................................................................. 243
Index ..................................................................................................... 245
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 1
Before You Start
Introduction
The Amadeus central system is a global distribution system (GDS) that allows
users to book and sell tickets for multiple travel-related companies, including
airlines, trains, cruises, car rentals, ferries, and hotels.
Audience
This course guide is intended for Amadeus Commercial Organizations (ACOs)
and system user airline staff attending the Amadeus System Certification (ASC)
training course.
Course Objectives
The objective of the Amadeus System Certification course is to provide a high
standard of knowledge and experience in order for the participants to receive the
Amadeus Certificate of Achievement.
Course Guide Objectives
The aim of this document is to reinforce the lessons you learn in the Amadeus
System Certification course, as well as to provide a structure for teaching the
course content to your customers.
This guide provides help in understanding the material presented in the Amadeus
System Certification (ASC) course.
It is designed to help you:
• Learn how to sign in and navigate
• Understand important concepts for each area
• Perform tasks
• Locate additional information in the Amadeus Online Help
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
2 Edition 3.1
What Is New In This Guide?
In this edition of the Amadeus System Certification Course Guide, the following
changes have been made:
Type of Change Area/Topic
Update • The cryptic commands used to search for PNRs
have been updated. For more information, see
How to Search for PNRs on page 110.
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 3
Chapter 1
Getting Started
Here we explain the basics you need to get started in the Amadeus central
system.
Objectives
The objectives of the Getting Started module include:
• Signing in and signing out
• Accessing and moving between work areas
• Identifying the office ID and terminal address
• Understanding local security
• Displaying, updating and resetting agent preferences
• Displaying Amadeus Information Pages
• Displaying Amadeus Online Help
• Encoding and decoding:
- Cities and airports
- Countries, states and provinces
- Airlines and aircraft types
- Car rental companies and hotel chains
• Using the Timatic system
Signing In and Out
What do you need to understand about signing in and out of the system?
You must have a sign to access the distribution system. A sign is assigned to
each person authorized to use an Amadeus terminal. This sign is unique to an
individual and provides a way to identify the actions performed by the agent.
Each Amadeus sign is a six-character code. The first four characters must be
numbers. The last two characters can be letters or a combination of a letter and a
number.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
4 Edition 3.1
Each sign can have a number of duty codes associated to it. These duty codes
specify which transactions the agent can or cannot perform. See What Are Duty
Codes? below for more information on duty codes.
In addition to the security determined by the sign, a further security structure is in
place to allow or disallow certain transactions. This security structure is based on
the office identification and the terminal address.
There are six work areas, identified by the letters A to F, associated with each
terminal. When you sign in to the system, you sign in to one or more work areas.
See What Are Work Areas? on page 5 for more information on work areas.
Depending upon your sign configuration, you may need a password to sign in.
For more information, see HE SIGN.
What Are Duty Codes?
A duty code restricts access to certain Amadeus functionality. You can have
multiple duty codes associated with your sign.
If you have more than one duty code for your agent sign, you must specify which
duty code you want to use for your sign-in.
The following table shows the available duty codes:
Table: Duty Codes
Duty Code Description
AS Agent Sell (travel agents only)
CE Customer Engineer
GS General Sales Agent
PD Pre/Post Departure Agent
PR Programmer
RC Space Control
SU Supervisor
TR TTY Reject Agent
Some duty codes are not available in all markets.
How to Sign In to the System
To sign in, enter, for example:
JI 0001AA /SU -PASSWORD
JI Sign in transaction code
0001AA Agent sign
/SU Slash, duty code
-PASSWORD Dash, your password
For information about creating and changing passwords, see HE GEN, GP SIG.
Chapter 1 Getting Started
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 5
What Are Work Areas?
There are six work areas in the system. Each work area is identified by a letter
from A to F. If you do not specify a work area when you sign in, the system
assigns the first available work area to you.
Only one PNR at a time can be active in a work area. You can work on more than
one PNR at a time, each in a different work area.
Similarly, more than one agent can work on the same terminal at the same time.
Each agent can sign in to a different work area using the individual agent signs.
How to Sign In to Work Areas
The entries below show several ways you can sign in to one or more work areas:
Table: Sign In To Work Areas
Entry Signs in to...
JI C 0404FG /SU -PASSWORD A specific work area
In this example, work area C
JI A/F 2345AB /SU -PASSWORD Multiple work areas
In this example, work areas A and F
Note: You must enter a slash (/) between the
work area identifiers
JI* 0001AA /SU - PASSWORD All work areas, A to F
How to Identify Your Work Area Status
To check the status of your work areas after you have signed in, enter:
JD
This entry also displays your terminal address and your office ID. The terminal
address appears in the top-left corner of the screen, with the office ID next to it.
System response:
09B55EC8n NCE1A0950o PSEUDO CITY : NCE
AREA TM MOD SG/DT.LG TIME QCAT ACT.Q STATUS NAME
A-IN TRN KO/SU.EN 24 SIGNED
B NOT SIGNED
C NOT SIGNED
D NOT SIGNED
E NOT SIGNED
F NOT SIGNED
n Terminal address
o Office ID
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
6 Edition 3.1
What Is a Terminal Address?
Each PC has a unique terminal address that can be found in the top-left corner of
the work area status display. See How to Identify Your Work Area Status on page
5 for information on displaying your work area status.
The terminal address is attached to a user group set by each market. A user
group determines the level of access for each duty code. Groups might be ticket
agents, reservation agents or help desk agents.
Security definitions contained in the terminal address are checked during sign-in,
allowing the system to identify the user. Once all checks have been completed,
an agent assembly area (AAA), which is a temporary holding area, is assigned to
the terminal.
What Is an Office ID?
Each Amadeus terminal is associated to a unique office ID. The office ID
determines the access rights and security for the users of the office.
The office ID is structured as follows:
NCE AF 0 100
NCE Three-character IATA city or airport code
AF Two-character IATA corporate code for the airline, travel agency, hotel, car
or other provider
0 Corporate qualifier code
100 Office code/type
Corporate Qualifier Codes
The table below describes the corporate qualifier codes:
Table: Corporate Qualifier Codes
Code Description
0 Amadeus users and Amadeus Altéa Reservation airlines
1 Participating airlines
2, 3 Travel agencies
4 Hotel providers
5 Car providers
6 Tour providers
7 Surface providers
8 Other providers
9 Wholesalers
Note: The corporate qualifier code is always related to the corporate code.
Chapter 1 Getting Started
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 7
Office Type Codes
The tables below describe the office type codes that correspond with the
corporate qualifier codes.
The office type code for the Amadeus Service Management Centre is 990.
This table shows the codes for airline offices.
Table: Office Type Codes - Airline Offices
Code Office Type
001 - 0ZZ Airport offices
100 - 54Z Ticketing offices
550 - 59Z Space control
555 Space control with reject queue
600 - 899 Miscellaneous
8AA - 8ZZ Internet offices
900 - 94Z Training offices
980 - 98Z Help desk
This table shows the codes for travel agencies and other service providers.
Table: Office Type Codes - Travel Agencies or Service Providers
Code Office Type
001 - 0ZZ Airport offices
100 - 899 Town offices
8AA - 8ZZ Internet offices
900 - 94Z Training offices
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
8 Edition 3.1
How to Display Corporate Codes
There are two ways you can display the corporate codes used in an Amadeus
office ID: by code or by name.
Search by Code
To do this, enter the transaction code followed by the first letter of the code you
wish to see. For example:
GG CORP CODES X
This entry returns the list of codes in Amadeus that start with the letter X.
System response:
CORPCODES X EN 3FEB09 1404Z
COD*QUALIFIER **CORPORATE - NAMES
================================================================
X1 ..2....... TUR ACCESS TTS SOFTWARE
X5 .1........ CRONUS AIRLINES
X9 ..2....... TAJAMAR IN CHILE -LANCHILE SPONSORED CHANNEL
XA ..2....... ALPITOUR
XB ..2....... BOLIVIAN TRAVEL AGENCIES
XD ..2....... TAJAMAR IN CHILE
XF .1........ VOSTOK AIR
XF ..2....... STARTER
XF ...3...... STARTER
XG 0......... ALSAVIA
XH 0......... DEUTSCHE BUNDESBAHN
XH ..2....... DATA SYSTEM TOUR ACCESS
XI ..2....... CIT/GLOBE TOUR ACCESS
XI ...3...... IXIGO METASEARCH COMPANY
XK 0......... CORSE MEDITERRANEE
XK ....4..... AMADEUS HDP CRS
XK .........9 AMADEUS HDP CRS
XL .1........ COUNTRY CONNECTION AIRLINES
Chapter 1 Getting Started
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 9
Search by Name
You can also search for the codes using a company name. For example:
GG CORP NAMES M
This entry returns a list of all the companies in Amadeus that start with the letter
M or have a corporate code that starts with M.
System response:
CORPCODE PER NAMES M EN 9APR09 0719Z
CORPORATE - NAMES (M) CODE QUALIFIER
=========================================================================
1001 SOLEILS MS ......6...
M2B MW ...3......
M.O. TOURIST MG ...3......
MACDONALD HOTEL GRP GB ....4.....
MACEDONIAN TRAVEL AGENTS M8 ..2.......
MADAGASCAR TRAVEL AGENCIES MG ..2.......
MAERSK AIR DM .1........
MAERSK TRAVEL MT ..2.......
MAEVA MV ......6...
MAGES MA .....5....
MAGGIORE MG .....5....
MAGNUSON HOTELS AS - 13/11/07 MS ....4.....
MAIN STAY MZ ....4.....
MAJORICA MA ..2.......
MAJOR TRAVEL M2 ...3......
MAKE MY TRIP MY ...3......
MALAYSIAN AIRLINES SYSTEM MH .1........
MALAYSIAN TRAVEL AGENCIES MY ..2.......
How to Move Between Different Work Areas
When you sign in to more than one work area, you can move from one signed
area to another.
To move to a specific work area, enter:
JM A
Note: This entry also reactivates a temporarily deactivated work area. See
How to Temporarily Deactivate a Work Area below.
How to Move to and Sign In to Another Work Area
The system allows you to temporarily leave a currently-signed work area and sign
in to another work area at the same time. To do this, enter:
JX D
Note: The system retains the settings of your previous work area.
How to Temporarily Deactivate a Work Area
If you need to be away from your terminal for a short time, such as for a meeting
or a break, you can temporarily deactivate your work areas without signing out of
the system and having to sign back in when you return.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
10 Edition 3.1
Deactivating your work areas password-protects them and prevents other agents
from using your sign and modifying your work. Any other agents who want to use
the same terminal must sign in with their own signs.
To temporarily deactivate all of your work areas, enter:
JS
Once you have deactivated your work areas, you cannot continue working until
you reactivate them. However, you can only reactivate one work area at a time by
entering the JM transaction code followed by the work area identifier.
For example, to reactivate work area A, enter:
JM A
You must enter your password to complete the transaction.
How to Sign Out of the System and Work Areas
The basic sign-out entry, which signs you out of your current work area, is:
JO
You can also use the following entries to sign out of specific work areas:
Table: Sign Out of Work Areas
Entry System Response
JO B Signs out of a specific work area
In this example, sign out of work area B
JO C/D Signs out of multiple work areas
In this example, work areas C and D
JO * Signs out of all signed work areas
Chapter 1 Getting Started
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 11
Remote Terminals and Offices
The information here describes some sign-in and sign-out tasks that allow you to
access other offices and terminals remotely.
Note: You may require specific security settings to complete these tasks.
How to Sign In Using an Extended Sign
Using an extended sign allows you to stay at your current terminal, but sign in to
another office using your agent sign.
When you sign in with an extended sign, the system associates your terminal to
the other office and gives you access to the other office's PNRs, queues and
other data. However, your terminal definitions remain unchanged.
To sign in using an extended sign, enter:
JI 1974AB/SU .OFFICEID -PASSWORD
JI Remote sign-in transaction code
1974AB/SU Agent sign, slash, duty code
.OFFICEID Dot, remote office ID
-PASSWORD Dash, your password
Note: You must have the appropriate security rights to sign in to another
office.
How to Sign In to a Remote Office
If security permits, you can use remote office access entries to emulate a terminal
in another office. With these entries, you assume all the office profile settings of
the remote office.
There are two ways to perform a remote office sign-in:
• Remote office jump: JUM
• Remote office log-on: JUI
For more information on remote offices, see HE REMOTE OFFICE.
Remote Office Jump
The remote office jump is the quickest way to sign in. It allows you to jump from
your own office to a remote office in a single entry, without first signing out of your
current session.
To perform the remote office jump, you must be signed in. This allows the system
to identify the agent who initiated the remote office session, by storing the sign ID
from which the remote office jump entry was performed. Enter:
JUM /O-OFFICEID
JUM Remote office jump transaction code
/O Slash, office type identifier
-OFFICEID Dash, target office ID
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
12 Edition 3.1
Remote Office Log-On
To perform a remote office log-on:
1. Sign out of all work areas of your current session.
JO or JO*
2. Enter the remote office log-on transaction code and specify the office.
JUI /O-OFFICEID
JUI Remote office log-on transaction code
/O Slash, office type identifier
-OFFICEID Dash, target office ID
3. Sign in using one of the following:
- A sign of the target office: JI 0001AA /SU
- Your own sign: JI 1234AB /SU
- A universal sign: JIU 2400CA /SU
Alternatively, you can perform steps 2 and 3 together, using the entry:
JUI /O -NCE1A0902 /JI 1234AB /SU
How to Sign Out of a Remote Office
To sign out of a remote office session, enter:
JUO
When you end a remote office session, the sign and working areas are retrieved
as they were left.
How to Sign Out Remotely from a Different Terminal
You can sign out from a different terminal than the one you signed in on.
To sign out remotely from another terminal, enter:
JUR 1234XY /PASSWORD
JUR Remote sign-out transaction code
1234XY Agent sign
/PASSWORD Slash, your password
Chapter 1 Getting Started
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 13
If you are sharing an agent sign with other agents, you must add the terminal
address to your entry:
JUR 9876ZY /PASSWORD /T -0908C4CD
JUR Remote sign-out transaction code
9876ZY Agent sign
/PASSWORD Slash, your password
/T Slash, T
-0908C4CD Dash, your terminal address
This allows other agents using the same sign to continue working.
Viewing Office Profiles
Here we describe what you need to understand about the office ID and the office
profile.
For more information, see HE OFFICE.
What Is an Office Profile?
The Amadeus office profile is the security record that controls many features at
the office level. It displays all the settings for the office, including the office ID,
address and telephone information, opening hours and messaging information.
There are two types of office profiles you can view: mini and full.
Note: All agents can display the mini office profile. Only authorized agents can
display the full office profile.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
14 Edition 3.1
How to View the Mini Office Profile
To view your mini office profile, enter:
PV
System response:
* * * * * * * * * * * * PV OFFICE PROFILE * * * * * * * * * *
AMADEUS OFFICE ID - NCE1A0950 AMID - 000027
NATIONAL SYSTEM OFFICE ID - 1A/NCE1A0950
DATE/TIME - 07MAY09/0918
* * * * * * * * * * * * OFFICE IDENTIFICATION * * * * * * * *
UVC*PRIMARY VENDOR CODE - AMAD
CIN*IATA NUMBER - 12345675 - PRIMARY
ERN*ERSP NUMBER - 00000000
UVC*USER CODE - N
OSD*OFFICE SUBDIVISION - 01
* * * * * * * * * * * * GENERAL DATA * * * * * * * * * * * *
NAM*OFFICE NAME - AMADEUS PRODUCT PLANNING
AD1 ADDRESS 1 - 155 ROUTE DU PIN MONTARD
AD2 ADDRESS 2 - BOITE POSTALE 69
AD3 CITY NAME - 06902 SOPHIA ANTIPOLIS CEDEX
CRP*CORPORATE IMPLANT- NONE
CST*CONSORTIUM CODES - NONE
CTN*COUNTRY NAME - FRANCE
PHO PHONE PRIMARY - 33492943273
PH2 PHONE SECONDARY - NONE
FAX FAX PRIMARY - NONE
You can also view the mini office profile for any office in the Amadeus system.
To view the mini profile for another office, enter a slash (/) and the office ID:
PV /NCEAF0100
Chapter 1 Getting Started
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 15
How to View the Full Office Profile
To view the full office profile, enter:
PV A
System response:
* * * * * * * * * * * * OFFICE PROFILE * * * * * * * * * * *
NS OFFICE ID 1A OFFID AMID DATE/TIME ACT
1A/NCE1A0950 NCE1A0950 000027 22MAY09/1419 YES
* * * * * * * * * * * * OFFICE IDENTIFICATION * * * * * * * *
UVC*PRIMARY VENDOR CODE - AMAD
AVC*MULTI-VENDORS - AMAD SOUS AMUK AMAU ATAU STRT ESFR
AMZA ALBA AL6X AMBE AMCH ALQF AMPT
AQO*ALT.QUEUING OFFICE - 000027 NCE1A0950
CIN IATA NUMBER - 12345675 - PRIMARY
ERN ERSP NUMBER - 00000000
NAO*NON-AUTOMATED OFFICE - NO
UVC*USER CODE - N
UST USER TYPE - A : AIRLINE OFFICE (ATO/CTO)
UGR*SECURITY USERGROUP - 1APP1
WGR*RDA WGR SET TYPE - AFRV
INS INTERNET SITE - NO
ISC*INTERNET SITE CODE - NONE
URL WEB SITE URL - NONE
API API SITE - NO
PCM*REMOTE PRINTER CLUSTER - AA0020
PSM*PRINTER SECURITY MNEM - M00537
To view the full profile for another office, enter:
PVA NCEAF0100
Note: There is no slash in the entry after the PVA transaction code.
Working with Agent Preferences
This section describes what you need to understand about agent preferences and
how to work with them.
For more information, see HE PREFERENCES.
What Are Agent Profiles and Preferences?
Each agent has an agent profile. The profile is made up of attributes that describe
the agent's security profile, rights and duties, and preferences. Each attribute has
a three-character code, description and value.
Your agent preferences control certain default options that you use in the system,
such as language preference, 12- or 24-hour clock formats and so on, or the
defaults that are used in the system such as the TST layout.
You can display and modify certain preferences attached to your own agent sign.
Modifying your sign does not bypass any existing security checks.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
16 Edition 3.1
How to Display the Agent Profile
Each agent profile contains both agent preferences and settings that apply to the
office. Agents can only change their preferences, not the office settings.
To display the current settings of your agent profile, enter:
JGD
System response:
********************* SIGN IDENTIFICATION *********************
OFFICE - NCE1A0900
SIGN - 6749MO
SIGNED IN AT 09B00866
*********************** SECURITY PROFILE **********************
PAT ALLOWED PASSWORD ATTEMPTS - 3
PWR PASSWORD REQUIRED INDICATOR - Y
********************** RIGHTS AND DUTIES **********************
DUT DUTY CODES - SU
************************* PREFERENCES *************************
LNG LANGUAGE PREFERENCE - EN
RAI RAIL PREFERENCE - NONE
FRR FERRY PREFERENCE - NONE
How to Display Agent Preferences
To display only your agent preferences, enter:
JGD /P
To display a single preference, enter the attribute code after the transaction code:
JGD /LNG
JGD Agent profile transaction code
/LNG Slash, attribute code
Some common preferences include:
Table: Common Agent Preferences
Attribute Code Preference Description
LNG Language
QCT Queue category
TCM Time control
DIS Distance unit
For more information on the specific agent preferences, see HE PREFERENCES.
How to Update Agent Preferences
Depending on the security configuration in your office, you may be authorized to
update your preferences.
To change a preference, enter the transaction code followed by a slash (/), the
attribute code, a dash (-) and the new value.
Chapter 1 Getting Started
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 17
For example, to change the language preference to French, enter:
JGU /LNG-FR
You can specify as many preferences as you like in a single entry. For example,
to change the language preference to French, the queue sorting category to 29
and the TST display mode to cryptic, enter:
JGU /LNG-FR /QCT-29 /TST-C
Note: If you make updates to your agent preferences in the production
system, you must also make them in the training system.
How to Reset Agent Preferences to the Default Settings
To reset all the agent preferences to the default settings, enter:
JGR /ALL
To reset a specific attribute to its default setting, enter the JGR transaction code,
followed by a slash and the attribute code:
JGR /LNG
Working with Local Security
Here we describe what you need to know about office security and agent signs,
and how to create and manage agent signs in an office.
For more information, see HE LSA.
What Are Security Levels?
There are three levels in an office's security structure:
• Amadeus Security Administrator
Many of the security features in Amadeus are controlled centrally by the
Amadeus Security Administrator (ASA).
The ASA has full security rights to the entire office ID and creates the sign for
the local security administrator.
• Local Security Administrator
The local security functions in Amadeus allow many of the security features
of an office to be maintained by a person or persons in that office. This
person is known as the Local Security Administrator (LSA).
The LSA creates and maintains sign banks and security profiles for the
agents in their office. The LSA has fewer security rights than the ASA.
Note: There must be one LSA (minimum) per office. However, a single
LSA can manage more than one office ID.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
18 Edition 3.1
• Agent
Agents are able to display and update certain elements of their security
profiles, depending on the rights granted to them by their LSA and the ASA.
They have the fewest security rights and can only update preferences for
their own signs.
For more information about agent preferences, see What Are Agent Profiles
and Preferences? on page 15.
LSA Rights During Office Creation
When a new office is created, an LSA sign (0000LS) is automatically created. This
sign has the LSA attribute set to Y (Yes).
The sign with LSA rights keeps these rights for 28 days after the time it was first
used. During this 28 day period, the person with the temporary LSA rights must
either make the sign a permanent LSA sign, or assign LSA rights to another sign.
If no sign has been assigned permanent LSA rights during the initial 28 day
period, then the next time someone signs in using the sign with the temporary
LSA rights, the following warning message is displayed:
PLEASE DESIGNATE LOCAL SECURITY ADMINISTRATOR DURING CURRENT
SESSION
Note: You must make the sign permanent during this session. If you do not,
no one can sign in to the office with LSA rights after this session.
How to Create a Permanent LSA Sign
To create a permanent LSA sign:
4. Sign in using the sign with temporary LSA rights.
JI 0000LS /SU
JI Sign in transaction code
0000LS Sign with temporary LSA rights
/SU Slash, duty code
5. Give this sign permanent LSA rights.
JGU /LSA -Y
JGU Update agent profile transaction code
/LSA Slash, attribute for LSA rights
-Y Dash, attribute value
Chapter 1 Getting Started
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 19
6. Assign LSA rights to another sign.
JGU 1234AB /LSA -Y
JGU Update agent profile transaction code
1234AB Agent sign
/LSA Slash, attribute for LSA rights
-Y Dash, attribute value
Note: Once a sign is updated with permanent LSA rights, or a sign is created
with permanent LSA rights, a password is required at the next sign-in.
What Is a Sign Bank?
The sign bank is the repository for all the agent signs in the office. It is created
when the office is created in the system and is administered by the LSA.
How to Display the Sign Bank
If you have the correct rights, you can display the sign bank. Enter:
JCD
System response:
OFFICE NCE1A0950
SIGN LOC PLC QCT DUTY CODES USER NAME
------ --- --- ---- ---------------------------- ----------
0000SY N N GS,AS,TR,RC,SU,PR
0001AA N Y GS,AS,TR,RC,SU,PR ANTONIO CA
0005CM N N GS,AS,TR,RC,SU,PR CMARECHAL
0006MA N N GS,AS,TR,RC,SU,PR MARISA ALO
0008JL N N GS,AS,TR,RC,SU,PR JULIEN
0020FE N N GS,AS,TR,RC,SU,PR ETILE FRED
0036RI N N GS,AS,TR,RC,SU,PR RENATA IVA
0051SL N N GS,AS,TR,RC,SU,PR SANDRINE L
0052JS N N GS,AS,TR,RC,SU,PR JEAN SKAMA
0055YM N N GS,AS,TR,RC,SU,PR YVES MORE
0061RO N N GS,AS,TR,RC,SU,PR OUAFAE RA
You can specify which office's sign bank you wish to view. Enter the transaction
code followed by the office ID:
JCD NCEAF0100
How to Create an Agent Sign and Profile
You can only create an agent sign and add the sign to the sign bank if you have
ASA or LSA rights. When you create a sign, you can also assign security
attributes to this sign at the same time.
Note: These attributes can be changed later using the security profile update
command. However, it is recommended to assign the security attribute
to a sign when the sign is created.
Any security attributes that you do not enter take the values from the office's
default attributes.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
20 Edition 3.1
Here is an example entry:
JGA 1234AB .NCE1A0TRN /DUTA-SU /QCT-21
JGA Create agent sign transaction code
1234AB New agent sign
.NCE1A0TRN Dot, office ID (optional)
If this is not entered, the current office ID is taken by default
/DUTA-SU Slash, first security attribute identifier, dash, attribute value
/QCT-21 Slash, second security attribute identifier, dash, attribute value
The LSA may enter as many security attributes as required. The attribute
identifiers for these groups are described in the Amadeus online help.
For more information, see HE LSA, GP LS2.
How to Copy an Agent Sign and Profile
If you have LSA rights, you can copy an existing agent sign to create a new sign.
For example:
JGC 1234AB .NCE1A0TRN -9876ZY /1357AC /2468BD
JGC Copy agent sign transaction code
1234AB Original sign from which attributes are to be copied
.NCE1A0TRN Dot, office ID of original sign
If this is not entered, the current office ID is taken by default
-9876ZY Dash, first new sign to be created
/1357AC Slash, second new sign to be created
/2468BD Slash, third new sign to be created
How to Update an Agent Profile
Use the update entry to change the attributes for a single sign that already exists
in the sign bank.
This entry can be performed by the ASA, the LSA and, with certain limitations, an
agent. If agents perform this entry, they can update only those attributes that they
are authorized to modify.
To update an agent profile, enter:
JGU 1234AB /LNG-FR
How to Reset an Agent Profile
The reset entry is used to reset the agent's attributes to the default office
attributes.
This entry can be performed by the ASA, the LSA and, with certain limitations, an
agent.
Chapter 1 Getting Started
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 21
To reset a sign’s queue sorting category to the office default, enter:
JGR 1234AB /QCT
How to Delete an Agent Sign
If you have LSA rights, you can delete an agent sign and its associated profile
from the sign bank.
To delete an agent sign and profile, enter the transaction code followed by the
sign you wish to delete:
JGX 9876ZY
How to Display Sign History
If you have LSA rights, you can display the history of an agent sign for the last 12
months.
The date when a sign was created or deleted is always retained in history,
provided it was after December 12 2001.
Note: History is not retained for currency preferences.
To display agent sign history, enter, for example:
JGH 1234AB .NCE1A0TRN or JGH
JGH Sign history transaction code
1234AB Agent sign (optional)
If this is not entered, the sign of the agent making the entry is
displayed
.NCE1A0TRN Dot, office ID (optional)
If this is not entered, the current office ID is used by default
How to Display the Default Office Security Settings
You can display the default security settings for agents in an office if you have
LSA rights. Enter the transaction code followed by the office ID:
JTD NCE1A0TRN
Note: If you do not enter an office ID, the current office ID is displayed.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
22 Edition 3.1
How to Update the Default Office Security Settings
If you have LSA rights, you can update the default security settings for an office.
To do this, enter:
JTU NCE1A0TRN/RMO-Y/R
JTU Update office security settings transaction code
NCE1A0TRN Office ID (optional)
If you do not enter an office ID, the current office ID is
displayed
/RMO Slash, attribute identifier
-Y Dash, attribute value
/R Slash, level of access granted to agent
How to Reset the Default Office Security Settings
If you have LSA rights, you can reset the security settings for an office.
The reset entry is used to reset the office's default security settings to the default
values set centrally by the ASA when the office was first created.
For example, here is how you would reset two of the office security attributes to
their default settings:
JTR NCE1A0TRN /RMO /LNG
JTR Reset office security settings transaction code
NCE1A0TRN Office ID (optional)
If you do not enter an office ID, the current office ID is
displayed
/RMO Slash, attribute identifier for first attribute to be reset
/LNG Slash, attribute identifier for second attribute to be reset
Working with Information in the Amadeus System
There are two main sources of information in the Amadeus system:
• Amadeus Information Pages
These reference pages are provided and updated by ACOs, outside
providers and Amadeus.
See Amadeus Information Pages on page 24.
• Amadeus Online Help
These help pages are provided and updated by Amadeus.
See Amadeus Online Help on page 26.
These pages provide you with the information you need to use the Amadeus
system and get help when you have questions.
Chapter 1 Getting Started
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 23
What Is a Quickpath?
You navigate around the information pages in the Amadeus system using
quickpaths, which are keyword entries that take you directly to the page you
want.
• To access information in the Amadeus Information Pages, the entry starts
with GG. To see a list of all information categories, enter: GG AIS
• To access information in the Amadeus Online Help, the entry starts with HE.
You can find a list of the main quickpath subjects on the help introduction
page. Enter: HE
Additionally, all transaction codes in the system are quickpaths. For example, if
you want to find help on the sign in transaction code, enter: HE JI
How to Navigate in the Amadeus Information Pages and Online Help
The information in the system can sometimes exceed one screen display.
Here are some scrolling commands you can use to view the additional
information:
Table: Scrolling Commands
Scrolling Command Description
MD or M Move down to the next screen
MU Move up to the previous screen
MT Move to first line (top of page)
MB Move to last line (bottom of page)
MS295 Move to the screen beginning on line number 295
MD106 Move down 106 lines
MU64 Move up 64 lines
MPGG Move to the previous information page displayed
MPHE Move to the previous help page displayed
GPCAR Go to the page using the CAR page code
For more information, enter HE SCROLL.
How to Display a Page in a Different Language
To display the current page in a specific language, enter the transaction code, a
semicolon and the two-letter language code:
GP ; FR
Note: This entry only works if the page is available in the requested language.
If not, the page language does not change. This entry does not change
your language preferences.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
24 Edition 3.1
How to Search for Text
You use the GSL entry to locate specific text or characters within an Amadeus
Information Pages page. The system searches for the text you have entered and
displays the line containing the text at the top of the screen.
For example, to search for the first occurrence of the word "infant," enter:
GSL /INFANT/
To search for the next occurrence of the text, enter the command again.
How to Print an Information Page or Online Help
To print an information page to your local printer, enter:
GL
For more information and printing options, see HE GL.
Amadeus Information Pages
Here we describe what you need to know about the Amadeus Information Pages.
For more information, see GG AIS.
What Are the Amadeus Information Pages?
Amadeus Information Pages are a central source of reference information.
There are three types of providers that add and maintain the information in the
Amadeus Information Pages:
• Amadeus
• ACOs
• Outside providers
Providers and ACOs can translate and store their information in different
languages, in addition to English. If you have specified a language preference in
your agent or office profile, the page is displayed in that language, provided it has
been translated. If the page has not been translated, the system displays it in
English.
For help on using the information pages, see HE GG.
How to Display the Amadeus Information Page Categories
To see a list of information categories, enter:
GG AIS
Note: Once you are signed in, you can request information from Amadeus
Information Pages at any time using the GG entry.
Chapter 1 Getting Started
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 25
How to Display General Information Provided By Amadeus
The pages provided by Amadeus cover a wide range of information. Below are
some examples of commonly used Amadeus pages.
Table: Common Amadeus Pages
Entry System Response
GG COU Displays main country pages, containing detailed facts
and other information for over 200 countries
GG COU BE Displays specific country information page
In this example, the country pages for Belgium (BE)
GG TRAINING Displays a catalogue of Amadeus training courses and
enrollment information
GG CODE W Displays a description of AIRIMP action codes and
four-letter service codes
In this example, to decode WCHR, or to find a list of all
codes that start with the letter W
GG APT SFO Displays information about specific airports
In this example, the airport information for San
Francisco airport (SFO)
GG WEA SFO Displays weather information for a specific airport
GG NEWS Displays Amadeus product news
GG 1A NEWS Displays specific Amadeus product information and
updates
How to Display ACO Pages
Amadeus Commercial Organizations (ACOs) provide information pages about
specific markets. To display the ACO page for a market, enter:
GG AMA XX
GG Amadeus Information Page transaction code
AMA Amadeus marketing company indicator
XX Country/market code
How to Display Provider Pages
The airlines and other providers that use Amadeus can provide their own
information pages in the system.
Below are some examples of provider pages and the information you can find on
them:
Table: Provider Page Examples
Entry System Response
GG AIR Displays an index of airline pages
GG AIR AF Displays an index of pages for a specific airline
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
26 Edition 3.1
Entry System Response
GG AIR AF BAGS Displays a specific page for an airline with the page
keyword
In this example, this entry displays the baggage policy
for Air France
GG AIR AF BAGS ; FR Displays the page in a different language (if available)
by adding the language code after a semicolon
In this example, changes the previous entry to display
the page in French (FR)
GG AIR LH NEWS Displays specific news for an airline
In this example, Lufthansa Airlines (LH)
GG CAR Displays the main index page for car providers
GG CAR ZI SYD Displays the main car page for the car company Avis
(ZI) at Sydney airport (SYD)
GG HTL Displays the main index page for hotel providers
GG HTL HI COM Displays the commission policy page (COM) for
Holiday Inn (HI) hotels
When you are in a provider page, you can return to the main index of the page at
any time by entering:
GP 1
Amadeus Online Help
Here we describe what you need to understand about using the Amadeus Online
Help.
For more information, see HE HELP.
What Is Amadeus Online Help?
Amadeus Online Help contains a detailed description of all the entries that can be
used in the distribution system. It explains how to use the entries, gives
examples, and describes the responses the entries generate.
Amadeus Online Help provides you with the most up-to-date support in the use of
the distribution system. The information it contains is updated as soon as a
functional enhancement is made to the system.
After accessing help, you can return to your previous activity.
Amadeus Online Help is part of the Amadeus Information Pages database, so the
quickpath principle applies to it as it does to Amadeus Information Pages.
Chapter 1 Getting Started
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 27
How to Access the Help Pages
There are several ways you can access the help pages. The table below shows
some examples:
Table: Accessing the Help Pages
Entry System Response
HE Displays the introduction to the help pages
HE SIGN Displays the main page for a specific subject (SIGN)
HE JI Displays help for a specific transaction code (JI)
If the page you requested is not available, a warning message appears.
How to Go Directly to Another Help Page
From an Amadeus Information Page, you can move directly to a specific page of
information using a three-character page code. This enables you to move
between pages (within the same category and subject) without having to refer
back to the index.
To move directly to a GG page, where XXX is the three-letter page code, enter:
GP XXX
How to Find a List of Quickpaths for a Subject
As an example, if you want to know the quickpath entries for the PNR subject in
the system:
1. Go to the PNR help pages.
HE PNR
2. Display the list of quickpaths for the subject.
GP QPS
System response:
QUICKPATHS EN 1APR09 1001Z
HERE ARE THE KEYWORDS OR QUICKPATHS FOR THIS SUBJECT
HEAI HEAM HEAP
HEAPA HEAPB HEAPE
HEAPH HEAPI HEAPIS
HEAPM HEARNK HEARRANGE
HEAPN HEASR HEASSOCIATION
HEAU HEAUX HEAUXILIARY
HEAXR HECHANGENAME HECHD
HECLAIM HECOMPANYNUMBER HECONTACT
HECOPY HECOPYPNR HECOSTCENTER
How to Display the Help Page for the Previous Entry
If you want to display the help page for the previous entry you made, enter the
help transaction code followed by a slash:
HE /
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
28 Edition 3.1
How to Find the Steps for a Transaction
Amadeus Online Help steps pages offer you a quick and simple procedure to
follow in order to complete a specific task.
To request steps, enter:
HE STEPS
The entries are not described in detail, and in many cases alternative entries
could be used. Some entries may vary depending on the practices in your
market.
Each procedure is followed by a list of help pages where you can find additional
information.
Encoding and Decoding
Here we describe what you need to know about encoding and decoding in the
system, as well as how to use the system's conversion functions.
For more information, see HE ENCODE or HE DECODE.
What Are Encode and Decode?
Amadeus uses codes to represent locations, companies and equipment in the
entries that you use in Amadeus and in the displays that are returned to you.
Therefore, you need to be able to interpret the codes you see and use.
The airline industry uses a system that identifies each airport and city with a
unique three-letter code. Each airline is identified by a unique two-character code.
With these codes, which are administered by the International Air Transport
Association (IATA) and the International Standards Organization (ISO), you can
identify cities, airports and airlines.
Many cities around the world have the same name, but are located in different
countries. In this case, the system displays the corresponding country code.
Here is an example of an encode display that shows the same city name (San
Jose) in different countries:
DAN SAN JOSE
A:APT B:BUS C:CITY G:GRD H:HELI O:OFF-PT R:RAIL S:ASSOC TOWN
SJS C SAN JOSE /BO
A SJS - SAN JOSE - 0K /BO
SJO*C SAN JOSE /CR
A SJO - JUAN SANTAMARIA - 0K /CR
A SYQ - TOBIAS BOLANOS - 0K /CR
SJI C SAN JOSE /PH
A SJI - MCGUIRE FLD - 0K /PH
SJC*C SAN JOSE /USCA
A RHV - REID HILLVIEW - 0K /USCA
A SJC - SAN JOSE MNPL - 0K /USCA
B ZJO - BUS STATION - 0K /USCA
SJD C SAN JOSE CABO /MX
A SJD - LOS CABOS - 0K /MX
SJE C SAN JOSE DEL GUA /CO
A SJE - SAN JOSE DEL GUA - 0K /CO
Similarly, many major cities such as Paris, London and New York, have more
than one airport. In the United States, Australia, Canada and some South
Chapter 1 Getting Started
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 29
American countries, two-letter state/province codes are included to correctly
identify the city and the state where the airport is located.
Here is an example of an encode display that shows multiple airports associated
with one city:
DAN NEW YORK
A:APT B:BUS C:CITY G:GRD H:HELI O:OFF-PT R:RAIL S:ASSOC TOWN
NYC C NEW YORK /USNY
A NBP - BATTERY PK CITY - 0K /USNY
A NES - EAST 34ST LANDING - 0K /USNY
A JFK - JOHN F KENNEDY - 0K /USNY
A LGA - LA GUARDIA - 0K /USNY
A QNY - MARINE AIR - 0K /USNY
A EWR - NEWARK LIBERTY INTL - 0K /USNJ
A NWS - WALL STREET SPB - 0K /USNY
H JRB - DOWN MANH HPT - 0K /USNY
H TSS - EAST 34TH HPT - 0K /USNY
H JRE - EAST 60TH HPT - 0K /USNY
H FLU - FLUSHING HELIPORT - 0K /USNY
H JRA - WEST 30TH HPT - 0K /USNY
P XNY - 39TH STREET FERRY - 0K /USNY
R ZME - METROPARK RAILWAY STN - 0K /USNJ
R ZRP - NEWARK RAILWAY STATION - 0K /USNJ
R ZYP - PENN RAILWAY STATION - 0K /USNY
How to Encode
Use the encode transaction when you know the name or partial name, and want
to find out the code.
For example, if you want to know the city code for Moscow, enter:
DAN MOSCOW
System response:
DAN MOSCOW
A:APT B:BUS C:CITY G:GRD H:HELI O:OFF-PT R:RAIL S:ASSOC TOWN
MOW C MOSCOW /RU
A BKA - BYKOVO - 0K /RU
A DME - DOMODEDOVO - 0K /RU
A SVO - SHEREMETYEVO INTL - 0K /RU
A VKO - VNUKOVO INTL - 0K /RU
R ZKD - LENINGRADSKIY RAIL - 0K /RU
R XRK - PAVELETSKIY RAIL STN - 0K /RU
PUW C PULLMAN /USWA
A PUW - MOSCOW REGIONAL - 0K /USWA
For more information, see HE DAN.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
30 Edition 3.1
Using a Wildcard
You can use an asterisk (*) as a wildcard. For example, if you do not know how
to spell Singapore but you know it starts with "Sing", enter:
DAN SING*
The system displays all the locations that start with "Sing" and their
corresponding codes:
DANSING*
A:APT B:BUS C:CITY G:GRD H:HELI O:OFF-PT R:RAIL S:ASSOC TOWN
SIN*C SINGAPORE /SG
A SIN - CHANGI - 0K /SG
A QPG - PAYA LEBAR - 0K /SG
A XSP - SELETAR - 0K /SG
SGB C SINGAUA /PG
A SGB - SINGAUA - 0K /PG
ZQA O SINGEN /DE
IXA C AGARTALA /IN
A IXA - SINGERBHIL - 0K /IN
SIQ C SINGKEP /ID
A SIQ - DABO - 0K /ID
SIX C SINGLETON /AUNS
A SIX - SINGLETON - 0K /AUNS
S5I G SINGSAKER /NO
Restricting the Encode Display
There are several options you can add to the DAN encode entry to restrict the
display. These options display all locations that contain the letters you enter.
For example, if you want to encode the name of a city, enter:
DAN PAR /C
This entry returns a list of all the cities that contain the letters PAR and their
corresponding codes.
Some common location encode options you can use to restrict the display
include:
Table: Common Encode Options
Option Description
/C City
/A Airport
/S Associated location
/N Nearest 10 airports
Chapter 1 Getting Started
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 31
How to Decode
Use the decode transaction when you know the code and want to find out the
name.
For example, if you want to know the name that corresponds with the code LHR,
enter:
DAC LHR
System response:
DACLHR
A:APT B:BUS C:CITY G:GRD H:HELI O:OFF-PT R:RAIL S:ASSOC TOWN
CITY :
LON C LONDON /GB:UNITED KINGDOM
AIRPORT-HELIPORT :
LHR A HEATHROW /GB - 0K
For more information, see HE DAC.
Encode and Decode Entries
The following table shows several commonly used encode and decode entries:
Table: Common Encode and Decode Entries
Entry Description
DNA Airline
DNC Car company
DNH Hotel company
DNE Flight equipment
DNS State/Province
Note: This only applies to Argentina (AR),
Australia (AU), Brazil (BR), Canada (CA)
and the United States of America (US).
DC Country
How to Calculate Times and Dates
You can make time and date calculations in the system using the DD entry.
The table below shows some examples of the types of information you can
display:
Table: Time and Date Entries
Entry System Response
DD Displays the current system time and date
DD MIA Displays the current time and date in Miami
DD 25DEC Displays the specific day of the week for a date
For example, on which day of the week is Christmas
Day
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
32 Edition 3.1
For more information and entries, see HE DD.
Using Timatic
Here we describe what you need to understand about the Timatic information
system.
For more information, see HE TIMATIC.
What Is Timatic?
Timatic is a third-party system that provides travel and health information. You
can access Timatic through Amadeus.
You can access the information in Timatic in three ways:
• By referring to a PNR segment
The easiest way to find the information if you already have a PNR is to refer
to the itinerary segments.
• Through guided mode
Guided mode gives you a line entry you can overwrite with the information
you need. You can use this without a PNR.
• Through expert mode
Expert mode relies on you knowing the formats for the entries. You do not
need a PNR.
For more information, see HE TIMATIC.
How to Request Visa and Health Information
You can request information about a passenger's travel requirements using the
existing information in itinerary segments.
For example, this entry allows you to request the information directly from a PNR:
TIRA /NABUD /EMMOW /DENYC /TRLON /S4
TIRA Timatic health and visa information transaction code
/NA BUD Slash, nationality indicator, nationality code
/EM MOW Slash, origin point indicator, origin point code
/DE NYC Slash, destination point indicator, destination point code
/TR LON Slash, transfer point indicator, transfer location code
/S4 Slash, segment reference
You can also request all the health and visa information by entering:
TI /ALL
Chapter 1 Getting Started
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 33
How to Request Detailed Travel Information
You can request detailed travel information in Timatic. For example, to request
customs information for Lisbon, enter:
TIDFT /LIS /CS
TIDFT Timatic display full text transaction code
/LIS Slash, city code
/CS Slash, customs information section code
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 35
Chapter 2
Air
Here we give you the basics you need to understand the Air module in the
Amadeus central system. It includes information on availability displays, access
levels, Direct Access, schedule displays, timetable displays, flight information,
and minimum connecting times.
Before You Start
In order to successfully use Amadeus Air, you must meet the following conditions:
• You must have an Agent sign.
If not, contact your supervisor.
• You must be able to sign in to and out of the system, and move among
different work areas.
• You must understand how to access the online help and Amadeus
Information Pages.
If you are unclear about any of the above listed items, review Getting Started on
page 3.
Objectives
The objectives of the Air module include:
• Displaying and reading a flight availability, schedule and timetable display
• Understanding the different flight types
• Requesting a carrier-preferred display, seven-day search and dual-city-pair
availability
• Viewing flight information
• Recognizing the various types of air access levels
• Using Direct Access entries
• Changing to different types of displays
• Requesting minimum connecting times
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
36 Edition 3.1
Introduction
Here we describe the functionality of Amadeus Air, its displays and the options
you have to customize your requests.
There are three types of displays in the Air module:
• Availability Display
An Amadeus availability display shows all flights with at least one seat
available for sale or waitlist, based on the transaction code and parameters
you use to request the display.
See Working with an Availability Display on page 37.
• Schedule Display
An Amadeus schedule display shows all flights operated by all airlines that
submit schedule information to Amadeus.
See Working with a Schedule Display on page 53.
• Timetable Display
An Amadeus timetable is a display of flights operating during a specified one
week period.
See Working with a Timetable Display on page 54.
Note: Flights up to 361 days in the future and up to three days in the past are
stored in the system. Flights in the past are shown in an availability
display without availability status codes.
For more information on the types of displays, see HE AIR, GP INT.
Other Types of Display Requests
In addition to the basic displays, you can request:
• A seven-day search
• A display for a dual-city pair
• A carrier-preferred display
• An availability by directly accessing an airline's reservation system
You can also customise display requests by using various options in your request
entry. See Understanding the Display on page 37 for more information.
If you want information about airlines in Amadeus, such as which ones offer last-
seat availability or carrier-preferred displays, enter GGPCALFIG.
Chapter 2 Ai
r
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 37
Working with an Availability Display
This section describes what you need to understand to work with availability
displays.
For more information, see HE AN.
Understanding the Display
Availability displays contain a great deal of flight information. This section
describes the various components of the availability display and explains how to
work with it.
What Is a Carrier?
A carrier is an airline that provides information to Amadeus. You can find different
types of airlines in the system:
• Altéa Reservation airlines—Amadeus system user airlines
• Participating carriers—Airlines which have signed the Participating Carrier
Agreement (PCA) with Amadeus but do not want to become system users.
They provide schedule information to Amadeus and allow you to sell seats.
• Non-participating carriers—these airlines provide schedule information to
Amadeus; however, you cannot sell seats.
What Is a Flight Type?
There are four main types of flights shown on an availability display, as described
in the table below.
Table: Flight Types
Flight Type Definition
Non-Stop A flight that operates between two cities without stops.
Direct A flight with intermediate stop(s) and the same flight number
and aircraft.
Connecting A flight with intermediate stop(s) and a change of flight
number and aircraft.
Change of Equipment
Change of Gauge
A connecting flight that operates between two cities with a
change of aircraft at an intermediate city, but no change to
the flight number.
Flight Type Examples
Here is an example of each flight type on an availability display:
Non-stop - Paris to London
1 AF1680 C9 D9 Z9 F1 O9 Y9 S9 /CDG2E LHR 2 1610 1625 E0/320 1:15
B9 K9 V9 L9 M9 Q9 X9 I2 GR
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
38 Edition 3.1
Direct - Frankfurt to Addis Ababa with one stop
1ET:LH1930 J4 C4 D4 Z4 Y4 B4 M4 /FRA 1 ADD 2150 0730+1E1/763 8:40
H4 Q4 V4 W4 U4 S4
Connecting - Paris to San Francisco via Amsterdam
4 KL1228 J4 C4 I4 Z4 X4 S4 B4 CDG2F AMS 0900 1020 E0/73H
M4 K4 H4 L4 Q4 T4 E4 N4 V4
KL 605 J4 S4 B4 M4 H4 Q4 K4 AMS SFO I 1110 1305 E0/744 13:05
L4
Change of Equipment - Barcelona to Caracas via Madrid with a change of
equipment
3 IB6701 J0 D0 I0 U0 YL BL HL /BCN B MAD 0845 0955 E0/320 IR
KL ML LL NL EL GL
/MAD4S CCS 1215 1445 E0/340 IR 12:30
Order of Flights
On EU displays, the system always shows flights in the following order:
• Non-stop flights
• Direct flights
• Connecting flights
• Change of equipment/gauge
What Is an Availability Display?
An Amadeus availability display shows all flights with at least one seat available
for sale or waitlist, based on the transaction code and parameters you use to
request the display. If you do not request a specific time, the first available flights
are displayed. Availability includes any airline that has a sales agreement with
Amadeus.
Note: Fully-booked and non-participating carrier flights are not displayed.
You can request four types of basic availability display:neutral, by departure time,
by arrival time, and by elapsed travel time.
The elapsed time shown on the display also includes any ground time.
How to Request an Availability Neutral Display
To request a basic availability neutral display, enter:
AN NYC
AN Availability neutral transaction code
NYC Arrival city
The entry defaults the originating city to the city location that is set up in the
terminal ID where the request is made and today's date if you do not enter a
specific date of departure.
You can add more options to the basic entry that allow you to provide more
specific information in your request. See How to Add Options on page 41 for
more information.
Chapter 2 Ai
r
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 39
To request a specific departure date and time, enter the date before and the time
after the city pair and before you add options:
AN 1DEC NYC 1500
If available, the system also displays flights that are one hour before the
requested departure time.
Sample Availability Display
Below is a sample of an availability display with explanations for the various
display elements.
AN19SEPCDGLAX n
** AMADEUS AVAILABILITY - AN ** LAX LOS ANGELES.USCA 172 SU 19SEP0900o
1 pAF 062 P9 F4 J9 C9 D9 I9 Z8 /CDG2F LAX 5 1015 1250 E0/772 11:35
Y9 B9 K9 H9 W9 T9 V9 L9 GR UR
2AF:DL8256qC7 D7 I7 Y7 B7 M7 H7 CDG2F LAX 5 1015 1250 E0/772 11:35
Q7 K7 L7 U7 T7
3 TN 021 P4 A0 J4 D4 Z4 Y4 M4 CDG2A LAX B 1130 1420 0*343 11:50
K4 H4 T4 L4 V4 Q4
4 AF 068 P9 F3 J9 C9 D9 I9 Z3r/CDG2F LAX 5 1315 1550 E0/772 11:35
Y9 B9 K9 H9 W9 T9 V9 L7 GR UR
5AF:DL8254 C7 D7 I0 Y7 B7 M7 H7 CDG2F LAX 5 s1315 1550 E0/772 11:35
Q7 K7 L7 U7 T7
6 AF 070 P9 F3 J9 C9 D9 I9 Y9 /CDG2F LAX B 1920 2145tE0/744 11:25
B9 K9 H9 W9 T9 V9 GR UR
7AF:DL8262 C7 D7 I7 Y7 B7 M7 H7 CDG2F LAX B 1920 2145 E0/744 u11:25
Q7 K7 L7 U7 T7
n AN entry with date, departure and arrival airports
o Day and date
p Airline and flight number
q Booking classes and number of seats
r Last seat availability indicator, departure/arrival airport and terminal
s Departure/arrival times
t E-ticket indicator, number of stops, access indicator, equipment code
u Elapsed travel time
What Is a Status Code?
When you display an availability request, the status codes are shown next to the
classes available on the flight:
6 AF 070 P9 F3 J9 C9 D9 I9 Y9 /CDG2F LAX B 1920 2145 E0/744 11:25
B9 K9 H9 W9 T9 V9 GR UR
The various status codes are described in the table below.
Table: Status Codes
Status Code Description
9 9 or more seats available
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
40 Edition 3.1
Status Code Description
1 - 8 The exact number of seats available for sale
0, L Waitlist open
R Seat on request
C Closed for sell
Note: A slash (/) before the departure city indicates that the seat availability is
taken in real time from the airline's inventory. For more information, see
Understanding Access Levels on page 45.
What Is a Codeshare?
A codeshare is an agreement between an airline that operates a flight using its
own flight number (the operating carrier) and another airline that also sells seats
on that same flight under its own flight number (the marketing carrier).
In the display, the operating carrier is shown to the left of the indicator and the
marketing carrier is shown to the right.
Here is an example of a codeshare flight:
1AF:DL8510 C7 D7 S7 I7 Y7 B7 M7 CDG2E LAX 2 1040 1310 E0/77W 11:30
H7 Q7 K7 L7 U0 T0
2 AF 062 P3 F2 J9 C9 D9 I9 Z9 /CDG2E LAX 2 1040 1310 E0/77W 11:30
A codeshare flight appears in the availability display in one of the following ways:
• A commercial duplicate.
AF : DL
This option shows the colon (:) indicator, which means that both airlines are
marketing and selling the flight. AF is the operating carrier.
• The flight is operated by one airline on behalf of another.
WX * AF
This option shows the asterisk (*) indicator, which means that WX is
operating the flight, but only AF is selling the flight.
* DL
This option shows the asterisk (*) as an indicator and a blank space where
the operating carrier would normally appear. This means that DL is
outsourcing the actual operation of the flight to another carrier that does not
have its own IATA code. DL is only selling the flight.
For more information on codeshare flights, see HE CODESHARE.
Chapter 2 Ai
r
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 41
What Is an Alliance?
An alliance is a group of airlines that create a network for routes and frequent
flyers.
You can request an alliance availability by inserting an asterisk (*) followed by the
alliance code after the availability transaction code (AN, AD, etc.). For example,
to request availability for flights on carriers belonging to the One World alliance
from London to New York, enter:
AN *O 25MAY LONNYC
AN Availability neutral transaction code
*O Alliance indicator, alliance code
25MAY Departure date
LONNYC City pair
The system response shows carriers in the alliance that fly that route:
AN*O25MAYLONNYC
** ONEWORLD - AN ** NUC NEW YOURK.USNY 172 SU 19SEP0000
1 AA 115 P9 F4 J9 C9 D9 I9 Z8 LHR 3 JFK 8 0830 1100 E0.777 7:30
Y9 B9 K9 H9 W9 T9 V9 L9 GR UR
2 BA 117 C7 D7 I7 Y7 B7 M7 H7 /LHR 5 JFK 7 0855 1120 E0/744 7:25
Q7 K7 L7 U7 T7
The alliance codes and descriptions are shown below:
Table: Alliance Codes
Alliance Code Description
A Star alliance
O One World alliance
S Sky Team alliance
For additional information about alliances, see GG ALLIANCE.
How to Add Options
In order to make your availability neutral display more specific, you can add
various options to your entry.
You always add options to the basic availability entry by including a slash (/) and
the option indicator before the specific information you request. For example, the
following entry helps allows you to request the flights from a specific airline:
AN 1DEC NYC /A AF
AN Availability neutral transaction code
1DEC Departure date
NYC Arrival city
/A Slash, option code
AF Specific airline
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
42 Edition 3.1
Below is a list of common availability options.
Table: Common Availability Options
Option Description Example
/K Specific cabin class /KC
/C Specific booking class /CY
/B Number of seats to book
Note: You can book up to nine
seats in one PNR. If you book
more, the booking becomes a
group booking.
/B5
/X Request a specific connecting point /XAMS
/X- Request to avoid a specific
connecting point /XAMS
For more information on additional options, see HE AN OPTIONS.
How to Request a Dual-City-Pair Display
You can request a dual-city-pair availability in one entry. The system searches for
flights for each origin and destination city.
To request a dual-city-pair availability, enter an asterisk (*) and the return date at
the end of your entry. For example:
AN 1DEC MEXNYC 1500 * 14DEC
Note: If you omit the return date, the system automatically displays return
flights departing one hour before 1800 on the same day.
System response:
AN1DECMEXNYC1500*14DEC
** AMADEUS AVAILABILITY - AN ** NYC NEW YORK.USNY 209 TU 01DEC 1500
1DL:AM5278 J9 A9 D9 R9 Y9 B9 M9 MEX 2 JFK 3 1420 2039 E0/757 5:19
S9 K9 Q9 N9 T9
2 DL 484 C7 D7 S7 I7 Y7 B7 M7 MEX 2 JFK 3 1420 2039 E0/757 5:19
H7 Q7 K7 L7 U7 T7
3MX:AA8298 J7 D7 Y7 B7 H7 K7 M7 MEX 1 JFK 8 1655 2230 E0.319 4:35
V7 W7 N7 S7 Q7 L7 G7
4 MX 002 J9 C9 D8 Y9 B9 H9 K9 /MEX 1 JFK 8 1655 2230 E0/319 4:35
M9 L9 V9 S9 N9 Q9 O9 G9 E9
** AMADEUS AVAILABILITY - AN ** MEX MEXICO CITY.MX 222 MO 14DEC 0000
11 MX 001 J9 C9 D9 Y9 B9 H9 K9 /JFK 8 MEX 1 0030 0500 E0/319 5:30
M9 L9 V9 S9 N9 Q9 O9 G9 E9
12MX:AA8297 J7 D7 Y7 B7 H7 K7 M7 JFK 8 MEX 1 0030 0500 E0.319 5:30
V7 W7 N7 S7 Q7 L7 G7
13 CO1736 C4 D4 Z4 A4 Y7 B4 M4 /EWR C MEX 2 0820 1300 E0/738 5:40
H4 K4 Q4 U4 V4 G4 W4 E4 S4 T4 N4 L4
14AM:DL8045 C7 D7 S7 I7 Y7 B7 M7 JFK 1 MEX 2 0900 1345 E0/738 5:45
H7 Q7 K7 L7 U7
Chapter 2 Ai
r
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 43
The display shows:
• Outbound flights beginning on line number 1 in the upper section of the
display and inbound flights beginning on line number 11 in the lower section.
• A header line for each availability display that contains the type of display,
number of days between current date and departure date, day of the week,
date, and time.
City Pair Options
If you want to use the same option for each city pair, you do not need to specify it
twice. The system automatically applies the same options that were entered for
the first city pair to the second city pair.
You must add an asterisk (*) near the end of the entry. For example:
AN 1DEC MEXNYC 1500 /B5 /AMX /KC * 14DEC
The departure time, number of seats, specific airline, and cabin class are applied
to the return flight by default.
Note: Any options that you want to apply to both city pairs must appear before
the asterisk.
If you want to specify a different option for each city pair of the round trip, you
must enter it in each part of the entry. For example:
AN 1DEC MEXNYC 1500 /B5 /AMX /KC * 14DEC 1600 /AAF /KF
Anything after the asterisk only applies to the second city pair.
How to Perform a Seven-Day Search
You can search for flights for a seven-day range from the date you specify in the
availability entry. This entry is useful for:
• Peak travel times
• Limited frequency
To request a seven-day search display, enter a slash (/) after the availability
transaction code. For example:
AN / 26FEB PARRUN /AAF
System response:
AN/26FEBPARRUN/AAF
**FIRST FLIGHT AVAILABLE 27FEB** PAR RUN
** AMADEUS AVAILABILITY - AN ** RUN ST DENIS REUNIO.RE 292 SA 27FEB 0000
1 AF 910 J9 Z9 Y9 A9 C9 X9 M9 /ORY S RUN 1545 0535+1E0/744 10:50
O9 K9 B9 H9 E9 T9 U9 L9 V9 W9 N9
The header line advises you of the date when the first flight is available (27FEB).
The system begins its search from the date in your entry; in this case the first
available flight is on February 27th.
Note: Flights that are available for waitlist only on all segments do not appear
in the seven-day search availability display.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
44 Edition 3.1
How to Move to the Previous Availability Display
If you want to move to a previous availability display, you have several options,
as described in the table below.
Table: Entries to Move to a Previous Availability Display
Entry Description
MPAN Move back to the previous availability display
MDAN Move back to the previous display and down to the
next screen of information
MUAN Move back to the previous display and up one screen
MTAN Move back to the top of the previous display
MBAN Move back to the bottom of the previous display
MOAN Move back to the first page of the original availability
request
Viewing Flight Information
Flight information is stored and displayed in Amadeus. The information available
is provided to Amadeus by the airline.
Here we describe what you need to understand flight information.
What Is Flight Information?
Flight information provides the most up-to-date planned and operational
information about a particular flight both before and after departure.
There are two types of flight information available:
• Planned flight information
• Latest known operational flight information
You can request flight information for flights shown in an availability or schedule
display.
For flights today, and up to three days in the past, operational information is
available, if it has been provided by the airline. If so, an asterisk (*) appears
immediately before the departure time of the flight.
How to Request Flight Information
You request flight information from availability and schedule displays using the
flight information transaction code and the line number from the display. For
example, to request information about line 2 of a display, enter:
DO 2
Chapter 2 Ai
r
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 45
You can also request flight information by flight number and date of departure:
DO BA342 /10MAY
System response:
DOBA342/10MAY
* OPERATIONAL FLIGHT INFO * BA 342 -3 SU 10MAY
CITY INFO HOUR (LOCAL)
LHR ETD ETD
OFF OFF
ETA ETA
NCE ARR ARR
* 1A PLANNED FLIGHT INFO * BA 342 -3 SU 10MAY
APT ARR DY DEP DY CLASS/MEAL EQP GRND EFT TTL
LHR 0750 SU JCDRIU/M Y/S 320 1:55
BHKMLVNQOSG/S
X/S
NCE 1045 SU 1:55
COMMENTS-
1.LHR NCE - DEPARTS TERMINAL 5
2.LHR NCE - ARRIVES TERMINAL 1
3.LHR NCE - 9/ NON-SMOKING
4.LHR NCE - ET/ ELECTRONIC TKT CANDIDATE
Understanding Access Levels
This section describes access levels and helps you to understand the differences
between the different kinds.
What Are Access Levels?
There are different access level indicators in the availability display. Each
indicator shows what access level agreement the airline has with Amadeus.
The access level indicator appears just before the flight equipment field in the
availability display.
For more information on access indicators, see HE ACCESS.
Access Level Indicator Information
The following tables show the access levels and related information.
The Last Seat Availability Indicator indicates if the seat availability comes from
the airline's real-time inventory.
The Action Code is displayed in the segment at sell time at and end of
transaction.
Table: Standard Access Level Indicators
Access Information Standard Access Display
Access Indicator Blank
Information Source 1A flight database
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
46 Edition 3.1
Access Information Standard Access Display
Dynamic Schedule Updates? NO
Note: Flight schedules are delivered on
Wednesday night and loaded on
Thursday afternoon (Saturday morning
for some US carriers).
Numeric Availability Updates? NO
Note: Standard updates only. Possible status:
Open: 4 or another value chosen by the
airline, Waiting: L or 0, Closed: C or S,
Request: R.
Last Seat Availability Indicator? NO
Action Code SS Æ HK
LL Æ HL
NN Æ HN
Segment sell message sent at: End of transaction
Can the sell be rejected? YES
Within 12 hours
Table: Direct Access Level Indicators
Access Information 1A Air Display Direct Access Display
Access Indicator *
Information Source 1A flight database Airline
Dynamic Schedule Updates? NO NO
Numeric Availability Updates? NO NO
Last Seat Availability Indicator? NO Direct Access offers
Last Seat Availability
Action Code SS Æ HK
LL Æ HL
NN Æ HN
LK Æ HK
NK Æ NK or HK
Segment sell message sent at: End of transaction End of transaction
Can the sell be rejected? YES
Within 12 hours
NO
Note: The Direct Access display is ACL1 from AN display or 1xxAN (xx =
airline code).
Table: Amadeus Access Update (AAU) Level Indicators
Access Information Display Without
Numeric Availability Display With Numeric
Availability
Access Indicator : :
Information Source 1A flight database 1A flight database
Dynamic Schedule Updates? YES YES
Numeric Availability Updates? NO YES
Chapter 2 Ai
r
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 47
Access Information Display Without
Numeric Availability Display With Numeric
Availability
Last Seat Availability Indicator? NO YES
Action Code SS Æ HK
LL Æ HL
NN Æ HN
SS Æ HK
LL Æ HL
NN Æ HN
Segment sell message sent at: End of transaction End of transaction
Can the sell be rejected? YES
Within 12 hours
YES
Within 12 hours
Table: Amadeus Access Sell (AAS) Level Indicators
Access Information Display Without
Dynamic Availability Display With Dynamic
Availability
Access Indicator . .
Information Source 1A flight database Airline
Dynamic Schedule Updates? NO NO
Numeric Availability Updates? NO NO
Last Seat Availability Indicator? NO YES
Action Code HK
HL
HN
HK
HL
HN
Segment sell message sent at: Segment sell Segment sell
Can the sell be rejected? NO NO
Table: Amadeus Full Access (AAU + AAS) Level Indicators
Access Information Amadeus Full Access Display
Access Indicator /
Information Source 1A flight database
Dynamic Schedule Updates? YES
Numeric Availability Updates? YES
Note: There are some exceptions.
Last Seat Availability Indicator? YES
Note: Unless airline is an exception and does not
send Numeric Availability Updates.
Action Code HK
HL
HN
Segment sell message sent at: Segment sell
Can the sell be rejected? NO
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
48 Edition 3.1
How to Display Airline Access Information
If you want to display detailed access level information for a specific airline, enter:
GG PCA XX
Replace XX with the two-character airline code.
System response:
PARTICIPATING CARRIER ACCESS AND FUNCTION LEVEL
BA - BRITISH AIRWAYS
ALTEA RESERVATION : YES
ACCESS INDICATOR : / RECORD LOCATOR RETURN : ALL
LAST SEAT AVAIL INDIC : / CARRIER PREFERRED DISP : YES
STANDARD ACCESS : BOOKING RANGE IN DAYS : 354
AMADEUS ACCESS SELL : YES INTERACTIVE SEAT MAP : YES
DYNAMIC SCHEDULE UPD : YES INTERACTIVE ASR : YES
NUMERIC AVAIL UPDATE : YES ASR DAYS/HOURS : 354/24
AMADEUS DYNAMIC AVAIL : YES BP ISSUE DAYS/HOURS : 000/00
DIRECT ACCESS :
PASSIVE SEGMENT: PASSIVE NOTIFY: PNR CLAIM:
SERVICE SEGMENT: DELETE SEGMENT: TICKETLESS:
MEAL VALIDATION: Y FREQUENT FLYER: Y EPAY:
What Is Ticketless Access?
Some carriers use ticketless bookings, and typically sell directly to their
customers via a website. They can be included in the system as ticketless access
airlines.
These carriers are identified by a dash (-) in the Access Indicator field on an
availability display and by the letter Y in the TICKETLESS field of the airline's
GG PCA page.
The airline must have an agreement to sell via Amadeus in Amadeus Ticketless
Access and must authorize agencies to make sales on its flights through the use
of an extended ownership security (EOS) agreement.
The rules for making a booking on a ticketless access airline are different from
those for airlines using other types of Amadeus access.
For more information, see HE TLA.
Chapter 2 Ai
r
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 49
Using Carrier-Preferred Displays
This section describes what you need to understand to request carrier-preferred
displays.
What Is a Carrier-Preferred Display?
The carrier-preferred display shows flights that the airline has chosen to display
for the route you specify in your entry, such as its own flights or flights of partner
airlines. The display is the same as the one seen by the airline's own agents.
The display can include:
• Flights of the specific airline, even though other airlines may offer an earlier
service.
• Flights operated by the airline's chosen affiliates.
• Flights that are normally excluded from a display due to lengthy flying time, or
excessive mileage.
This type of availability is useful when the customer wants to travel only on a
selected airline, or on other airlines or flights selected by the target airline.
The carrier-preferred display is available for those carriers that have a carrier-
preferred display agreement with Amadeus.
For more information, see HE CPD.
How to Request a Carrier-Preferred Display
To request a carrier-preferred display, enter the airline code after the availability
transaction code:
AN AF 13MAY PARLON
To return to an Amadeus availability display from a carrier-preferred display,
enter:
AC 1A/
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
50 Edition 3.1
Sample Carrier-Preferred Display
Below is a sample of a carrier-preferred display.
ANAF13MAYPARLON
** AIR FRANCE - AN ** LON LONDON.GB 8 WE 13MAY 0000
1WX*AF5018 C9 D9 Z9 F1 O9 Y9 S9 /ORY W LCY 0715 0730 E0/AR8 1:15
B9 R9 K9 V9 L9 M9 Q9 W9 X9 GR
2 AF1080 C9 D9 Z5 F1 O1 Y9 S9 /CDG2E LHR 2 0730 0750 E0/321 1:20
B9 R9 K9 V4 L4 M4 Q4 GR
3WX*AF5020 C9 D9 Z9 F1 O9 Y9 S9 /ORY W LCY 0835 0900 E0/AR8 1:25
B9 R9 K9 V9 L9 U9 M9 Q9 W9 E9 N9 X9 GR
4 AF1280 C9 D9 Z7 F1 O6 Y9 S9 /CDG2E LHR 2 1000 1015 E0/321 1:15
B9 R9 K9 V9 L9 U9 M9 Q9 W9 E7 GR
5WX*AF5128 C9 D9 Z9 F1 O8 Y9 S9 /ORY W LCY 1110 1130 E0/AR8 1:20
B9 R9 K9 V9 L9 U9 M9 H9 Q9 A9 W9 E9 N9 X9 GR
6 AF1480 C9 D9 Z9 F1 O9 Y9 S9 /CDG2E LHR 2 1325 1345 E0/320 1:20
B9 R9 K9 V9 L9 U9 M9 H9 Q9 W9 E9 N9 X9 GR
7 AF1580 C9 D9 Z9 F1 O9 Y9 S9 /CDG2E LHR 2 1425 1440 E0/318 1:15
B9 R9 K9 V9 L9 U9 M9 H9 Q9 W9 E9 N9 X9 GR
8WX*AF5024 C9 D9 Z9 F1 O9 Y9 S9 /ORY W LCY 1500 1520 E0/AR8 1:20
B9 R9 K9 V9 L9 U9 M9 H9 Q9 A9 W9 E9 N9 X9 GR
9 AF1680 C9 D9 Z9 F1 O9 Y9 S9 /CDG2E LHR 2 1610 1625 E0/320 1:15
B9 R9 K9 V9 L9 U9 M9 H9 Q9 W9 E9 N9 X9 I2 GR
Working with Direct Access
This section describes what you need to know to work with direct access entries
when you are making availability requests.
For more information, see HE DIRECT.
What Is Direct Access?
Direct access allows you to access the reservation system of an airline directly,
so you can sell the last seat available on a flight without the airline rejecting the
booking after end transaction.
Flights can be sold even if they are on a request basis or are showing waitlist
status on other types of Amadeus displays. You can see up to a maximum of 26
classes of service in a Direct Access display.
Note: Most airlines offer a higher level of access than Direct Access.
There are two methods you can use to obtain direct access to the reservation
systems of some airlines:
• From an availability display
See How to Request Direct Access from an Availability Display on page 51
for more information.
• Directly by making a long entry
See How to Request Direct Access Using a Long Entry on page 52 for more
information.
For more information about direct access, enter HE DIR. For information about a
specific airline, enter HE DIR XX, where XX is the airline code.
Chapter 2 Ai
r
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 51
How to Request Direct Access from an Availability Display
To request direct access via an availability display:
1. Make a basic availability entry.
AN 20NOV CGKPLM
AN Availability neutral transaction code
20NOV Departure date
CGKPLM City pair
System response:
AN20NOVCGKPLM
** AMADEUS AVAILABILITY - AN ** PLM PALEMBANG.ID 199 FR 20NOV 0000
1 GA 110 C4 Y4 M4 L4 K4 CGK 2 PLM 0605 0705 E0.734 1:00
2 GA 112 C4 Y4 M4 L4 K4 CGK 2 PLM 0850 0950 E0.735 1:00
3 GA 116 C4 Y4 M4 L4 K4 CGK 2 PLM 1420 1520 E0.734 1:00
4 GA 118 C4 Y4 M4 L4 K4 CGK 2 PLM 1555 1655 E0.733 1:00
5 GA 120 C4 Y4 M4 L4 K4 CGK 2 PLM 1800 1900 E0.734 1:00
6 MH 710 C4 J4 D4 E4 Y4 W4 K4 CGK 2 KUL M 1110 1410 E0.330
B4 H4 M4 Q4 L4 OR S4 TR V4 X0 U4
AK 492 V4 P4 U4 T4 Q4 K4 H4 KUL L PLM 1535 1605 T0 320 4:55
7GA:MH9082 D0 W4 K0 B4 Q0 S4 V4 CGK 2 KUL M 1040 1340 E0.733
AK 492 V4 P4 U4 T4 Q4 K4 H4 KUL L PLM 1535 1605 T0 320 5:25
8 GA 820 C4 D4 Y4 M4 L4 K4 N4 CGK 2 KUL M 1040 1340 E0.733
Q4 B4 V4
AK 492 V4 P4 U4 T4 Q4 K4 H4 KUL L PLM 1535 1605 T0 320 5:25
2. Make a change display follow-up entry indicating the line number for the
provider you want.
AC L1
AC Change entry transaction code
L1 Line number indicator, line number
The display changes to show the direct access availability:
1GAAD20NOVCGKPLM0605
** GA - GARUDA INDONESIA ** 199 FR 20NOV
FRI 20NOV09 JAKARTA-PALEMBANG 20/0405 21/0300 G*G
21 GA 110 C4 Y7 M7 L7 K9 CGK PLM 0605 0705 0 738
N9 QC BC
22 GA 112 C4 Y7 M7 L7 K9 CGK PLM 0850 0950 0 735
N9 QC BC
23 GA 114 C4 Y7 M7 L7 K9 CGK PLM 1145 1245 0 734
N9 QC BC
24 GA 116 C4 Y7 M7 L7 K9 CGK PLM 1420 1520 0 734
N9 QC BC
25 GA 118 C4 Y7 M7 L7 K9 CGK PLM 1555 1655 0 733
N9 QC BC
26 GA 120 C4 Y7 M7 L7 K9 CGK PLM 1800 1900 0 734
N9 QC BC
27 GA 122 FLT CANCELLED CGK PLM 1925 2025 0 733
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
52 Edition 3.1
How to Request Direct Access Using a Long Entry
When you know that the airline has a direct access agreement with Amadeus,
you can make the following entry to view the availability information:
1 GA AN 20NOV CGKPLM
1 Direct access indicator
GA Two-letter airline code
AN Availability neutral transaction code
20NOV Date of departure
CGKPLM City pair
System response:
1GAAN20NOVCGKPLM
** GA - GARUDA INDONESIA ** 199 FR 20NOV
FRI 20NOV09 JAKARTA-PALEMBANG 20/0001 21/0300 G*G
21 GA 110 C4 Y7 M7 L7 K9 CGK PLM 0605 0705 0 738
N9 QC BC
22 GA 112 C4 Y7 M7 L7 K9 CGK PLM 0850 0950 0 735
N9 QC BC
23 GA 114 C4 Y7 M7 L7 K9 CGK PLM 1145 1245 0 734
N9 QC BC
24 GA 116 C4 Y7 M7 L7 K9 CGK PLM 1420 1520 0 734
N9 QC BC
25 GA 118 C4 Y7 M7 L7 K9 CGK PLM 1555 1655 0 733
N9 QC BC
26 GA 120 C4 Y7 M7 L7 K9 CGK PLM 1800 1900 0 734
N9 QC BC
27 GA 122 FLT CANCELLED CGK PLM 1925 2025 0 733
When you request a direct access availability display from a normal availability
display, the system automatically clears your screen and only displays the direct
access information. This action prevents any possibility of overlapping a direct
access display with a normal availability display. The direct access information
always starts on line number 21.
Note: After requesting a direct access display, you have three minutes in
which to book a seat. If you exceed this time, and attempt to sell from
the direct access display, the system displays a warning message.
How to Change Direct Access to Another Airline
You can also change from one direct access display to another for a different
airline.
From a direct access display, enter the following and replace XX with the airline
code:
1XX/
This entry uses the same criteria you entered for the previous availability and
applies it to the new airline's direct access availability.
Chapter 2 Ai
r
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 53
How to Redisplay a Direct Access Display
If you want to return to the previously-displayed direct access availability, enter:
1YY/
Note: This entry only redisplays the previous direct access availability. It does
not convert an Amadeus availability display to a direct access display.
Working with a Schedule Display
This section describes what you need to understand about schedule displays.
For more information, see HE SN.
What Is a Schedule Display?
An Amadeus schedule display shows all flights operated by all airlines that submit
schedule information to Amadeus.
For airlines that have a sales agreement with Amadeus, availability status codes
by class of service are included in schedule displays regardless of whether seats
are available.
The schedule display also shows the schedules of airlines that do not have a
sales agreement with Amadeus (non-participating carriers). However, you cannot
sell these flights.
The flights shown on the schedule display appear in the same order as those on
the availability display. See What Is a Flight Type? on page 37 for the order of
flights in the display.
How to Request a Schedule Neutral Display
A basic schedule display entry appears like this:
SN 20DEC NCENYC
SN Schedule neutral transaction code
20DEC Date of departure
NCENYC Departure and arrival city pair
You can add more options to the basic entry that allow you to provide more
specific information in your request.
Note: The entries you use with the SN transaction code are the same as the
ones you use with the availability display (AN). See How to Add Options
on page 41 for more information.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
54 Edition 3.1
Sample Schedule Display
Below is a sample schedule display.
SN20DECNCENYC
** AMADEUS SCHEDULES - SN ** NYC NEW YORK.USNY 229 SU 20DEC 0000
1 DL 083 J7 D7 S7 I7 Y7 B7 M7 NCE 2 JFK 3 1050 1410 E0/767 9:20
H7 Q7 K7 L7 U7 T7
2DL:AF8702 J9 C9 D9 I9 Z9 Y9 B9 /NCE 2 JFK 3 1050 1410 E0/767 9:20
K9 H9 T9 V9 L9 QS NS
3 BA 347 J5 C2 D1 RS IS US Y9 /NCE 1 LHR 5 1350 1500 E0/319
B9 H9 K9 M9 L9 V9 N9 Q9 O9 S9 G9 X9
BA 115 F9 A9 Z7 J9 C9 D9 R9 /LHR 5 JFK 7 1600 1845 E0/744 10:55
I9 U9 W9 E9 T9 PS Y9 B9 H9 K9 M9 L9 V9 S4 NS QS OS GL XS
4 BA 341 J4 C2 D2 R1 I1 U1 Y9 /NCE 1 LHR 5 0835 0945 E0/319
B9 H9 K9 M9 L9 V9 N9 Q9 O9 S9 G9 X9
BA 175 F9 A9 Z7 J9 C9 D9 R9 /LHR 5 JFK 7 1100 1340 E0/744 11:05
I9 U9 W9 E9 T9 PS Y9 B9 H9 K9 M9 L9 V9 SS NS QS OS GL XS
5 BA 343 J5 C2 D1 RS IS US Y9 /NCE 1 LHR 5 1100 1215 E0/319
B9 H9 K9 M9 L9 V9 N9 Q9 O9 S9 G9 X9
BA 177 F9 A6 ZS J9 C9 D9 R9 /LHR 5 JFK 7 1335 1615 E0/744 11:15
I9 U9 W9 E9 T9 PS Y9 B9 H9 K9 M9 L9 V9 S3 NS QS OS GL XS
How to Display Non-Participating Carriers on a Specific Route
If you want to display all the carriers on a specific route, including the carriers that
do not participate in Amadeus, enter:
SN 16MAY KHIDXB /AYY
SN Schedule neutral transaction code
16MAY Departure date
KHIDXB City pair
/A Slash, airline option indicator
YY Universal airline code
Working with a Timetable Display
This section describes what you need to understand about timetable displays.
For more information, see HE TN.
What Is a Timetable Display?
A timetable display shows all flights operating over a seven-day period for a given
city pair. If you do not specify a date, the system uses the current date. Flights
are ordered in the same hierarchy as for availability displays.
The display contains flights of all airlines for which schedule information is
submitted to Amadeus. You can also display the flights of airlines that do not
have a sales agreement with Amadeus.
Timetable displays do not show classes of service; therefore, you cannot sell
seats directly from this display.
Chapter 2 Ai
r
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 55
How to Request a Timetable Neutral Display
To request a timetable neutral display, enter:
TN 20MAY CDGNCE 0900
TN Timetable neutral display
20MAY Departure date
CDGNCE City pair
0900 Departure time
Timetable displays only contain flights for participating carriers. If you want the
display to include non-participating carriers, you must add the /A YY option to
your entry.
Sample Timetable Display
Below is a sample timetable display with explanations for the various display
elements.
TN20MAYCDGNCEn
** AMADEUS TIMETABLE - TN ** NCE NICE.FR p20MAY09 27MAY09
1 AF7700 67o CDG2F NCE 2 0725 0855 0 11APR09 25OCT09 321 1:30
2 AF7700 X67 CDG2F NCE 2 0725 0855 0 30MAR09 25OCT09 320 1:30
3AF:MK9080 6 CDG2F NCE 2 0950 1120 0 30MAR09 25OCT09 320 1:30
4 AF7716 6 CDG2F NCE 2 0950 1120 0 31MAR09 25OCT09 320 1:30
5 AF7702 467 CDG2F NCE 2 1025 1155 0 30MAR09 25OCT09 320 1:30
6AF:MK9086 467 CDG2F NCE 2 1025 1155 0 30MAR09 25OCT09q320 1:30
7AF:MK9086 135 CDG2F NCE 2 1025 1155 0 30MAR09 25OCT09 321 1:30
8 AF7702 1235 CDG2F NCE 2 1025 1155 0 30MAR09 25OCT09 321 1:30
9 AF7714 D CDG2F NCE 2 1245 1415 0 30MAR09 25OCT09 320 1:30
10 AF7706 5 CDG2F NCE 2 1545 1715 0 04FEB09 05DEC09 319 1:30
11 AF7706 X5 CDG2F NCE 2 1545 1715 0 30MAR09 25OCT09 320 1:30
12AF:MK3565 X67 CDG2F NCE 2 1815 1945 0 30MAR09 25OCT09 319 1:30
n Timetable display entry with date and city pair.
o Timetable codes for days of the week.
p Seven-day date range beginning with the requested date.
q Dates of service for this flight.
Timetable Codes
The following codes are used on the timetable display:
Table: Timetable Codes
Code Description
D Daily
1 - 7 The days of the week.
1=Monday, 2=Tuesday, etc.
X Except
X6 means every day except Saturdays.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
56 Edition 3.1
Changing the Display
This section explains how to change the display when you are working with
availability, schedule or timetable displays.
How to Change the Availability or Schedule Display
When you are viewing an availability or schedule display, there are several
shortcut entries you can use to change the display and to avoid having to re-enter
your initial transaction.
Below are some common entries. For more information and additional entries,
see HE AC.
Table: Entries to Change an Availability or Schedule Display
Entry Description
MN Move to the next day
AC 1
SC 1
Availability change, move forward one day
Same effect as MN.
Note: You can add the standard availability options
such as /A, /K, /C, and so on after the AC or SC entry.
MY Move to yesterday
AC -1
SC -1
Availability change, move back one day
Same effect as MY.
AC 20FEB
SC 20FEB
Availability change, to a specific date
ACR 1
SCR 1
Availability change, reverse itinerary, move forward
one day
ACR 20FEB
SCR 20FEB
Availability change, reverse itinerary, to a specific date
How to Change the Timetable Display
When you are viewing a timetable display, there are several shortcut entries you
can use to change the display and to avoid having to re-enter your initial
transaction.
Below are some common entries:
Table: Entries to Change a Timetable Display
Entry Description
MN Move to the next seven-day range
TC 1 Timetable change, move forward one day
Note: You can add the standard availability options
such as /A, /K, /C, and so on after the TC entry.
MY Move to the previous seven-day range
TC -1 Timetable change, move back one day
Chapter 2 Ai
r
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 57
Entry Description
TC 20FEB Timetable change, to a specific date
For more information and additional entries, see HE TC.
How to Change to a Different Type of Display
You can change from one type of display to another at any time. For example,
you can change from an availability display to a timetable display.
Below are entries for changing to a different display type:
Table: Entries to Change to a Different Type of Display
Entry Changes...
ACSN
TCSN
An availability or timetable display to a schedule display
SCAN
TCAN
A schedule or timetable display to an availability display.
ACTN
SCTN
An availability or schedule display to a timetable display.
For more information, see HE AN, HE SN, or HE TN.
Requesting Minimum Connecting Times
This section explains how to request minimum connecting times.
For more information, see HE MCT.
What Are Minimum Connecting Times?
The minimum connect time (MCT) is the minimum time passengers must allow to
make a connection between flights at an airport or city.
You can request a minimum connection time display for:
• A specific airline or airlines at a city
• Connections between terminals at the same airport
• Multiple airports at the same city
• Two air segments in a PNR
Your entry can contain a maximum of two airline codes and two airport codes.
MCT information is valid for a specific date only.
How to Request Minimum Connecting Times
To display connection times for the current date, enter the transaction code
followed by the airport code. For example:
DM LON
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
58 Edition 3.1
You also have several options you can use when requesting minimum connecting
times. Here are some common examples:
Table: Common Minimum Connect Time Entries
Option Sample Entry
Between specific airports DM LGW-LHR
Date DM AMS /15DEC09
Airline and airport DM KL /AMS /15DEC09
You can include a date in all DM entries, except when using a shortcut entry from
a PNR or availability/schedule display.
The DM entry shows the standard connection times between terminals at a
specific airport.
Note: Airlines can supply exceptions to the standard times, so where possible,
add the airline code to the DM entry or make this entry from a PNR.
How to Check Minimum Connecting Times and Segment Continuity
from a PNR
If you are working in a PNR, before you enter the end of transaction, you can
check for invalid minimum connecting times and segment discontinuity.
Check Entire Itinerary
To check the entire itinerary, enter:
DM I
Note: Auxiliary segments are not taken into account by this process.
If the PNR contains segments booked on code share flights, refer to HE
MCT for more information.
Check Segments
You can display the MCT for two flight segments in a PNR. This method is
recommended because the system checks any exceptions to the standard MCT
logged by the airlines. Enter, for example:
DM 2/4
DM Minimum connecting time transaction code
2 PNR flight segment number
/ Slash separator between flights
4 PNR flight segment number
Chapter 2 Ai
r
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 59
How to Display Connecting Points
You can display the connecting points between two cities or airports. Enter:
DRT LAXNCE
DRT Display connecting point transaction code
LAXNCE City pair, a city or an airport code
The display shows the various connecting points between the two cities, the
elapsed flying time, and the mileage.
DRTLAXNCE
LAX-NCE MEFT 24:45
1A NEUTRAL DISPLAY
NB MIN-EFT MILEAGE CX1 CX2 CX3 CX4
01 12:10 6095 PAR
02 11:44 6451 NYC
03 11:30 6099 LON
04 17:49 6217 SAN
05 11:30 6245 FRA
06 12:30 6184 AMS
07 12:00 6374 MUC
08 12:27 6284 YMQ
09 12:55 6202 ZRH
10 15:50 6635 ROM
11 16:55 7669 MOW
12 19:15 7882 ATH
13 23:25 11313 DXB
14 11:54 6524 NYC PAR
15 12:20 6099 LON PAR
Note: If you work in an airline office, you must enter 1A after the transaction
code to display neutral routes. For example:
DRT 1A LAXNCE
To display a specific connecting point, enter the connection point:
DRT LAXNCE /X NYC
DRT Display connecting point transaction code
LAXNCE City pair
/X Connecting point indicator
NYC Specific connecting point
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 61
Chapter 3
Passenger Name Records
Here we give you the basics that you need in order to understand the passenger
name record (PNR) module in the Amadeus central system. We include an
introduction to PNRs, the five mandatory elements, optional elements, and how to
modify PNRs.
Before You Start
In order to successfully use the PNR module, you must have a good
understanding of the Air module. You should understand how to display
availability and how to work with schedule and timetable displays.
Objectives
To meet the objectives of the PNR module, you should know how to:
• Create, retrieve and modify a PNR
• Understand the difference between mandatory and optional elements
• Display and read a seat map, and book advance seats
• Handle a non-homogeneous PNR
• Copy, split and print a PNR
• Display and read the PNR history
Introduction
Here we describe the functionality of PNRs, how they are created, how they are
managed and the options available that enable you to add more information into
them.
What Is a PNR?
A PNR contains the details of a passenger's reservation and other information
related to a passenger's trip. PNRs can also contain information to assist airline
personnel with passenger handling.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
62 Edition 3.1
PNRs remain active in the distribution system for four days after the date of the
last active or inactive segment in the itinerary. Once a PNR is purged, you can
retrieve it up to three years in the past.
The items of information that make up a PNR are called elements. A PNR can
contain a maximum of 999 elements. These PNR elements can be either
mandatory or optional. The mandatory elements are:
• Name
• Itinerary
• Contact
• Ticketing
• Received From
After you have entered the five mandatory elements, you use an end of
transaction entry to file the record in the distribution system.
When creating a PNR you can enter the elements in any order. As the system
accepts each element, it assigns it a number and places it in the proper
sequence.
What Is a Record Locator?
When a PNR is created in the system, it is assigned a unique six-character code,
called a record locator, which you can use to retrieve the PNR and modify it if you
need to.
PNR Features
Here are some of the unique features of PNRs in Amadeus:
• All elements are numbered consecutively, making modifications easier.
• All names are displayed individually, even though two passengers may have
the same family name.
• By default, the system arranges the names in a PNR in alphabetical order by
family name.
However, an office can choose to display names in the order in which they
were entered, which requires an office profile update.
• Each name is numbered according to its display order.
This numbering is used for reference when you need to add passenger
association to other PNR elements.
Chapter 3 Passenger Name Records
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 63
PNR Basics
Here we explain how to create a basic PNR including the five mandatory
elements, and how to save or ignore a PNR. We also describe a PNR header.
For more information, see HE PNR.
Name Element
The name element is used:
• To insert names for individual passengers when you create a PNR
• To add individual names for a group
Note: You can enter up to nine names in a non-group PNR.
At least one name element is mandatory for the creation of a PNR and to end
transaction on a retrieved PNR.
Each name is numbered according to its display order. This numbering is used
for reference when you need to add passenger association to other PNR
elements.
How to Add Passengers with the Same Family Name
You can add a name element for one or more passengers with the same family
name.
Single Passenger
To enter a name element for a single passenger, enter:
NM 1 BARCLAY/ADAM MR
NM Name element transaction code
1 Number of passengers with the same family name, each
occupying a seat
BARCLAY/ADAM MR Passenger family name, slash, first name, title
System response:
RP/NCE1A0950/
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR
Note: The family name must contain a minimum of two characters and can
contain up to 57 characters.
The system automatically:
• Appends the office identification to the PNR header line
• Numbers the name element
• Begins to create the PNR
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
64 Edition 3.1
Multiple Passengers
To create more than one passenger with the same family name, enter:
NM 2 BARCLAY/ADAM MR /ANN MRS
NM Name element transaction code
2 Number of passengers with the same family name, each
occupying a seat
BARCLAY/ADAM MR Family name, slash, first name, title
/ANN MRS Slash, second person's first name, title
System response:
RP/NCE1A0950/
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR 2.BARCLAY/ANN MRS
How to Add Passengers with Different Family Names
To add passengers who have different family names, enter:
NM 1 BARCLAY/ANN MRS 1 BLACK/ANDREW MR
NM Name element transaction code
1 Number of passengers with the same family name, each
occupying a seat
BARCLAY/ANN MRS Family name, slash, first name, title
1 Number of passengers with next family name
BLACK/ANDREW MR Family name, slash, first name, title
System response:
RP/NCE1A0950/
1.BARCLAY/ANN MRS 2.BLACK/ANDREW MR
Chapter 3 Passenger Name Records
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 65
How to Add a Child or Infant
There are special formats you must use if you are entering the name of a child or
infant on a PNR.
Add a Child
To add a child to a PNR, you must enter the child passenger type code. Enter:
NM 1 BARCLAY/JOEY (CHD/05APR04)
NM Name element transaction code
1 Number of passengers with the same family name, each
occupying a seat
BARCLAY/JOEY Family name, slash, first name
(CHD/05APR04) Open bracket, child indicator, slash, birth date, close
bracket
System response:
RP/NCE1A0950/
1.BARCLAY/JOEY(CHD/05APR04)
Note: Passengers between the ages of 2 and 11 are considered child
passengers.
Add an Infant
To add an infant to a PNR, you must associate the infant to an adult passenger
and add the infant passenger type code. Enter:
NM 1 BARCLAY/ANN MRS (INF/MARY/10JAN08)
NM Name element transaction code
1 Number of passengers with the same family name, each
occupying a seat
BARCLAY/ANN MRS Adult passenger's family name, slash, first name, title
(INF/MARY/10JAN08) Open bracket, infant indicator, slash, infant's first name,
slash, birth date, close bracket
System response:
RP/NCE1A0950/
1.BARCLAY/ANN MRS(INF/MARY/10JAN08)
If the infant has a different family name, enter:
NM 1 BARCLAY/ANN MRS (INF JONES/MARY/10JAN08)
System response:
RP/NCE1A0950/
1.BARCLAY/ANN MRS(INFJONES/MARY/10JAN08)
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
66 Edition 3.1
Associate an Infant to a Passenger
You can associate an infant to a passenger on an existing PNR.
Here is an example of names on an existing PNR:
RP/NCE1A0950/
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR 2.BARCLAY/ANN MRS
To associate an infant to a passenger number with the same family name, enter:
2/ (INF/MARY/10JAN08)
2/ Associate with passenger number 2, slash
(INF/MARY/10JAN08) Open bracket, infant indicator, slash, infant's first name,
slash, birth date, close bracket
System response:
RP/NCE1A0950/
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR 2.BARCLAY/ANN MRS(INF/MARY/10JAN08)
To associate an infant to a passenger with a different family name, enter:
2/ (INF JONES/MARY/10JAN08)
System response:
RP/NCE1A0950/
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR 2.BARCLAY/ANN MRS(INFJONES/MARY/10JAN08)
Add the Child Indicator to a Passenger Name
You can add the child indicator to a passenger on an existing PNR.
Here is an example of names on an existing PNR:
RP/NCE1A0950/
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR 2.BARCLAY/ANN MRS
3.BARCLAY/JOEY
To add the child indicator to passenger number 3, enter:
3/ (CHD/05APR04)
3/ Associate with passenger number 3, slash
(CHD/05APR04) Open bracket, child indicator, slash, birth date, close
bracket
System response:
RP/NCE1A0950/
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR 2.BARCLAY/ANN MRS
3.BARCLAY/JOEY(CHD/05APR04)
Chapter 3 Passenger Name Records
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 67
How to Remove a Child or Infant Indicator
You can remove the child or infant indicator from a passenger name in an
existing PNR.
Here is an example of a PNR with both child and infant indicators:
RP/NCE1A0950/
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR 2.BARCLAY/ANN MRS(INF/MARY/10JAN08)
3.BARCLAY/JOEY(CHD/05APR04)
Remove the Child Indicator
To remove the child indicator from passenger number 3, enter:
3 /
System response:
RP/NCE1A0950/
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR 2.BARCLAY/ANN MRS 3.BARCLAY/JOEY
Remove the Infant Indicator
To remove the infant indicator from passenger number 2, enter:
2 /
System response:
RP/NCE1A0950/
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR 2.BARCLAY/ANN MRS
3.BARCLAY/JOEY(CHD/05APR04)
Itinerary Element
A segment is called an itinerary segment in a PNR. A PNR can contain the
following itinerary elements:
• Air segments
• Segments for associated travel services like a hotel, a rental car, a ferry
crossing, a cruise, a tour and ground transportation
How to Create Short-Sell Entries
When you request an availability or schedule display, you can sell directly from
the screen.
Here is an example of an availability display:
1 AF 022 P3 FL J9 C9 D9 I3 Y9 /CDG2E JFK 1 0825 1015 E0/772 7:50
B9 K9 H9 T9 V9 W9 L9 Q9 GR UR
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
68 Edition 3.1
To book a single segment, or to book connections with the same class, enter:
SS 1 C 1
SS Segment sell transaction code
1 Number of seats
C Class of service
1 Availability or schedule line number
System response:
RP/NCE1A0950/
1 AF 022 C 15JUN 1 CDGJFK DK1 0825 1015 15JUN E 0 772 BM
Note: If the segment is eligible for electronic ticketing, an E appears after the
departure date.
Multiple Seats
If you want to sell multiple seats in the same class, you increase the number of
seats in your entry.
From the sample availability display above, enter:
SS 3 Y 1
System response:
RP/NCE1A0950/
1 AF 022 Y 15JUN 1 CDGJFK DK3 0825 1015 15JUN E 0 772 BM
Multiple Classes on Connecting Flights
If you are selling a connecting flight, you can request different classes of service
on each flight in one entry.
Here is an example availability display:
1 AF7711 Y9 S9 B9 K9 V9 L9 M9 /NCE 2 CDG2F 0755 0930 E0/321
Q9 W9 GR
AF 012 P6 F5 J9 C9 D9 I9 Z9 /CDG2E JFK 1 1030 1245 E0/77W 10:50
E5 OL Y9 B9 K9 H9 T9 V9 W5 L9 Q9 GR UR
Chapter 3 Passenger Name Records
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 69
To sell a different class on each connecting flight, enter:
SS 1 M K 1
SS Segment sell transaction code
1 Number of seats
M Class of service on first flight in the itinerary
K Class of service on the second and remaining flights in the
itinerary
1 Availability line number
System response:
RP/NCE1A0950/
1 AF7711 M 15JUN 1 NCECDG DK1 0755 0930 15JUN E 0 321 B
2 AF 012 K 15JUN 1 CDGJFK DK1 1030 1245 15JUN E 0 77W MS
How to Sell from a Dual-Availability Display
When you make a request for a dual-city-pair availability display, you can sell a
seat for each flight in one entry.
Here is an example of a dual-city availability display:
AN15JUNCDGJFK*21JUN
** AMADEUS AVAILABILITY - AN ** JFK JOHN F KENNEDY.USNY 31 MO 15JUN 0000
1 AF 022 P3 FL J9 C9 D9 I3 Y9 /CDG2E JFK 1 0825 1015 E0/772 7:50
B9 K9 H9 T9 V9 W9 L9 Q9 GR UR
2AF:DL8600 C7 D7 S7 I7 Y7 B7 M7 CDG2E JFK 1 0825 1015 E0/772 7:50
H7 Q7 K7 L7 U7 T0
3AF:DL9334 C7 D7 S7 I7 Y7 B7 M7 CDG2E JFK 1 1030 1245 E0/77W 8:15
H7 Q7 K7 L7 U7 T0
** AMADEUS AVAILABILITY - AN ** CDG CHARLES DE GAUL.FR 37 SU 21JUN 0000
11 AF 023 P3 F3 J9 C9 D9 I9 Z7 /JFK 1 CDG2E 1630 0600+1E0/772 7:30
Y9 B9 K9 H9 T9 V9 W8 L9 GR UR
12AF:DL8601 C7 D7 S7 I7 Y7 B7 M7 JFK 1 CDG2E 1630 0600+1E0/772 7:30
H7 Q7 K7 L7 U0 T7
13 AA 044 J7 R7 D7 Y7 B7 H7 K7 JFK 8 CDG2A 1745 0725+1E0.763 7:40
M7 V7 W7 S7 Q7 L7 G7 O7
To sell from this screen, enter:
SS 1 Y1 * Y11
SS Segment sell transaction code
1 Number of seats
Y1 Class, availability line number
* Dual-city pair indicator
Y11 Class, availability line number
System response:
RP/NCE1A0950/
1 AF 022 Y 15JUN 1 CDGJFK DK1 0825 1015 15JUN E 0 772 BM
2 AF 023 Y 21JUN 7 JFKCDG DK1 1630 0600 22JUN E 0 772 MB
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
70 Edition 3.1
How to Create a Long-Sell Entry
When you know all the details for a specific flight, you can book a seat using a
long-sell entry, also called a direct-sell entry. The long-sell entry does not refer to
an availability or schedule display.
To create a long-sell entry, enter:
SS LH969 C 23SEP MUCFRA 1
SS Segment sell transaction code
LH969 Airline code, flight number
C Class of service
23SEP Departure date
MUCFRA Origin and destination airport codes
1 Number of seats requested
System response:
RP/NCE1A0950/
1 LH 969 C 23SEP 3 MUCFRA DK1 1100 1205 23SEP E 0 321 S
Contact Element
The contact element is used as a point of contact for passengers. It can be any of
the following:
• Home, business or mobile telephone number
• E-mail address
• Fax number
This element enables you to contact passengers if changes occur to their
itinerary, or to advise them of other important information.
A PNR can contain up to 127 contact elements, each with a maximum of 90
characters.
You can also add the passenger's mailing or billing address, which allows you to
send tickets or itineraries to them in the post.
How to Add Passenger Contact Information
To specify passenger contact information, you can use any of the options shown
in the table below. You can enter free-flow text after the entry.
Table: Contact Information Options
Entry Description
APH- Home telephone number
APM- Mobile telephone number
APB- Business telephone number
APE- Email address
APF- Fax number
Chapter 3 Passenger Name Records
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 71
Entry Description
AB Billing address
AM Mailing address
Note: The dash indicated in the entry is mandatory.
Here is a system display showing the contact elements from the table above:
RP/NCE1A0950/
1 APB 07 115 677
2 APE JSMITH@TRAVELER.NET
3 APF 07 228 549
4 APH 07 123 123
5 APM 07 992 994
6 AB 12 PL DE GAULLE, PARIS, FR, 75001
7 AM 5 RUE DE BAC, PARIS, FR, 75006
For additional options, see HE AP.
How to Add an Office Contact Element
You can add a basic contact element that displays the default information for your
office as specified in the office profile. Enter:
AP
System response:
RP/LONKP351S/
1 AP LON (0181) 123 4567 - HAPPY TRAVEL LTD - A
Ticketing Arrangement Element
The ticketing arrangement element indicates the type of ticketing arrangement for
the booking. It indicates when and where the tickets are to be issued to a
passenger. A PNR can contain up to 127 ticketing elements.
For more information, see HE TK.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
72 Edition 3.1
How to Add a Ticketing Arrangement Element
To add a ticketing arrangement element, enter:
TK TL 19SEP /1200 /MADIB0230
TK Ticketing arrangement element transaction code
TL Ticketing arrangement indicator
19SEP Date
/1200 Slash, time
/MADIB0230 Slash, ID of the office where the tickets are to be issued
System response:
RP/MADIB0900/
1 TK TL19SEP/1200/MADIB0230
Ticket Arrangement Indicator Options
The table below describes some of the options you have for the ticketing
arrangement indicator:
Table: Ticket Arrangement Indicator Options
Indicator Description
OK Ticket issued immediately
No queue placement
TL Ticket time limit, used to request ticketing on a specific
date and time
Automatic queue placement (queue 8, category 1)
XL Automatic cancellation of the ticket if not issued by the
specific date/time
Note: A date on this entry is mandatory
No queue placement
MA Tickets mailed to the passenger
Automatic queue placement (queue 8, category 7)
AT Ticket issued at airport ticket office
Automatic queue placement (queue 8, category 9)
There are some important points to remember when adding a date, time, or office
identification to your entry:
• The date is mandatory when you use the XL ticketing arrangement.
• If you do not enter a date for the other ticketing arrangements, the system
assumes the current date. The date you enter in the ticketing element can
indicate:
- When the passenger wants the ticket to be issued
- The last date the ticket can be issued
- The date the ticket was actually issued
• When you enter a time, the system regards this time as local time for that
office.
Chapter 3 Passenger Name Records
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 73
• The office ID is optional.
If you omit the office ID, the system assumes that the office ID is the one that
is associated to the terminal where the booking was made.
For more options and details on the ticketing arrangement options, see HE TK.
Received From Element
The received from (RF) element indicates who has made or updated a
reservation. After you create or modify a PNR, you cannot file the PNR unless an
RF element is present.
Note: In some markets, the received from (RF) element is not mandatory.
The RF element only appears in the PNR during the current session and is
recorded in PNR history when the PNR is filed at the end of transaction.
There is no limit on the number of times you can enter or change an RF element
when you are creating or modifying a PNR.
For more information, see HE RF.
How to Add a Received From Element
To add a received from element, enter:
RF MR BARCLAY
RF Received from element transaction code
MR BARCLAY Free-flow text
System response:
RP/NCE1A0900/
RF MRBARCLAY
Note: Spaces are optional when you enter the free-flow text. When the RF
element is displayed in the PNR, the system removes all spaces.
End Transaction
When you end the transaction, the PNR is stored in the system. You must
retrieve the PNR again to make any modifications or to perform any other actions.
See How to Retrieve a PNR on page 107.
How to Save a PNR
Once you have added the five mandatory elements, you have two options to end
the PNR transaction, save the PNR and receive the new record locator.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
74 Edition 3.1
End and Retrieve
The end and retrieve transaction code saves your PNR and redisplays it so you
can continue working on it. Enter:
ER
If you enter this transaction code after creating a new PNR, the system returns
the new record locator.
End Transaction
Using the end transaction entry saves the PNR, returns the new record locator,
and closes the PNR. Enter:
ET
System response:
END OF TRANSACTION COMPLETE - Z472IX
Ignore Transaction
You can ignore a PNR at any time during creation or modification. When you
ignore a PNR during creation, all elements are ignored, and any flight, hotel, or
car bookings are returned to inventory.
Note: A PNR that is left inactive for 180 minutes is automatically ignored by
the system.
How to Ignore a PNR
To ignore a PNR, enter:
IG
System response:
>IG
IGNORED
If you use the ignore transaction when modifying an existing PNR, the system
ignores the updates, returns the PNR to its original form and files it in the system.
The system then displays the PNR record locator after the ignored message:
>IG
IGNORED - Z472IX
Chapter 3 Passenger Name Records
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 75
Ignore and Redisplay
When you want to ignore current updates to an existing PNR and have the PNR
redisplayed on your screen in its original form, enter:
IR
If you make the ignore and redisplay entry on a PNR during creation, the system
responds with the following message:
>IR
RESTRICTED : PNR NOT FINISHED
PNR Header
The header line is automatically generated by the system after the first entry in a
PNR. The header line displays different information depending on whether the
PNR is newly created or retrieved.
A newly created PNR includes the indicator RP followed by your office
identification. This indicates that your office is responsible for the PNR.
Here is an example of a PNR:
RP/NCE1A0950/NCE1A0950n oAG/SU p14MAY09/1341Z q2RRMM3
NCE1A0950/0022AG/14MAY09r
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR
2 AF 022 C 18NOV 3 CDGJFK HK1 0825 1035 18NOV E AF/
3 AP 07 123 123-H
4 TK TL15NOV/NCE1A0950
n Office IDs for the responsible office and queuing office
o Agent sign and duty code of the agent who created the PNR or made the last
update
p Date and time of PNR creation or last update
q Record locator
r Original office ID, agent sign, and date of PNR creation
The first line of a newly created or retrieved PNR may contain a label or tag to
indicate a special condition within the PNR. Examples of PNR tags are RLR,
AXR, NHP, MSC, HFR, *PARENT PNR*, and *ASSOCIATE PNR*. If there are
no special conditions, no tag appears.
For more information on the PNR tag and header line, see HE HEADER.
Using Optional Elements
After you have entered the five mandatory elements in your PNR, you can also
add other optional elements that provide more details.
This section describes some of the optional PNR elements.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
76 Edition 3.1
Passenger and Segment Association
You can associate specific PNR elements to a specific passenger or segment
using passenger or segment association. When a PNR element is not associated,
it applies to all segments in the PNR.
Most association is performed automatically by the system. However, you must
associate certain PNR elements, including:
• Special service requests (SSR) that apply only to specific segments
• Advance seat requests
• Ticketing elements
For more information, see HE PNR.
How to Passenger-Associate
Here is an example of a PNR with air segments:
RP/NCE1A0950/
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR 2.BARCLAY/ANN MS 3.BLACK/ANDREW MR
4 AF 022 Y 15JUN 1 CDGJFK DK3 0825 1015 15JUN E 0 772 BM
5 AF 023 Y 21JUN 7 JFKCDG DK3 1630 0600 22JUN E 0 772 MB
To passenger-associate contact information with Andrew Black only, for example,
enter:
APH-PAR 16122344553 /P3
APH- Contact element transaction code
PAR 16122344553 Contact element information
/P3 Slash, passenger name element number
System response:
RP/NCE1A0950/
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR 2.BARCLAY/ANN MS 3.BLACK/ANDREW MR
4 AF 022 Y 15JUN 1 CDGJFK DK3 0825 1015 15JUN E 0 772 BM
5 AF 023 Y 21JUN 7 JFKCDG DK3 1630 0600 22JUN E 0 772 MB
6 APH PAR16122344553/P3
Chapter 3 Passenger Name Records
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 77
How to Segment-Associate
Here is an example of a PNR that contains air segments:
RP/NCE1A0950/NCE1A0950 AG/SU 15MAY09/0932Z 2YS4BF
NCE1A0950/0022AG/15MAY09
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR
2 BA 117 Y 15JUN 1 LHRJFK HK1 0855 1120 15JUN E BA/
3 BA 178 Y 21JUN 7 JFKLHR HK1 0840 2035 21JUN E BA/
4 APH 07 123 123 LONDON
5 TK TL10JUN/NCE1A0950
Mr. Barclay wants a vegetarian meal on the flight from London to New York.
To segment-associate his special service request, enter:
SR VGML /S2
SR Service request element transaction code
VGML Service request element information
/S2 Slash, segment element number
System response:
RP/NCE1A0950/NCE1A0950 AG/SU 15MAY09/0932Z 2YS4BF
NCE1A0950/0022AG/15MAY09
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR
2 BA 117 Y 15JUN 1 LHRJFK HK1 0855 1120 15JUN E BA/
3 BA 178 Y 21JUN 7 JFKLHR HK1 0840 2035 21JUN E BA/
4 APH 07 123 123 LONDON
5 TK TL10JUN/NCE1A0950
6 SSR VGML BA HK1/S2
For more information on special service requests, see Special Service Requests
below.
Special Service Requests
You use a special service request (SSR) to request a special service for a
passenger, such as special meals, wheelchairs and other services.
A special service request is made using an SR entry and a four-character service
code. This generates an SSR element in the PNR and a request message to the
airline or airlines concerned.
A PNR can contain a maximum of 127 active SSR elements.
For more information, see HE SR.
How to Create an SSR
Here is an example of a PNR with air segments:
RP/NCE1A0950/NCE1A0950 AG/SU 15MAY09/1020Z 2ZOL66
NCE1A0950/0022AG/15MAY09
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR
2 BA 117 Y 15JUN 1 LHRJFK HK1 0855 1120 15JUN E BA/
3 BA 178 Y 21JUN 7 JFKLHR HK1 0840 2035 21JUN E BA/
4 APH 07 123 123 LONDON
5 TK TL10JUN/NCE1A0950
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
78 Edition 3.1
To create a special service request for a vegetarian meal on all flights in the PNR,
enter:
SR VGML
SR Special service request transaction code
VGML Service code
The system automatically applies the SSR to all the appropriate segments, and
displays the following:
RP/NCE1A0950/NCE1A0950 AG/SU 15MAY09/1020Z 2ZOL66
NCE1A0950/0022AG/15MAY09
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR
2 BA 117 Y 15JUN 1 LHRJFK HK1 0855 1120 15JUN E BA/
3 BA 178 Y 21JUN 7 JFKLHR HK1 0840 2035 21JUN E BA/
4 APH 07 123 123 LONDON
5 TK TL10JUN/NCE1A0950
6 SSR VGML BA HK1/S2
7 SSR VGML BA HK1/S3
If the request is rejected by the airline, the SSR line disappears from the PNR.
To enter the SSR for only a single airline, enter:
SR VGML AF
To view a list of the service codes, see GG CODE.
What Is SSR Explosion?
SSR explosion is the term used when the system takes one SSR entry and
generates a request for all segments to which it applies.
There are two types of SSR explosion: automatic and manual.
Automatic SSR Explosion
The SR entry uses SSR explosion at input time. When you enter an SSR, the
system immediately checks your entry for passenger and/or segment association
and/or the presence of an airline code. From this it generates individual SSR
items (based on the names and itinerary currently booked).
Note: If you add further flights to the itinerary, you must re-enter your SSR
requests for the new segments.
Manual SSR Explosion
If you do not want the SSR to be exploded on input, but at end of transaction or
manually (before end of transaction), use the SR* entry instead of the SR entry.
The system temporarily creates a single SSR with YY as the airline code. Then,
when you make an end-of-transaction entry (ET, ER), all the SSR items are
associated to the appropriate segments in the itinerary.
The exploded items appear after the ET or ER entries.
Chapter 3 Passenger Name Records
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 79
How to Manually Explode an SSR
To add SSRs for manual explosion:
1. Create name and itinerary elements in the PNR.
RP/NCE1A0950/
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR 2.BLACK/ANDREW MR
3 AF7711 Y 15JUL 3 NCECDG DK2 0755 0930 15JUL E 0 321 B
SEE RTSVC
4 AA 045 G 15JUL 3 CDGJFK DK2 1105 1320 15JUL E 0 763 LS
SEE RTSVC
5 AA 855 L 15JUL 3 JFKDFW DK2 1750 2100 15JUL E 0 757 F
SEE RTSVC
2. Add SSR manual explosion entries.
SR* VGML AA /P1
SR* SPML-NUT FREE MEAL /P2
System response:
RP/NCE1A0950/
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR 2.BLACK/ANDREW MR
3 AF7711 Y 15JUL 3 NCECDG DK2 0755 0930 15JUL E 0 321 B
SEE RTSVC
4 AA 045 G 15JUL 3 CDGJFK DK2 1105 1320 15JUL E 0 763 LS
SEE RTSVC
5 AA 855 L 15JUL 3 JFKDFW DK2 1750 2100 15JUL E 0 757 F
SEE RTSVC
6 SSR VGML AA NN1/P1
7 SSR SPML YY NN1 NUT FREE MEAL/P2
3. End and retrieve the PNR.
ER
The system explodes the SSRs to the appropriate segments, and displays
the following:
NCE1A0950/0022AG/2JUN09
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR 2.BLACK/ANDREW MR
3 AF7711 Y 15JUL 3 NCECDG HK2 0755 0930 15JUL E AF/
4 AA 045 G 15JUL 3 CDGJFK HK2 1105 1320 15JUL E AA/
5 AA 855 L 15JUL 3 JFKDFW HK2 1750 2100 15JUL E AA/
6 SSR VGML AA HN1/S4/P1
7 SSR VGML AA HN1/S5/P1
8 SSR SPML AF HN1 NUT FREE MEAL/S3/P2
9 SSR SPML AA HN1 NUT FREE MEAL/S4/P2
10 SSR SPML AA HN1 NUT FREE MEAL/S5/P2
What Is a Keyword Element?
A keyword (SK) element contains special information about a booking or
passenger that can be used by an airline for service or marketing purposes. A
PNR can contain a maximum of 127 keyword elements.
You can only create SK elements for airlines that support them and that have a
keyword table stored in the system. The keyword table determines which
keywords are active for the airline and what information is mandatory in the
keyword element.
When you create a keyword element, the system checks the appropriate keyword
table automatically to verify the element.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
80 Edition 3.1
For information about which keywords are active for an airline, contact the airline
or consult the airline-specific Amadeus information pages by entering: GG AIR
XX (where XX is the two- letter airline code).
For more information, see HE SK.
How to Create a Keyword Element
To create a keyword element, enter:
SK PARK QF HK 1 -SYD.CAR WASH /P1
SK Keyword element transaction code
PARK Keyword defined by the airline
QF Two-character airline code
HK HK status code
(mandatory if number in party is required by the airline)
1 Number in party
(mandatory if required by the airline)
-SYD.CAR WASH Dash, free-flow text
(optional if allowed by the airline)
/P1 Passenger association
Note: Depending on the target airline and the keyword element you use, you
may have to include a segment and/or passenger association in your
entry.
Once created, an SK element can only be viewed, modified, or cancelled by the
office that created the element or by offices that are specifically authorized to do
so.
Other Service Information
An other service information (OSI) element contains special information regarding
a passenger or passengers in the PNR that is sent to the airlines that appear in
the itinerary.
Note: An OSI element is not a service request and does not require
confirmation from the airline. Unlike SSR elements, OSI elements do
not result in the automatic placement of PNRs on queue if a response is
received from the airline.
For more information, see HE OSI.
Chapter 3 Passenger Name Records
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 81
How to Create an Other Service Information Element
To create an OSI element, enter:
OS AF VIP COMPANY PRESIDENT/P2
OS Other service information transaction code (mandatory)
AF Specified recipient airline for the OSI message (mandatory)
VIP COMPANY
PRESIDENT Text
/P2 Slash, passenger association
Note: If the OSI element is for all airlines in the itinerary, enter YY as a
common code.
Seat Requests
When making a booking on a PNR, you can request and confirm an advance seat
assignment for a passenger. When you make a seat request entry, this generates
seating SSR elements for the first 5 air segments of each airline in an itinerary
that does not have associated seating.
Note: Each airline has a time limit within which advance seat requests are
possible; conditions vary from airline to airline. See GG AIR for the
specific procedure for each airline.
You can also request seat maps for Amadeus Access airlines and airlines that
have an advance seat agreement with Amadeus.
How to Request a Seat
An advance seating request is sent to an airline at booking time to reserve a
specific seat for a passenger.
To request a window seat, for example, enter:
ST /W
Seat Locations
The following table shows the codes you can use to specify a preferred seat
location or seat orientation:
Table: Seat Locations
Area Code Description
W Window
A Aisle
B Bulkhead
C Cot
R Rear-facing
P Upper deck
F Front of aircraft
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
82 Edition 3.1
Area Code Description
T Tail of aircraft
Passenger Types
You can also add a passenger type to the seat request to notify the airline that
the passenger has special requirements.
For example, to request an aisle seat for handicapped passenger on all
segments, enter:
ST /A H
The following table shows the codes you can use to indicate a specific passenger
type:
Table: Seat Request Passenger Types
Passenger Type Code Description
I Infant
U Unaccompanied minor
H Handicapped
M Medically fit for travel
Note: Requests for M and H passengers require an additional SSR MEDA
element to indicate the nature of the passenger's medical condition.
For more information, see HE ST.
What Is a Seat Map?
The seat map shows the layout of the aircraft cabin for a particular flight and
class. This is used to help you make advance seat requests.
You can request a seat map in three ways:
• Without a PNR
• From a PNR display
• From an availability or schedule display, including Amadeus Direct Access
How to Display a Seat Map
Here is an example of a PNR:
1.DOHERTY/CLAIRE MRS
2 LH 772 F 30MAR 1 FRASIN HK1 2120 2150 1600+1
3 LH 773 F 3APR 5 SINFRA HK1 2330 2359 0645+1
4 AP PAR 22344581
5 TKOK31JUL/MUCLH0100
Chapter 3 Passenger Name Records
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 83
To display a seat map for flight segment number two, enter:
SM 2
The system displays the seat map for the segment you've requested:
SM LH 0778/Y/30MARFRASIN
SM LH 0778 Y 30MAR FRASIN 744
M
3 4 5
2 345678901234567890123456
E<EB >
K VVYYYYYYV./.U....//.. K
J / VV......V.I.U....//..... J
H / VV......V...U....//..... H
G V......V./UU....//..... G
F V......V.IUU....//..... F
E V......V.IUU....//..... E
D V./....V./UU...///..... D
C / VV......V...U....//..... C
B / VV......V.I.U....//..... B
A VVY/YYYYV./.U...///..... A
. AVAILABLE <> WING F GEN FACI K GALLEY E EXIT C COT
+ OCCUPIED - LAST OFF H HANDICAP Q QUIET G GROUPS P PET
/ RESTRICTED B BULKHEAD V PREF.SEAT X BLOCKED L TOILET U UMNR
() SMOKING D DEPORTEE UP UP-DECK Z NO FILM I INFANT R REAR
Y CHARGEABLE
For more information, see HE SM.
How to Book a Specific Seat
To book a specific seat from a seat map, such as the one shown above, enter:
ST /J 56
ST Seat request transaction code
/J Slash, the row number or letter
56 Seat number
How to Cancel a Seat Request
If you need to cancel a seat request, enter the cancel seat request transaction
code followed by the segment number:
SX /S2
Frequent Flyer Information
You can add information in an SSR element about a frequent flyer (FF). This
information can be used by the system for mileage accrual or service upgrades
for the passenger.
For more information, see HE FF.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
84 Edition 3.1
How to Add Frequent Flyer Information
The following table describes the transactions you can use for frequent flyer (FF)
passengers to create SSRs automatically:
Table: Frequent Flyer Transactions
Entry Description
FFD Displays the name of a passenger as it is stored in the
frequent flyer database of an airline
FFA Creates a name element and enters a frequent flyer
SSR FQTV element for mileage accrual
FFN Creates the SSR FQTV element for mileage accrual if
the name element for the frequent flyer has already
been entered in the PNR
FFR Redeems accrued mileage by creating the name
element and an SSR FQTR element
FFU Requests an upgrade for a passenger
The FF number and the name in the case of the FFN transaction are checked
when:
• The airline has a full FF database in Amadeus
• The airline has a partial database and the transaction is entered at an office
belonging to an alliance member
If the number is stored in the database, the SSR FQT element is preceded with
an asterisk (*).
If the number is not in the database, an error message is displayed.
How to Create a Manual Mileage Accrual SSR
To manually create an SSR to indicate that the passenger is accruing miles for
the segments flown, enter:
SR FQTV KL -KL FREE-FLOW TEXT
SR Special service request transaction code
FQTV Frequent traveller mileage program service code
KL Airline code
-KL FREE-FLOW TEXT Dash, airline code, free-flow text for the frequent flyer
information
Chapter 3 Passenger Name Records
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 85
How to Display Frequent Flyer Agreements
Many airlines hold bilateral agreements to allow the use of each other's FF
schemes. This means that passengers can collect points or mileage and redeem
awards with an airline other than the card-owning airline.
To display the table of airlines that have agreements, enter:
VFFD
Note: Airlines that do not appear in the table may be subject to special
processing but may still provide points or mileage. Refer to the GG AIR
XX pages for more information.
Remarks
A remark element in a PNR contains additional comments or information
concerning passengers and their bookings.
Depending on the type of remark you want to use, you can display the remark to
all offices or make the remark confidential.
If you do not include passenger or segment association in your entry, the system
applies the remark to all names and all air segments in the PNR.
For more information, see HE RM.
Types of Remarks
There are several types of remarks you can add to a PNR. Here we describe
three:
• General remarks—Visible to all users who have the authority to review the
PNR
• Corporate remarks—Allow corporations to share remarks without having to
specify which offices are allowed to view them.
Only offices that have an Amadeus extended ownership agreement (FRX
application ID) with the office that created the corporate remark can view the
remark.
• Confidential remarks—Can only be viewed or modified by designated
offices when the PNR is retrieved.
The office that created the remark can view and modify it at any time. You
can allow up to three other offices or groups of offices (using wildcards) to
view the remark, by including their office ID in your entry.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
86 Edition 3.1
How to Add General and Corporate Remarks
To add a general remark, enter:
RM CALL PAX ON 09JUN TO REMIND ABOUT TICKETING
System response:
RP/NCE1A0950/NCE1A0950 AG/SU 15MAY09/0932Z 2YS4BF
NCE1A0950/0022AG/15MAY09
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR
2 BA 117 Y 15JUN 1 LHRJFK HK1 0855 1120 15JUN E BA/
3 BA 178 Y 21JUN 7 JFKLHR HK1 0840 2035 21JUN E BA/
4 APH 07 123 123 LONDON
5 TK TL10JUN/NCE1A0950
6 SSR VGML BA HK1/S2
7 RM CALL PAX ON 09JUN TO REMIND ABOUT TICKETING
To add a corporate remark, enter:
RX (FREE-FLOW TEXT)
How to Add Confidential Remarks
To create a confidential remark, enter:
RC PARAF0100 , PARAF0200 /VIP PLS ASSIST /P1
RC Confidential remarks transaction code
PARAF0100 First target office
,PARAF0200 Separator , second office
/VIP PLS ASSIST Slash, free-flow text
/P1 Slash, passenger association (optional)
Note: The two office IDs shown in the entry above can display the remark.
Confidential Remark Modifications
You can also allow an office to modify a confidential remark by including a write
indicator. If the indicator is omitted, the designated office can only display the
remark.
For example, make the following entry:
RC LONBA0100 ,LONBA0200-W /VIP PLS ASSIST /P1
System response:
3 RC MUC1A0702-W, LONBA0100, LONBA0200-W/VIP PLS ASSIST/P1
LONBA0100 can only display the remark while LONBA0200 can both display and
modify it.
Note: MUC1A0702 is the office that created the remark, and therefore it
retains the right to display and modify it.
Chapter 3 Passenger Name Records
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 87
How to Use Wildcards in Confidential Remarks
To increase the number of offices allowed to view or modify a confidential remark,
you can substitute asterisks (*) for all or part of the office identification.
For example, enter:
RC SYDQF0100-W ,***QF0*** /VIP PLS GIVE ACCESS TO LOUNGE /P1
Here are some examples of how you can use wildcards with confidential remarks:
Table:Confidential Remark Wildcard Examples
Example Displays...
********* All offices
***BA0*** All BA offices
LONBA0*** All BA offices in London
***BA0100 All BA offices with the 100 office number
Note: A wildcard office ID must be nine characters long to be valid.
Queue Option Indicators
The option element is used to place a newly created or retrieved PNR on a
specified queue in a specified office on a specified date. A PNR can be queued to
any office that has the authority to retrieve it. Up to eight option elements can be
included in each PNR.
The PNR must contain a name element before an option element can be entered.
The option element entry consists of the transaction code, followed by the
identification of the office where it is to be queued and the date on which it is to
be queued.
If no date or office identification are included in the entry, the system includes
today's date and the current office identification when it displays the option
element.
The default queue for non-group PNRs is queue 3, category 0. The default queue
for group PNRs is queue 87, category 12.
For more information, see HE OP.
How to Add Queue Option Indicators
To add a queue option indicator for your office for today's date, enter:
OP /(FREE-FLOW TEXT)
System response:
RP/NCE1A0950/
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR
2 OP NCE1A0950/15MAY/FREE-FLOW TEXT
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
88 Edition 3.1
To add a queue option indicator for your office for a specific date, enter:
OP 10JUN /(FREE-FLOW TEXT)
System response:
RP/NCE1A0950/
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR
2 OP NCE1A0950/10JUN/FREE-FLOW TEXT
How to Add Confidential Options
Airline offices can add confidential option elements to the PNR so that certain
actions occur on a specified date.
Automatic Cancellation of Itinerary
The OPX element requests that all the itinerary elements of their airline are
automatically cancelled on a specific date.
To add an automatic cancellation option, enter:
OPX -20MAR /(FREE-FLOW TEXT)
Automatic Placement of PNR on Office Queue
The OPQ option element in a PNR requests that on a specified date, the PNR is
placed on the queue of a designated office.
To add an automatic queue placement option, enter:
OPQ -MAN7X0123 /12FEB /3C1 /(FREE-FLOW TEXT)
Note: Depending on the office profile, if the queue and category are not valid,
you will see an error message displayed or the PNR is placed on queue
0, category 0 at the destination office.
Ticketless Bookings
An airline, such as a low-cost carrier, can use ticketless bookings. This practice is
entirely separate from the concept of electronic ticketing.
Airlines offering ticketless bookings are identified by the letter Y in the EPAY field
of the airline's GG PCA page.
Additionally, an indicator (T) appears in the header of an availability display to
indicate that the carrier offers a ticketless payment option.
Standard Amadeus availability displays are used to make ticketless bookings.
When you make a booking, you must enter electronic payment information (SSR
EPAY) before you can make an end transaction entry. The airline processes the
payment information and sends a booking confirmation number using an SSR
OTHS element.
Once the airline has confirmed the booking, the airline segments are validated
and further modifications to the PNR are subject to restrictions.
For additional information, see HE EPAY.
Chapter 3 Passenger Name Records
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 89
Individual PNR Security
Amadeus individual PNR security allows you to set up special security rules to
allow or disallow a PNR from being accessed by one or several other offices.
The individual PNR security functions may allow access to a PNR even when
there are no other special agreements in place. These security functions
generally override Amadeus extended ownership agreements (EOS) when these
exist, except in the case of PNR claim and reverse access claim.
Unlike change of ownership, individual PNR security allows you to share PNR
viewing and/or updating, and ticketing functionalities without your losing control of
the PNR.
If a travel agency office requires access to a PNR that was created outside
Amadeus, the system user airline whose segments are in the PNR must retrieve
the PNR and create an ES agreement to allow access by the travel agency.
For more information, see HE PNR SECURITY.
What Is a Security Element?
The individual PNR security element is an un-numbered PNR item, which can
only be created or deleted by the responsible office. The security element can
store a maximum of five individual PNR security agreements.
Each security agreement contains the office ID of the office receiving access to
the PNR and the access mode to be applied to that office.
Security Receiver Types
You can specify a receiver type for the office ID receiving the security agreement.
These are shown in the table below:
Table: Security Receiver Types
Receiver Type Description
G Office ID
This is the default, it can be omitted
I IATA number
A valid IATA number (eight characters) or an asterisk
(*)
P Pseudo-office ID
A pseudo-office ID (between 1 and 14 characters) or
an asterisk (*)
You can use asterisks (*) to represent wildcards in the office ID definition, in
order to cover all or parts of a corporation. An asterisk in IATA number or pseudo-
office ID definitions represents all offices.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
90 Edition 3.1
Security Access Modes
The access modes for the receiving office ID are shown in the table below:
Security Access Modes
Access Mode Description
R Read-only access
You can view the PNR, but no updates are allowed.
T Read and ticket access
You can view the PNR and ticket. However, you cannot
modify the booking (change/cancel names,
add/rebook/cancel flight segments, add/modify/delete
contact elements, PNR split).
B Both read and write access
Full PNR update is allowed, except for change of
ownership.
N No access
The office ID specified cannot retrieve this PNR via
extended security agreements. (This overrides
Amadeus extended ownership.)
Note: Valid access modes for IATA numbers or pseudo-office IDs are B, T
and N. Airlines ATOs/CTOs can use the access mode *T only in third-
party (OA) PNRs.
Chapter 3 Passenger Name Records
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 91
How to Add Extended Security
To add extended security to a PNR, enter:
ES /G PARWL21** - B , ***WL2*** - R
ES PNR security transaction code
/G Slash, receiver type (optional since it is the global indicator)
PARWL21** First office ID
-B Mandatory separator, access mode for office ID 1
, Separator between office agreements
***WL2*** Second office ID
-R Mandatory separator, access mode for office ID 2
Note: Up to five office IDs can be included in one entry.
System response:
RP/NCE1A0950/NCE1A0950 MR/SU 8MAY95/0836Z DH5EST
RF RF
1.RODRIGUEZ/JUAN MR
2 LH 400 M 28JAN 7 FRAJFK HK1 1 1000 1245 *1A/
3 AP +49 (0)69 696 215-B
4 TK OK08MAY/NCE1A0950
* ES/G B PARWL21**
R ***WL2***
In the example above, all WL2 offices world-wide can access this PNR in "read
mode", and any WL2 office in Paris with a number in the range 100 to 1ZZ can
access and update the PNR.
After end of transaction, the PNR appears as follows:
RP/NCE1A0950/NCE1A0950 MR/SU 8MAY95/0848Z DH5EST
1.RODRIGUEZ/JUAN MR
2 LH 400 M 28JAN 7 FRAJFK HK1 1 1000 1245 *1A/
3 AP +49 (0)69 696 215-B
4 TK OK08MAY/NCE1A0950
* ES/G 08MAY/MRSU/NCE1A0950
PARWL21**-B/***WL2***-R
How to Cancel Extended Security
To cancel the entire PNR security element, enter:
ESX
How to Display a Security Agreement
To display the security agreements, enter one of the following options:
Table: Display Security Agreements
Entry Displays...
ESD Security elements with a global core office ID
ESD /I Security elements with an IATA receiving type
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
92 Edition 3.1
Entry Displays...
ESD /P Security elements for pseudo-office IDs
Any agency that can retrieve the PNR may display individual PNR security
agreements.
How to Retrieve a Security Element
To retrieve the security element for the current PNR, enter:
RTE
To retrieve the security element history for the current PNR, enter:
RHE
Using Special Segments
Here we describe several types of special segments you can add to a PNR:
• Married, open and waitlist segments
• Passive, ghost and service segments
• Information segments
• Auxiliary segments
Married Segments
In certain cases, airlines may offer a better level of availability on flight segments
if these segments are sold as part of a connecting flight rather than as individual
flight segments.
In addition, some flight segments may be restricted for use as part of connecting
flights only, due to a legal requirement concerning traffic restrictions.
When segments are sold together in either of these ways, they are known as
married segments.
If segments are married to other segments in the itinerary, it may not be possible
to cancel, price, or ticket a segment individually.
When a PNR contains a married segment, a special tag - MSC - is displayed in
the PNR header line. See HE HEADER for more information about the PNR
header.
For more information on married segments, see HE MARRIED.
Chapter 3 Passenger Name Records
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 93
How to Display a Married Segment
If your office is using the extended air segment display, you can see the married
segments displayed with an asterisk (*) before the board and destination points,
as shown in the following example:
4 UA 815 A 02JAN 5*LAXSYD DK1 1040P 815A 04JAN E 0 744 LL
On the other hand, there is no married segment asterisk in the standard air
segment display. If you want to know which actual segments are married, you
have to make a specific entry.
There are two ways you can display married segments: through an itinerary
display or an air segments display.
Display Entire Itinerary
To display an entire itinerary with married segment indicators, enter:
RTIM
Display Air Segments Only
To display only married air segments, enter:
RTAM
Open Segments
When a passenger does not know the exact time or date of travel, you can enter
an open segment in the itinerary. You can enter an open segment with or without
a date.
Open segments maintain segment continuity and can be used for pricing and
ticketing. Segment continuity is defined as the logical progression of a
passenger's itinerary. When segments are dated, the system automatically
arranges the segments in date order and by city pair.
Note: Some airlines do not allow open segments on flights eligible for
electronic ticketing. For more information, see HE ETT XX, where XX
is the airline code.
For more information on open segments, see HE OPEN.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
94 Edition 3.1
How to Create an Open Segment
Here is an example of an entry to book an open segment. This example specifies
the airline, class of service and arrival city, with passenger association:
SO BA C 25NOV LHRJFK /P2
SO Open segment transaction code
BA Airline code
C Class of service
25NOV Departure date
Note: This is optional unless it is the first segment to be
ticketed, in which case it is mandatory.
LHR Departure city (optional)
The system defaults to the city attached to your terminal
JFK Arrival city
/P2 Slash, passenger association (optional)
System response:
1 BAOPEN C 25NOV 2 LHRJFK/P2
Waitlist Segments
When an availability display shows a zero (0) or an L, you can waitlist a
passenger on a flight.
Note: The processing of your waitlisted segment is airline specific, and
subject to the regulations and operating procedures of each airline.
You can also waitlist a flight from an Amadeus Direct Access availability display.
Waitlist Action Codes
The priority waitlist action codes are PA, PC, PD or PE.
PE is the standard, non-group priority action code. The PA action code
represents the highest level of priority waitlist and is normally used by the agents
responsible for inventory control.
Note: You may not be authorized to use all of these action codes.
For more information on waitlist segments, see HE WAITLIST.
Chapter 3 Passenger Name Records
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 95
How to Create a Waitlist Segment
To create a waitlist segment from an availability display, enter:
SS 1 C 9 /PE
SS Segment sell transaction code
1 Number of seats
C Class of service
9 Line number from availability display
/PE Slash, the waitlist priority action code
Note: You must use the PE action code for short-sell entries from a direct
access availability display if the class shown is O, L or W.
Information Segments
Information segments can be used to maintain continuity in an itinerary. They fall
into two categories:
• Information segment - A flight that is part of a passenger's itinerary and is not
an Amadeus air segment.
• Arrival unknown segment (ARNK) - The arrival city of the previous segment
does not match the departure city of the next segment in the itinerary, or the
arrival is by unspecified transport.
Information segments are not mandatory, but they do ensure that the PNR
contains as much detail as possible concerning the passenger's itinerary.
What Is an Information Segment?
An information flight segment gives details of a flight that has not been booked
through Amadeus. You can enter information segments for any non-distribution
system user airline.
Entering this segment may or may not generate a message to the airline
involved, depending on whether any other element for action by the same airline
is entered in the PNR during the same or a subsequent transaction. This could be
an actively booked flight, or an SSR or an OSI element.
Information flight segments can be included in group and non-group PNRs.
Note: The information segment is not recognized by the system for pricing or
ticketing.
For more information, see HE SEG.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
96 Edition 3.1
How to Create an Information Segment
Here is an example of a PNR that has an itinerary.
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR
2 TK1825 Y 22MAY 3 ISTORY HK1 I 0840 1115 *1A/
3 AF 022 Y 23MAY 4 CDGJFK HK1 0725 2C 0825 1015 *1A/E*
4 APH 07 123 123 PARIS
5 TK OK16APR/NCE1A0950
You want to add more information regarding the passenger's flight to Istanbul,
which has not been booked through Amadeus.
To create an information segment for this PNR:
SI SV219 Y 20MAY JEDIST HK1 /0815 1645
SI Information segment transaction code
SV219 Airline code, flight number
Y Class of service
20MAY Departure date
JED Departure city
IST Arrival city
HK Status code (must be HK, HL or HN)
1 Number of seats
/0815 Slash, departure time
1645 Arrival time
System response:
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR
2 SV 219 Y 20MAY 1 JEDIST HK1 0815 1345 *I*
3 TK1825 Y 22MAY 3 ISTORY HK1 I 0840 1115 *1A/
4 AF 022 Y 23MAY 4 CDGJFK HK1 0725 2C 0825 1015 *1A/E*
5 AP NCE 33492943273 - AMADEUS PRODUCT PLANNING - A
6 TK OK16APR/NCE1A0950
Note: The *I* flag indicates that Saudi Arabian Airlines' flight number 219
operating between Jeddah and Istanbul on May 20 is an information
segment. This flag is appended at the time of PNR retrieval.
What Is an Arrival Unknown Segment?
The arrival unknown segment indicates that it is not known how the passenger
plans to travel from the arrival city of the previous segment to the departure city of
the next segment.
For more information, see HE SEG.
Chapter 3 Passenger Name Records
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 97
How to Create an Arrival Unknown Segment
Here is an example of a PNR with two flight segments. The arrival and departure
cities are different between the two flights:
RP/NCE1A0950/
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR
2 AF1080 Y 15JUN 1 CDGLHR DK1 0730 0750 15JUN E 0 321 B
SEE RTSVC
3 AF1469 Y 22JUN 1 MANCDG DK1 0635 0905 22JUN E 0 319 B
SEE RTSVC
To create an arrival unknown segment for this PNR, enter:
SI ARNK
System response:
RP/NCE1A0950/
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR
2 AF1080 Y 15JUN 1 CDGLHR DK1 0730 0750 15JUN E 0 321 B
SEE RTSVC
3 ARNK
4 AF1469 Y 22JUN 1 MANCDG DK1 0635 0905 22JUN E 0 319 B
SEE RTSVC
The system automatically places the ARNK segment between the non-sequential
segments if you do not enter a date.
If you know the arrival date, you can add this to your entry. You can also add
passenger association:
SI ARNK 16MAY /P2
Passive Segments
Here we describe three different types of special PNR segments: passive, ghost
and service.
For more information on these segment types, see HE PNR.
What Is a Passive Segment?
When a flight segment is confirmed from a source other than Amadeus, you can
enter it in the PNR as a passive segment. This enables you to maintain a
passenger's complete itinerary, and allows you to price and ticket the segments.
It is recommended that you use passive segments only when it is absolutely
necessary. Before entering a passive segment, you should consider the following
alternatives:
• If you want to ticket a PNR including flight segments booked in a system
other than Amadeus, and the airline supports it, use PNR Claim.
If you do this, you do not have to create any passive segments and you can
issue the ticket as normal. See How to Claim a PNR on page 109 for more
information.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
98 Edition 3.1
• If you want to add service information, either as a special service request
(SSR) or as other service information (OSI), and the airline supports it, use a
service segment.
• If you want to price an itinerary without creating an actual booking, use ghost
segments. These can be used for any type of itinerary and do not generate a
message to the airline.
What Is a Ghost Segment?
You use ghost segments to produce a quote for an itinerary without actually
booking any segments.
Ghost segments differ from standard IATA passive segments in two ways:
• They may be used with all airlines, including system user airlines.
• Information is never sent to the relevant airline.
You can use ghost segments for pricing an itinerary, but not for ticketing. In order
to issue a ticket for a ghost segment, you must change it to a service segment or
a standard IATA passive segment, using a change of status entry (PK). You can
only do this if the airline allows the use of service segments or standard IATA
passive segments.
You can also use ghost segments to create a booking that is beyond the airline's
date range. The segment is stored in the PNR with the date, year and any ghost
status code.
What Is a Service Segment?
You can create service segments by using either the long-sell or short-sell
segment entry. Both entries must include the agent sign or record locator, if
booked in another system. You must include the times in your entry when the
flight does not exist in Amadeus.
The advantage of service segments over passive segments is that with service
segments you can request SSR and OSI items for supplementary services,
including seat requests.
How to Create a Passive, Ghost or Service Segment
The short-sell and long-sell entry formats for all three types of segment is the
same. However, you must create the required segment using one of the following
status codes, depending on the type of segment you are creating:
Table: Passive, Service and Ghost Segment Status Codes
Status Code Description
PK Passive segment confirmed
PL Passive segment waitlisted
HK Service segment confirmed
GK Ghost segment confirmed
GL, GN Ghost segment waitlist
Chapter 3 Passenger Name Records
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 99
Short-sell Entry
Here is an example of a short-sell entry from an availability display for a passive
segment:
SS 1 G 2 /PK /ABC123
SS 1 Segment sell transaction code for one seat
G 2 Class, line number
/PK Slash, passive segment indicator
/ABC123 Slash, record locator (or agent identifier)
System response:
RP/NCE1A0950/
1 AF1981 C 20JUN 6 LHRCDG PK1 0640 0900 20JUN ABC123
SEE RTSVC
Long-sell Entry
Here is an example of a long-sell entry for a ghost segment on a booking 15
months in the future (the current date being 12JUL09):
SS LH4716 C 12OCT10 MUCSTN GK1 /1725 1815 /ABC123
System response:
RP/NCE1A0950/
1 LH4716 C 12OCT10 MUCSTN GK1 1655 1725 1815 FUTURE
PASSIVE FLIGHT/CLASS DOES NOT MATCH PUBLISHED SCHEDULE
Note: The day of the week has been replaced by the year information. A
warning line and the future tag are added to the segment.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
100 Edition 3.1
Auxiliary Segments
You can use manual auxiliary segments to request specific services from an
airline that already has an air segment in the PNR. These services are:
• Air taxi
• Car
• Hotel
• Tour
At end of transaction, a message is sent to the airline, which processes it using
its specific status codes. If the airline accepts the request, it books the required
service for you and sends back a confirmation.
For more information, see HE AUX.
You can also use manual auxiliary segments for chargeable services that are not
associated to an air segment. For more information about these segments and
how to create them, see: HE IU.
How to Create an Auxiliary Segment
Here is an example of how to create an auxiliary segment for air and taxi
services. Enter:
AU XX NN1 SCQVGO 21JUL/VIP NEED CAR THX
AU Auxiliary segment transaction code
XX Airline code of the airline to take action
NN Action code
1 Number in party
SCQ Departure city
VGO Arrival city
21 JUL Requested date
/ Slash and up to 178 characters of free-flow text
The request is sent to an airline, which then contacts taxi services.
If the airline accepts the request, the system displays the updated status code:
2 ATX XX HN1 SCQVGO 21JUL-VIP NEED CAR THX
If the airline rejects the request, this is the system response:
3 ATX IB UC1 SCQVGO 21JUL-VIP NEED CAR THX
To see a list of action and status codes, see GG CODE.
Chapter 3 Passenger Name Records
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 101
Booking Special Passengers
Here we describe the functions that allow you to handle the following special
passenger needs:
• Unaccompanied minor
• Stretcher passenger
• Cabin baggage
• Extra seat
Unaccompanied Minors
You must use a special code to indicate unaccompanied minors when making a
booking. You cannot include any other passenger type in the same PNR with an
unaccompanied minor.
To sell a segment for an unaccompanied minor, you add the UM action code and
the passengers ages to the direct sell or sell from the Amadeus availability entry
(not valid for direct access availability). The upper age limit for an unaccompanied
minor is 12 years. The system only accepts unaccompanied minor sell
transactions for available flights.
If you do not use the UM action code in your segment sell entry, you must add
the unaccompanied minor SSR element manually after you have ended
transaction. For information on how to do this, see HE SR.
Note: Do not use the child (CHD) passenger type in the name when booking
an unaccompanied minor. The unaccompanied minor transaction code
cannot be combined with any other action code in a single PNR. This
applies to currently active segments and to cancelled segments in PNR
history.
For specific airline reservation procedures, refer to GG AIR XX MINORS.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
102 Edition 3.1
How to Indicate an Unaccompanied Minor
To indicate unaccompanied minors from an availability display segment sell,
enter:
SS 3 L 2 /UM 5,6,9
SS Segment sell transaction code
3 Number of passengers
L Class of service
2 Line number from availability display
/UM Slash, unaccompanied minor transaction code
5,6,9 Ages of the passengers
The system responds with the following display:
6 SSR UMNR BA HN3 UM05/06/09/S4
For each segment booked using UM, the system generates an SSR element
indicating the number of unaccompanied minors and their ages in ascending
order. An SSR is generated for each segment in the itinerary.
Name Element for Unaccompanied Minors
You can also enter the unaccompanied minor information using the name
element when you are creating the PNR. Enter:
NM1BARCLAY/JOEY (IDUM07)
System response:
RP/NCE1A0950/
1.BARCLAY/JOEY(IDUM07)
Note: Airlines may have specific requirements about adding unaccompanied
minors to the name element. See GG AIR XX MINORS.
Stretcher Passengers
Airlines must provide a special service to those passengers who require a
stretcher during the flight. Normally, a stretcher passenger must be accompanied
by another passenger. You can request both reservations in the same PNR.
You can book a maximum of one stretcher passenger in each PNR. You make
only one stretcher request for each sell entry, regardless of the number of
passengers specified.
To sell a segment for a stretcher passenger, add the ST action code to the direct
sell, or sell from the Amadeus availability entry (not valid for direct access
availability displays).
Chapter 3 Passenger Name Records
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 103
How to Indicate a Stretcher Passenger
To indicate a stretcher passenger from an availability display segment sell, enter:
SS 2 C 3 /ST
SS Segment sell transaction code
2 Number of passengers
C Class of service
3 Line number from availability display
/ST Slash, stretcher passenger action code
System response:
6. SSR STCR BA NN1/S3
For each segment booked using the stretcher action code, the system generates
an SSR element for the relevant carrier requesting one stretcher place. Segment
association is automatic.
Note: If there is more than one name element in the PNR, you must indicate
the passenger needing the stretcher before end of transaction.
Name Element for Stretcher Passengers
You can also enter the stretcher passenger information using the name element
when you are creating the PNR. Enter:
NM1BARCLAY/ADAM MR (IDSTCR)
System response:
RP/NCE1A0950/
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR(IDSTCR)
Extra Seats for Cabin Baggage
You can book an extra seat for cabin baggage using an SSR element and a
name element. You may only book one extra seat per passenger. Depending on
the airline, you may have to issue a separate ticket for the cabin baggage.
Before making a reservation for a passenger who is carrying cabin baggage that
will occupy a seat, you must find out if the airline requires that you issue a
separate ticket for that baggage.
For pricing or ticketing details, see GG AIR XX BAGS (where XX is the two-letter
airline code) or contact the airline directly.
Note: If the airline requires separate tickets for the passenger and the extra
cabin baggage, see HE STEPS, GP CBB.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
104 Edition 3.1
How to Request Extra Seats for Cabin Baggage
To advise the airline that cabin baggage is requested when only one ticket is
required for both passenger and baggage, follow the steps below.
1. Enter two name fields in one transaction to indicate the passenger travelling
with the extra baggage.
NM2BARCLAY/ADAM MR (IDCBBG) /CBBG
NM2 Name element transaction code, number of passengers
BARCLAY/ADAM MR Passenger name
(IDCBBG) Bracket, extra baggage passenger identification, bracket
/CBBG Slash, extra baggage code as second passenger name
Note: Do not use a title for this name, otherwise you cannot
associate the SSR to the passenger.
2. Enter the service request for the cabin baggage and associate it to the
passenger.
SR CBBG -ONE CELLO /P1
SR Service request transaction code
CBBG Cabin baggage service code
-ONE CELLO Dash, free-flow text describing the type of baggage
/P1 Slash, passenger association to the passenger travelling with
the cabin baggage
System response:
4 SSR CBBG BA NN1 ONE CELLO/S3/P1
Chapter 3 Passenger Name Records
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 105
Extra Seats for Comfort
You can book an extra seat for a passenger's personal comfort using a
combination of the name element and a service request.
For more information, see HE STEPS, GP XST.
How to Request Extra Seats for Comfort
To book an extra seat for personal comfort, follow the steps below.
1. Enter two name fields in one transaction to indicate the passenger requiring
the extra seat.
NM 2 BARCLAY/ADAM MR (IDEXST) /EXST
NM2 Name element transaction code, number of passengers
BARCLAY/ADAM MR Passenger name
(IDEXST) Bracket, extra seat passenger identification, bracket
/EXST Extra seat code as second passenger name
Note: Do not use a title for this name, otherwise you cannot
associate the SSR to the passenger.
Note: You cannot modify an existing EXST name element. You can only
update the first name if the surname is also changed.
The extra seat information must be in the same name element entry
as the passenger, because the system automatically links the EXST
AIRIMP code to the actual passenger name element.
2. Enter the service request for the extra seat and associate it to the passenger.
SR EXST -PERSONAL COMFORT /P1
SR Service request transaction code
EXST Extra seat service code
-PERSONAL COMFORT Dash, free-flow text explaining the reason for the extra seat
/P1 Slash, passenger association to the passenger requiring the
extra seat
System response:
4 SSR EXST BA NN1 PERSONAL COMFORT/S3/P1
You cannot price or issue a separate ticket for the extra seat. The system creates
only one TST for the passenger. For pricing or ticketing details, see GGAIRXX
(where XX is the two-letter airline code) or contact the airline directly.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
106 Edition 3.1
Group PNRs
To handle bookings for large parties of up to 99 passengers, a special type of
PNR, a group PNR, has to be used. The group PNR must contain the following
elements:
• A special group name element
• At least one group air segment
• A group fare SSR element
• The other mandatory elements for normal PNRs (contact element, ticketing
element, received from)
For more information on group PNRs, see HE GROUP.
How to Create a Group PNR
To create a group PNR, follow the steps below.
1. Enter the group name element.
NG 15 EUROPE TOUR
NG Group name element transaction code
15 Number of passengers in the group
EUROPE TOUR Group name
2. Sell a group segment from availability by number of passengers, class of
service and line number.
SS 15 Y 1 /SG
SS Segment sell transaction code
15 Number of passengers in the group
Y Class of service
1 Line number from availability display
/SG Slash, sell group action code
To waitlist a group, enter:
SS 15 Y 1 /PG
3. Enter contact information, for example a home phone number.
APH- NCE 92 94 70 11
4. Enter a ticketing arrangement element.
TK TL 10FEB
5. Enter a group SSR element for the group fare.
SR GRPF -GV15
SR Service request transaction code
GRPF Group fare data service code
-GV15 Dash, group fare basis
Chapter 3 Passenger Name Records
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 107
6. Enter a received from element.
RF MICHAEL
7. Transmit a group name to non-Altéa Reservation airlines.
NT
8. End transaction.
ET
You now have the essential elements for your group PNR. For more information
on these steps, see HE STEPS, GP PN4.
If you need to, you can add SSRs, frequent flyer information, other service
information and remarks to the group PNR. Associate any SSRs to the
appropriate passenger or segment as required.
Note: Specific rules apply for passive, service, and group segments
(specifically in the case of non-Altéa Reservation airlines).
You can create passive segments in a group PNR; however SSR or
OSI elements are not allowed in passive segments for group PNRs
(SSR GRPF is the only exception). You cannot use service segments in
a group PNR.
Retrieving PNRs
You can retrieve a PNR using the details of a flight or auxiliary segment for a
current date, future date or past date. A PNR can be retrieved after the departure
date of the last segment booked, even if the itinerary has been cancelled. You
can also retrieve a PNR while in temporary ticketing mode.
PNR retrieval is controlled by the security package, and is dependent on your
user identification, office type and office identification. The security package
regulates PNR retrieval for system user airlines, participating carriers, travel
agencies, providers and help desks. You can also retrieve a PNR if your office
identification is specified in a security agreement within the PNR.
In some cases a PNR may be locked or set to read mode to safeguard its
integrity, or following a failure in the nightly purge process. In that case the PNR
can be retrieved but not modified.
How to Retrieve a PNR
To retrieve the currently active PNR if you have moved off the PNR screen, enter:
RT
You can also retrieve a PNR using the following options if the PNR is not active:
Table: PNR Retrieval Options
Entry Retrieves a PNR Using a...
RT Z472IX Record locator
RT /BARCLAY/A Partial name
RT /18NOV-BARCLAY Date and name
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
108 Edition 3.1
Entry Retrieves a PNR Using a...
RT CO123-BARCLAY Flight and name
RT CO123/18NOV-BARCLAY Flight, date and name
RT 1 Name list
RT 0 Redisplay the list
If you want to retrieve service information from the PNR, enter:
RT SVC
For more information on retrieving PNRs, see HE PNR RETRIEVE.
What Is a PNR Claim?
The Amadeus PNR claim functionality allows you to take over responsibility for
PNRs that were originally created and booked in another office or airline system,
provided that the following conditions are met:
• The airline has an agreement with Amadeus to allow their PNRs to be
claimed.
• Applicable Amadeus extended ownership agreements (EOS) and PNR
security elements (ES agreements) allow you to claim the PNR.
Once you have claimed responsibility for a PNR, you can update it as you would
any retrieved PNR.
For more information, see HE CLAIM.
Chapter 3 Passenger Name Records
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 109
How to Claim a PNR
If you have sufficient rights to claim a PNR, you can claim it using the following
steps:
1. Retrieve the PNR using the record locator, flight number, date, or name.
RO CO ABC123
RO PNR claim transaction code
CO Airline code
ABC123 Original airline record locator
The PNR is displayed on your screen in its original format.
-------------------------------------------
NHTB0L
1.1BARCLAY/A
1 CO 50Y 01FEB SA LAXIAH HK1 700A 1210P
2 CO1524Y 02FEB SU IAHMIA HK1 115P 432P
3 ARNK
4 CO 50Y 03FEB MO LAXIAH HK1 700A 1210P
5 CO1524Y 04FEB TU IAHMIA HK1 115P 432P
FONE-
1.MEX645-0008/B702
2.MEX*FAX NA/N000
3.MEX*702 645 0008H/N000
4.MEX*COMPANY/N000
*CLAIM MODE*
-------------------------------------------
Note: At this point, the PNR is still the responsibility of the original office
or airline.
2. Use an end of transaction entry to claim the PNR.
ER
This transfers the responsibility for the PNR from the original office airline to
your office.
The PNR is now displayed in the Amadeus PNR format:
--- RLR ---
RP/MADIB0100/MADIB0100 AA/SU 10OCT96/1647Z LL6V29
1.BARCLAY/A
2 CO 050 Y 01FEB 6 LAXIAH HK1 6 0700 1210
3 CO1524 Y 02FEB 7 IAHMIA HK1 C 1315 1632
4 ARNK
5 CO 050 Y 03FEB 1 LAXIAH HK1 6 0700 1210
6 CO1524 Y 04FEB 2 IAHMIA HK1 C 1315 1632
7 AP 91 5878389
8 TK TL01FEB/1700/MADIB0100
9 OSI 1A CTCP MEX 645-0008/B702
10 OSI 1A CTCP MEX FAX NA/N000
11 OSI 1A CTCP MEX 702 645 0008H/N000
12 OSI 1A CTCP MEX COMPANY/N000
13 OSI 1A CTCP MEX 4908 PLANET CT LAS VEGAS NV 89130/N000
You can now update the PNR as you would any other retrieved PNR.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
110 Edition 3.1
How to Search for PNRs
Here we describe two methods you can use to find PNRs in the system,
searching by flight and searching by office.
Search by Flight
To list all PNRs for a flight on a specific date, enter the date after the flight
number. For example:
LP/BA902/10JUN
LP Search by flight transaction code
/BA902 Slash, airline code, flight number
/10JUN Slash, date
System response:
LP/BA902/10JUN
LHRFRA
001 01FRIEDMANN Y58LWE C HK 01MAR SWI1G OSY
002 *01ROBERTSON X76Z8O V HK 19MAR LONBA06CS OT
003 01TOENGES X782SZ Q HK 13DEC KSFL1211D FIOT
END OF DISPLAY
For more information, see HE LP.
Search by Office
The search by office allows you to create a list of passenger names and record
locators that you can display on your terminal, send to a printer, or place on a
queue.
You can search for passengers in PNRs belonging to your own office or to other
offices for which you have PNR retrieval rights (see HE RT for an explanation of
retrieval rights).
The following table displays some of the options you can use to search for PNRs
by office:
Table: Search for PNRs
Entry System Response
LPO/ALL Displays all PNRs in your office.
LPO/A(AF, BA)B(CPH) Displays all PNRs in your office meeting the specified
search criteria. There is no limit to the number of
search codes that you can include in your entry.
LPO/NCE1A0999/A(AF) Displays all PNRs in a different office meeting the
specified search criteria.
LPO/N(CCREP.1SEPLHR) Displays all PNRs in your office matching the specified
auxiliary segments.
LPS/PS Displays the passenger list status table.
LPS/D3 Displays the search results.
LPS/D3-Q29C3 Places a name list on a specific queue.
LPX/3-5,7 Deletes selected results from the status table.
Chapter 3 Passenger Name Records
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 111
Entry System Response
LPX/ALL Deletes all results from the status table
For more information, see HE LPO.
Purged PNRs
PNRs that have been purged from the system are called past-date records
(PDRs).
A PNR is purged four days after the start date of its last segment, whether that
segment was cancelled or not. This means four days after departure for a flight,
tour or cruise segment; four days after check-in for a hotel segment; and four
days after the pick-up date for a car segment.
The purge occurs during a nightly file maintenance process that starts running at
midnight. If the process fails, the PNRs that were not purged are locked and
updates to these PNRs are not allowed. The locked PNRs will be purged during
the next nightly file maintenance.
While a PNR is being purged, you can still retrieve it using the usual retrieval
requests. See HE RT.
Once a PNR has been purged, there are two ways to recall it:
• Online - interactively
• Offline - deferred mode
PNRs can be recalled for a period of three years after the last segment is flown or
completed.
Note: These requests may not be available to all users.
For more information, see HE PURGE.
How to Recall a Purged PNR Interactively
Using an online request, you can recall a purged PNR by referring to an air
segment in the original PNR. You must also indicate the date of the segment.
Enter, for example:
RPP /AF7708 /16DEC07
RPP Recall PDR interactively transaction code
/AF7708 Slash, mandatory airline code, flight number
/16DEC07 Slash, mandatory flight date
This request recalls records that contain an AF7708 segment on 16DEC07 and
displays the results on the screen.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
112 Edition 3.1
If more than one past-date record is found, a list of PDRs showing the names of
all passengers in each PDR, is displayed:
PDR LIST 00028
PDR LIST 00069
NCE1A0950/0001AAS/SU 05MAR2009/0924Z
RPP/AF7708/16DEC07
001 AIGNER/S ZH9HS3 AF7708 16DEC03_PARAF0100
002 BERNARDOS/E ZH9HS3 AF7708 16DEC03_PARAF0100
003 GARDINER/C ZH9HS3 AF7708 16DEC03_PARAF0100
004 NOGUCHI/H ZH9HSN AF7708 16DEC03_PARAF0100
005 PERIDON/O ZH9HSO AF7708 16DEC03_PARAF0100
For more information, see HE RPP.
How to Recall a Purged PNR in Deferred Mode
Using an offline request, you can recall a purged PNR by airline code only, as
long as the date range does not exceed two days. For example:
RPD /LH /02JUL07-03JUL07 /BPAR -HART /JOHN *T (TEXT)
RPD Recall PDR in deferred mode transaction code
/LH Slash, airline code (mandatory)
/02JUL07
-03JUL07
Slash, flight departure date (mandatory), or date range
(optional, two days maximum)
/BPAR Slash, boarding indicator and board point (optional)
-HART Dash, family name (optional)
/JOHN Slash, given name (optional - must be in conjunction with
family name)
*T Asterisk, target output display (optional)
(T for terminal, Q for queue, or P for print)
(TEXT) Parentheses containing up to 30 characters of free-flow text
for identification (optional)
This request recalls PDRs owned by your office that contain an LH segment in
the specified date range. The PDR list shows, for the requested passenger name,
the first LH segment found in the PDR for that date range.
For more information, see HE RPD.
Modifying PNRs
Here we describe several tasks you can perform when you need to modify a
PNR.
Deleting PNR Elements
Here you will find information about how to delete segments, delete itineraries
and cancel name elements.
Chapter 3 Passenger Name Records
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 113
How to Delete a Segment
When you are working with PNRs, you can delete a segment from the PNR or
delete the entire itinerary with one entry.
Here is an example of a PNR with several air segments:
RP/NCE1A0950/NCE1A0950 AG/SU 15MAY09/0837Z 2XGUPJ
NCE1A0950/0022AG/15MAY09
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR
2 BA 428 Y 15JUN 1 LHRAMS HK1 0705 0920 15JUN E BA/
3 BA 423 Y 21JUN 7 AMSLHR HK1 0720 0735 21JUN E BA/
4 BA 117 Y 04JUL 6 LHRJFK HK1 0855 1120 04JUL E BA/
5 BA 178 Y 11JUL 6 JFKLHR HK1 0840 2035 11JUL E BA/
6 APH 07 123 123 PARIS
7 TK TL10JUN/NCE1A0950
To delete segment number 2, enter:
XE 2
System response:
RP/NCE1A0950/NCE1A0950 AG/SU 15MAY09/0837Z 2XGUPJ
NCE1A0950/0022AG/15MAY09
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR
2 BA 423 Y 21JUN 7 AMSLHR HK1 0720 0735 21JUN E BA/
3 BA 117 Y 04JUL 6 LHRJFK HK1 0855 1120 04JUL E BA/
4 BA 178 Y 11JUL 6 JFKLHR HK1 0840 2035 11JUL E BA/
5 APH 07 123 123 PARIS
6 TK TL10JUN/NCE1A0950
The system automatically renumbers the remaining segments and elements in
the PNR.
Note: This entry works on any type of segment in a PNR.
Multiple Segments
You can also delete multiple segments at the same time:
Delete Multiple Segment Entries
Entry Description
XE 2, 3 Deletes segments 2 and 3
XE 4-7 Deletes segments 4, 5, 6, and 7
How to Delete an Itinerary
When you are working with PNRs, you can delete the entire itinerary with one
entry.
Here is an example of a PNR with air segments:
RP/NCE1A0950/NCE1A0950 AG/SU 15MAY09/0837Z 2XGUPJ
NCE1A0950/0022AG/15MAY09
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR
2 BA 428 Y 15JUN 1 LHRAMS HK1 0705 0920 15JUN E BA/
3 BA 423 Y 21JUN 7 AMSLHR HK1 0720 0735 21JUN E BA/
4 APH 07 123 123 PARIS
5 TK TL10JUN/NCE1A0950
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
114 Edition 3.1
To delete all the segments in the itinerary, enter:
XI
System response:
RP/NCE1A0950/NCE1A0950 AG/SU 15MAY09/0837Z 2XGUPJ
NCE1A0950/0022AG/15MAY09
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR
2 APH 07 123 123 PARIS
3 TK TL10JUN/NCE1A0950
How to Cancel a Name Element
You cancel a name element in the same way that you delete other segments on a
PNR. However, with the name element, there are certain restrictions that must be
observed.
To cancel a name element:
1. Retrieve the PNR.
Here is an example of a PNR with two names and two seats booked on each
flight:
RP/NCE1A0950/NCE1A0950 AG/SU 20MAY09/0827Z 345ALN
NCE1A0950/0022AG/20MAY09
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR 2.BARCLAY/ANN MS
3 BA 117 Y 15JUN 1 LHRJFK HK2 0855 1120 15JUN E BA/
4 BA 178 Y 22JUN 1 JFKLHR HK2 0840 2035 22JUN E BA/
5 APH 07 123 123
6 TK TL10JUN/NCE1A0950
The first transaction you perform after retrieving the PNR must be the name
cancellation.
2. Delete the passenger name element.
XE 2
System response:
RP/NCE1A0950/NCE1A0950 AG/SU 20MAY09/0827Z 345ALN
NCE1A0950/0022AG/20MAY09
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR
3 BA 117 Y 15JUN 1 LHRJFK HK1 0855 1120 15JUN E BA/
4 BA 178 Y 22JUN 1 JFKLHR HK1 0840 2035 22JUN E BA/
5 APH 07 123 123
6 TK TL10JUN/NCE1A0950
The name is deleted and the number of seats booked is automatically
reduced. Any other information that was associated to the passenger is
removed as well.
After you cancel the name, you cannot make any other entries except RF and
ET/ER.
3. Enter the received from element.
RF PAX
Chapter 3 Passenger Name Records
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 115
4. End the transaction.
ET
Note: This functionality is not supported by all airlines. Please verify with the
airline whether or not they allow a reduction of the number in the party.
You cannot cancel a name element when an FA/ET element exists.
Rebooking PNRs
Here you will find information about how to rebook PNRs.
What Is Rebooking?
The rebooking entry enables you to rebook existing segments in a PNR. This
entry allows you to change the following:
• A class of service in one or more segments
• A date in one or more segments
• A flight number in one or more segments
• A combination of class, date and flight number
You can rebook segments from a displayed PNR, whether new or retrieved, or
from an availability display for the same city pair.
Note: You cannot rebook open segments, information segments, non-
participating carrier segments or passive segments.
For more information, see HE REBOOK.
How to Rebook a PNR
The rebook entry cancels existing segments and resells the segments using the
new details.
However, the rebook process always uses the same segment sell action code as
the original segment that is being replaced and only replaces the original PNR
data if an exact confirmed sale is received.
Here is an example of a PNR:
1.STEWART ANDY 2.CROWTHER LESLIE 3.DRAKE CHARLIE
4 IB3402 M 23NOV 1 MADORY HK3 0730 0920 *1A/
5 AF 804 K 24NOV 2 CDGLHR HK3 2D 0730 0740 *1A/
6 BA 902 S 25NOV 3 LHRFRA HK3 1 0725 1000
7 LH3052 C 27NOV 5 FRAARN HK3 0950 1155 *1A/
8 AY 642 D 29NOV 7 ARNHEL HK3 1330 1525 *1A/
9 AY871 T 02DEC 3 HELCDG HK3 0815 1020 *1A/
10 IB3405 V 04DEC 5 ORYMAD HK3 1405 1555 *1A/
11 AP EL PRADO
12 TK OK05APR/MUC1A0701
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
116 Edition 3.1
Class
To change the class in segment 6, flight BA902, from S to Y, enter:
SB Y 6
SB Rebooking transaction code
Y New class for the segment
6 Number of the segment being changed
System response:
1.STEWART ANDY 2.CROWTHER LESLIE 3.DRAKE CHARLIE
4 IB3402 M 23NOV 1 MADORY HK3 0730 0920 *1A/
5 AF 804 K 24NOV 2 CDGLHR HK3 2D 0730 0740 *1A/
6 BA 902 Y 25NOV 3 LHRFRA HK3 1 0725 1000
7 LH3052 C 27NOV 5 FRAARN HK3 0950 1155 *1A/
8 AY 642 D 29NOV 7 ARNHEL HK3 1330 1525 *1A/
9 AY871 T 02DEC 3 HELCDG HK3 0815 1020 *1A/
10 IB3405 V 04DEC 5 ORYMAD HK3 1405 1555 *1A/
11 AP EL PRADO
12 TK OK05APR/MUC1A0701
Flight Number
To change the flight number in segment 5 to BD 194, enter:
SB BD194 *5
SB Rebooking transaction code
BD194 New flight number for the segment
*5 Asterisk, number of the segment being changed
System response:
1.STEWART ANDY 2.CROWTHER LESLIE 3.DRAKE CHARLIE
4 IB3402 M 23NOV 1 MADORY HK3 0730 0920 *1A/
5 BD 194 K 24NOV 2 CDGLHR HK3 2D 0730 0740 *1A/
6 BA 902 Y 25NOV 3 LHRFRA HK3 1 0725 1000
7 LH3052 C 27NOV 5 FRAARN HK3 0950 1155 *1A/
8 AY 642 D 29NOV 7 ARNHEL HK3 1330 1525 *1A/
9 AY871 T 02DEC 3 HELCDG HK3 0815 1020 *1A/
10 IB3405 V 04DEC 5 ORYMAD HK3 1405 1555 *1A/
11 AP EL PRADO
12 TK OK05APR/MUC1A0701
Note: You can rebook by flight number for the same city pair only.
Date
To change the date in segment 7 to 28 November, enter:
SB 28NOV 7
SB Rebooking transaction code
28NOV New date for the segment
7 Number of the segment being changed
Chapter 3 Passenger Name Records
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 117
System response:
1.STEWART ANDY 2.CROWTHER LESLIE 3.DRAKE CHARLIE
4 IB3402 M 23NOV 1 MADORY HK3 0730 0920 *1A/
5 AF 804 K 24NOV 2 CDGLHR HK3 2D 0730 0740 *1A/
6 BA 902 Y 25NOV 3 LHRFRA HK3 1 0725 1000
7 LH3052 C 28NOV 5 FRAARN HK3 0950 1155 *1A/
8 AY 642 D 29NOV 7 ARNHEL HK3 1330 1525 *1A/
9 AY871 T 02DEC 3 HELCDG HK3 0815 1020 *1A/
10 IB3405 V 04DEC 5 ORYMAD HK3 1405 1555 *1A/
11 AP EL PRADO
12 TK OK05APR/MUC1A0701
Combine Rebooking Entries
You can use multiple rebooking entries at the same time. For example, this entry
changes the class and the date for segment 4:
SB F 28 SEP 4
SB Rebooking transaction code
F New booking class
28SEP New date for the segment
4 Number of the segment being changed
System response:
1.STEWART ANDY 2.CROWTHER LESLIE 3.DRAKE CHARLIE
4 IB3402 F 28SEP 1 MADORY HK3 0730 0920 *1A/
5 AF 804 K 24NOV 2 CDGLHR HK3 2D 0730 0740 *1A/
6 BA 902 Y 25NOV 3 LHRFRA HK3 1 0725 1000
7 LH3052 C 28NOV 5 FRAARN HK3 0950 1155 *1A/
8 AY 642 D 29NOV 7 ARNHEL HK3 1330 1525 *1A/
9 AY871 T 02DEC 3 HELCDG HK3 0815 1020 *1A/
10 IB3405 V 04DEC 5 ORYMAD HK3 1405 1555 *1A/
11 AP EL PRADO
12 TK OK05APR/MUC1A0701
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
118 Edition 3.1
Changing PNR Ownership
Here you will find information about how to transfer PNR ownership and how to
change the queuing office.
How to Transfer PNR Ownership
The responsible office is the location that owns the PNR. When the responsible
office is changed, the ownership of the PNR is transferred to the new responsible
office.
Here is an example of a PNR:
RP/NCE1A0950/NCE1A0950 AG/SU 15MAY09/0932Z 2YS4BF
NCE1A0950/0022AG/15MAY09
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR
2 BA 117 Y 15JUN 1 LHRJFK HK1 0855 1120 15JUN E BA/
3 BA 178 Y 21JUN 7 JFKLHR HK1 0840 2035 21JUN E BA/
4 APH 07 123 123 LONDON
5 TK TL10JUN/NCE1A0950
6 SSR VGML BA HK1/S2
To transfer the responsibility of the PNR to another office, enter:
RP /MADAF0002
The system displays the change in the header:
RP/MADAF0002/NCE1A0950 AG/SU 15MAY09/0932Z 2YS4BF
NCE1A0950/0022AG/15MAY09
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR
2 BA 117 Y 15JUN 1 LHRJFK HK1 0855 1120 15JUN E BA/
3 BA 178 Y 21JUN 7 JFKLHR HK1 0840 2035 21JUN E BA/
4 APH 07 123 123 LONDON
5 TK TL10JUN/NCE1A0950
6 SSR VGML BA HK1/S2
You can also transfer responsibility of the PNR and change the ticketing office
(TK), queuing office (Q), and queue option indicator (OP), if present. Enter, for
example:
RP /MADAF0002/ALL
For more information, see HE RP.
How to Change the Queuing Office
You can change the queuing office in a PNR without changing the responsible
office by using the RF transaction. The queuing office is where the system sends
any messages it receives concerning the PNR.
Changing the queuing office is controlled by Amadeus security, and the new
office identification is automatically verified by the system.
When you enter the first element in a newly created PNR, the system
automatically enters a heading with the identification of the responsible office
(RP) at the top of the PNR.
For example, the original header displays:
RP/MUC1A0701/MUC1A0701
Chapter 3 Passenger Name Records
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 119
To change the queuing office to MUC1A0702, enter:
RF JOHN SMITH/MUC1A0702
The next time you retrieve the PNR, the header displays:
RP/MUC1A0701/MUC1Q0702
At the end of transaction, the system adds the identification of the office that
created the RF element to the RP identification as the queuing office.
Amadeus Altéa reservation airline agents can change the queuing office
identification for a PNR by including the new office identification in the RF entry.
Copying PNRs
Here you will find information about how to copy PNRs.
How to Copy a PNR
You have several options available when you need to copy a PNR. Once the
PNR is copied, you save it as a new PNR to obtain a new record locator.
For more information on copying PNRs, see HE COPY.
Here is an example of a PNR:
RP/NCE1A0950/NCE1A0950 AG/SU 18MAY09/1219Z 3J8LR9
NCE1A0950/0022AG/18MAY09
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR 2.BARCLAY/ANN MS
3 AF1080 Y 20JUN 6 CDGLHR HK2 0730 0750 20JUN E AF/
4 AF1981 Y 30JUN 2 LHRCDG HK2 0640 0900 30JUN E AF/
5 APH 07 123 123 PARIS
6 TK TL15JUN/NCE1A0950
To copy all of the PNR's itinerary and passenger information, enter:
RRN
System response:
-IGNORED 3J8LR9-
RP/NCE1A0950/
1 AF1080 Y 20JUN 6 CDGLHR DK2 0730 0750 20JUN E 0 321 B
SEE RTSVC
2 AF1981 Y 30JUN 2 LHRCDG DK2 0640 0900 30JUN E 0 321 B
SEE RTSVC
3 APH 07 123 123 PARIS
The original PNR is ignored, and the itinerary and contact elements from the
original PNR are copied into a new PNR.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
120 Edition 3.1
Associate the Original PNR
To copy a PNR and to create an associated cross-reference (AXR) record
between the original PNR and the newly created PNR, enter:
RRA
System response:
-IGNORED 3J8LR9-
RP/NCE1A0950/
1 AF1080 Y 20JUN 6 CDGLHR DK2 0730 0750 20JUN E 0 321 B
SEE RTSVC
2 AF1981 Y 30JUN 2 LHRCDG DK2 0640 0900 30JUN E 0 321 B
SEE RTSVC
3 APH 07 123 123 PARIS
* RR 18MAY/AGSU/NCE1A0950-3J8LR9
The original PNR is ignored and the itinerary and passenger information is
copied. A new line is added to the PNR, showing:
• The PNR was copied from another PNR (* RR)
• The date the PNR was copied (18MAY)
• The agent's initials and duty code (AGSU)
• The office ID of the office that copied the PNR (NCE1A0950)
• The record locator of the original PNR (3J8LR9)
PNR Itinerary
To copy only the itinerary information from the PNR, enter:
RRI
System response:
-IGNORED 3J8LR9-
RP/NCE1A0950/
1 AF1080 Y 20JUN 6 CDGLHR DK2 0730 0750 20JUN E 0 321 B
SEE RTSVC
2 AF1981 Y 30JUN 2 LHRCDG DK2 0640 0900 30JUN E 0 321 B
SEE RTSVC
Passenger Information
To copy only the PNR's passenger information, enter:
RRP
System response:
-IGNORED 3J8LR9-
RP/NCE1A0950/
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR 2.BARCLAY/ANN MS
3 APH 07 123 123 PARIS
Chapter 3 Passenger Name Records
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 121
Splitting PNRs
Here you will find information about how to split PNRs.
What Is a PNR Split?
You split a PNR when you wish to rebook a separate itinerary for one or more
passengers. This is because all passengers in a PNR must have identical flight
itineraries.
When you split a PNR, you create two separate PNRs: the original, or parent
PNR, and the associate PNR that will contain the new itinerary.
For more information, see HE SPLIT.
How to Split a PNR
Here is an example of a PNR:
RP/NCE1A0950/NCE1A0950 AG/SU 18MAY09/1219Z 3J8LR9
NCE1A0950/0022AG/18MAY09
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR 2.BARCLAY/ANN MS
3 AF1080 Y 20JUN 6 CDGLHR HK2 0730 0750 20JUN E AF/
4 AF1981 Y 30JUN 2 LHRCDG HK2 0640 0900 30JUN E AF/
5 APH 07 123 123 PARIS
6 TK TL15JUN/NCE1A0950
In this PNR, the itineraries for both passengers are identical. However, Ann
Barclay must make a change to her itinerary. Therefore, you must split the PNR
since the itineraries will no longer be the same.
To split the PNR:
1. Separate the passengers.
SP 2
SP Split PNR transaction code
2 Passenger number
The system displays the new PNR for the passenger.
-ASSOCIATE PNR-
RP/NCE1A0950/NCE1A0950 AG/SU 18MAY09/1219Z XXXXXX
1.BARCLAY/ANN MS
2 AF1080 Y 20JUN 6 CDGLHR HK1 0730 0750 20JUN E AF/
3 AF1981 Y 30JUN 2 LHRCDG HK1 0640 0900 30JUN E AF/
4 APH 07 123 123 PARIS
5 TK TL15JUN/NCE1A0950
* SP 18MAY/AGSU/NCE1A0950-3J8LR9
There is an SP line at the bottom of the PNR showing the split transaction and
who completed it. However, note that there is not yet a record locator for this
PNR (XXXXXX).
2. Add a received from element.
RF PAX
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
122 Edition 3.1
3. End and file the new PNR.
EF
The system displays the parent PNR and shows the new record locator for
the associated PNR in the SP line. This PNR is active.
-PARENT PNR-
RP/NCE1A0950/NCE1A0950 AG/SU 18MAY09/1219Z 3J8LR9
NCE1A0950/0022AG/18MAY09
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR
2 AF1080 Y 20JUN 6 CDGLHR HK1 0730 0750 20JUN E AF/
3 AF1981 Y 30JUN 2 LHRCDG HK1 0640 0900 30JUN E AF/
4 APH 07 123 123 PARIS
5 TK TL15JUN/NCE1A0950
* SP 18MAY/AGSU/NCE1A0950-3KSPBK
4. Add a received from element.
RF PAX
5. End the transaction to make sure the split is recorded in the system for both
PNRs.
ET
The system displays an end of transaction message, as well as the record
locators of both PNRs. The split PNR is designated by SP-.
END OF TRANSACTION COMPLETE - 3J8LR9 SP-3KSPBK
After you have split the PNRs, you can retrieve them using their record locators
and make any other changes that are required.
Handling Non-Homogeneous PNRs
Here you will find information about non-homogeneous PNRs and how to handle
them.
What Is a Non-homogeneous PNR Condition?
A non-homogeneous condition occurs in a PNR when:
• The number of seats in an air segment is not equal to the number of
passenger names.
• The number of seats booked within the air segments is not equal.
The system automatically appends the *** NHP *** tag to the top of the PNR.
You must passenger-associate the segments that create the non-homogeneous
condition. If you attempt to end the transaction without passenger association, the
system displays the warning message:
NEED PASSENGER ASSOCIATION
A non-homogeneous condition can be created intentionally to accommodate
passengers who do not wish to share the entire itinerary. For example, a family
may be booked to travel together on an outbound flight, but decide to return on
different flights. When the reservations are made for different return journeys, the
PNR enters a non-homogeneous condition.
Chapter 3 Passenger Name Records
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 123
At end of transaction, the system splits the original PNR and creates a separate
PNR for each passenger or party that shares the same itinerary. Details of these
PNRs are displayed by the system as an associated cross reference or AXR
record at end of transaction.
For more information, see HE NHP.
How to Handle a Non-homogeneous Condition
This example shows a PNR with a non-homogeneous condition where the
number of seats booked in the air segments is not equal.
Here is the PNR itinerary with different numbers of seats on each segment:
*** NHP ***
RP/NCE1A0950/
1 LH5074 Y 13JUN 6 DUSZRH DK4 1015 1125 13JUN E 0 733 R
2 LH5075 Y 17JUN 3 ZRHDUS DK3 1225 1345 17JUN E 0 AR1 R
To handle the non-homogenous condition:
1. Add names to the PNR.
NM3BARCLAY/ADAM MR/ANN MS/JOEY 1BLACK/ANDREW MR
System response:
*** NHP ***
RP/NCE1A0950/
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR 2.BARCLAY/ANN MS 3.BARCLAY/JOEY
4.BLACK/ANDREW MR
5 LH5074 Y 13JUN 6 DUSZRH DK4 1015 1125 13JUN E 0 733 R
6 LH5075 Y 17JUN 3 ZRHDUS DK3 1225 1345 17JUN E 0 AR1 R
2. Associate the passengers to the flight segments.
In this example, the Barclays will take the return flight from Zurich and Mr.
Black will not.
6 /P1-3
System response:
*** NHP ***
RP/NCE1A0950/
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR 2.BARCLAY/ANN MS 3.BARCLAY/JOEY
4.BLACK/ANDREW MR
5 LH5074 Y 13JUN 6 DUSZRH DK4 1015 1125 13JUN E 0 733 R
6 LH5075 Y 17JUN 3 ZRHDUS DK3 1225 1345 17JUN E 0 AR1 R
/P1-3
3. Add the remaining PNR mandatory elements.
APH- 07 123 123
TKTL 10 JUN
RF PAX
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
124 Edition 3.1
4. End the transaction.
ER
The list of associated PNRs is displayed:
AXR FOR PNR: ***NHP*** 18MAY 1640
1.BARCLAY/ADAM- 3 3MKR7I 2.BARCLAY/ANN - 3 3MKR7I
3.BARCLAY/JOEY 3 3MKR7I 4.BLACK/ANDREW- 1 3MKR7J
The system splits the PNR and creates a separate PNR for each passenger
or party sharing the same itinerary. The details of each PNR are available as
an associated cross reference (AXR) to the other PNRs.
5. View one of the cross-referenced PNRs.
RT 4
The system displays the details of the PNR for Mr. Black:
--- AXR ---
RP/NCE1A0950/NCE1A0950 AG/SU 18MAY09/1440Z 3MKR7J
NCE1A0950/0022AG/18MAY09
1.BLACK/ANDREW MR
2 LH5074 Y 13JUN 6 DUSZRH HK1 1015 1125 13JUN E LH/3MKR7J
3 APH 07 123 123
4 TK TL10JUN/NCE1A0950
* SP 18MAY/AGSU/NCE1A0950-NHP PROC
The SP line shows that this PNR was split from another PNR.
6. Retrieve the cross-referenced PNRs.
RT AXR
The system redisplays the list of associated PNRs:
AXR FOR PNR: 3MKR7J 18MAY 1651
1.BARCLAY/ADAM- 3 3MKR7I 2.BARCLAY/ANN - 3 3MKR7I
3.BARCLAY/JOEY 3 3MKR7I 4.BLACK/ANDREW- 1 *
Printing a PNR
You can print a PNR or a PNR screen on:
• Your default printer
• Another printer in your office
• A printer in another Amadeus office
• Any airline printer where printers are defined in the Amadeus PSDB database
• Any printer with a printer mnemonic, where queue-to-queue destination
addresses are used to send the print results
• Any airline printer for which you know the seven-character IATA teletype
address
For more information, see HE PNR PRINT.
Chapter 3 Passenger Name Records
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 125
System Print Messages
When the system has sent the PNR to the printer, it displays one of the following
messages:
• SENT
This indicates that the printer address has been validated and the print
request has been sent for processing.
• SENT TO SYSTEM FOR PRINTING
This message indicates that the network ID is not validated in the Amadeus
PDSB database. The print request has been sent for queue-to-queue
processing, without validating the printer address.
All restrictions that normally apply to PNR retrieval also apply to printing.
How to Print a PNR
To print an existing PNR on your default printer, enter the print transaction code
followed by either an A (all) or S (screen), and the retrieval entry. The PNR is sent
directly to the printer.
To print the entire PNR currently open on your screen, enter:
WRA /RT
To print only the currently displayed screen, enter:
WRS /RT
For additional information, see HE WRA.
Printing Options
The table below shows some options you can use with your PNR print request:
Table: PNR Print Options
Option Sample Entry Description
/RT WRA /RT Prints the current PNR
/RT (recloc) WRA /RT CIJBI1 Prints a specific PNR, indicated by the
record locator
/RH WRA /RH Prints the PNR history for the current PNR
/RPP WRA /RPP CIJBI1 Prints a purged PNR
See Purged PNRs on page 111
For more printing options and details, see HE PNR PRINT.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
126 Edition 3.1
How to Print a PNR on a Printer at Another Office
You can print a PNR to a printer at another office if you know the office ID of the
target office.
To print the entire PNR CIJBI1 to another office, enter:
WRAO MADIB2743 /RT CIJBI1
WRAO Print PNR to another office transaction code
MADIB2743 Target office ID
/RT Slash, print PNR option
CIJBI1 Record locator
Displaying PNR History
Every PNR that is created in the distribution system has associated historical
information, which is a record of the creation of the PNR and any additions,
modifications, cancellations, and deletions that are subsequently made to it. The
PNR history is updated at each end of transaction entry.
Each time a modification is made, the modified data is stored in PNR history. For
each modification, history records the office identification, agent sign, duty code,
and the date and time of the modification.
If you retrieve a PNR but do not modify it, there are no entries made in the PNR
history.
If the modification is made using remote office logging, the IATA and office ID for
both the originating and the emulated branch are included.
When working in the system, you can display both full and partial PNR history:
• Full PNR history - displays all transactions associated with the PNR
See How to Display Full PNR History on page 128.
• Partial PNR history - displays specific transactions associated with the PNR
See How to Display Partial PNR History on page 128.
For more information on PNR history, see HE RH.
Chapter 3 Passenger Name Records
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 127
Sample PNR History
The PNR header line appears at the top of the history. Subsequently, each
activity in the PNR is listed as a numbered element.
The number for each element indicates when that activity was performed.
Activities that are associated with the creation of a PNR are numbered 000,
activities from the first modification of the PNR are numbered 001, from the
second modification 002, and so on. Each modification and set of modifications is
called a step.
Here is a sample of a PNR history display:
n 000 ON/BLAKE S/MS JACKSON M/MR STOYLE D/MR
000 OS/LH 401 F 20SEP 5 JFKFRA LK3 530P 715A+1/NN *1A/E*
000 OS/CAR SK NN1 FRA 20SEP-21SEP ECAR/CF-/NN
000 RF-PAX CR-MUC1A0701 SU 0001AA 28FEB/1009Z
o 001/003 CS/NW1799M 10DEC 4 MIADEN HK4 1315 1705/KK
n Original entries in the PNR, indicated by the sequence number 000
o Modifications to the PNR, indicated by the other sequence numbers 001/003
PNR Creation in History
At end of transaction during PNR creation, the following elements are added to
PNR history under step number 000: original names, air segments, auxiliary
segments, OSI and SSR elements, option elements, received from reference,
and a communications reference.
Note: Any other PNR element created before the first end of transaction will
not appear in PNR history step 000.
000 ON/BLAKE S/MS JACKSON M/MR STOYLE D/MR
000 OS/LH 401 F 20SEP 5 JFKFRA LK3 530P 715A+1/NN *1A/E*
000 OS/CAR SK NN1 FRA 20SEP-21SEP ECAR/CF-/NN
000 RF-PAX CR-MUC1A0701 SU 0001AA 28FEB/1009Z
In addition to the step number, each element in history is marked with a two-letter
code, indicating the type of change that was made:
• ON is the code for Original Names. These are the names that were entered
when the PNR was created.
• OS is the code for Original Segments. These are the segments that were
entered when the PNR was created.
• RF is the code for Received From. RF is followed by the name entered by the
agent in the RF entry, the office ID, sign, date and time.
PNR Modifications in History
When an element is modified, cancelled or deleted, it appears in history with two
numbers. Here is an example:
001/003 CS/NW1799M 10DEC 4 MIADEN HK4 1315 1705/KK
The first number (001) indicates the stage at which the item was originally entered
in the PNR. The second number (003) indicates when the modification,
cancellation or deletion was made.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
128 Edition 3.1
How to Display Full PNR History
To display the entire history of the current PNR, without queue history, enter:
RH
How to Display Partial PNR History
You can limit the history of the PNR to display only the types of history elements
you want to see. You do this by adding PNR history codes to the end of the basic
PNR history display transaction code.
Note: The received from (RF) element is always displayed in PNR history.
For example, if you want to view only the air segments in the PNR history, enter:
RH A
Here are some options you can use to limit the PNR history display:
Table: PNR History Codes
Entry Displays...
RH099 PNR history by step number
RHI Itinerary segments
RHJ Phone elements (AB, AM, AQ, AP)
RHN Name elements
RHR All remarks: general, confidential and corporate
RHS* Segment number (where * is an active segment
number)
You can also display multiple options in one entry. For example, if you want to
display only the name elements, itinerary segments and remarks, enter:
RHN, I, R
For additional options and more information, see HE PNR, GP COD.
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 129
Chapter 4
Fares and Pricing
Here we give you the basics that you need in order to understand the Fares and
Pricing module in the Amadeus Central System. We include an introduction to
fares and pricing and explain how to read a fare display and an itinerary. We also
provide information on different pricing options.
Before You Start
In order to make the best use of the Fares and Pricing module, you must have a
good understanding of the PNR module. You should understand how to create,
retrieve, and modify a PNR.
Objectives
To meet the objectives of the Fares and Pricing module, you should know how to:
• Request and read a fare display
• Display fare notes for conditions and regulations
• Display the mileage table and other follow-up entries
• Price an itinerary (with and without storing a TST)
• Search for lower fares using Best Pricer (for those offices with access)
• Search for pricing recommendations using Master Pricer Expert
Introduction
Amadeus Fares and Pricing is a computerized air travel pricing system. Its
database stores millions of public and private fares for hundreds of different
providers. It can construct an unlimited number of fares through a dynamic add-
on processing facility.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
130 Edition 3.1
The Amadeus fares and pricing entries allow you to:
• Display fares
• Price an itinerary
• Request fare rules and conditions
• Request currency conversions
• Calculate mileage for a route of city pairs
Fares and Pricing Entries
Amadeus fares and pricing entries are divided into two types of transactions:
• Fare Quote (FQ)
- The Fare Quote transactions display information based on the data
contained in an entry.
- No PNR is required for these entries.
• Itinerary Pricing (FX)
- The Itinerary Pricing transactions price a specific PNR itinerary.
- A PNR must be present when these codes are used, or a PNR is created
as a result of the transaction.
For more information on the sources of fares, see GG ASK FQT FDL.
For more information on fares and pricing, see HE FARES.
Chapter 4 Fares and Pricing
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 131
Working with Fare Displays
Here we describe the types of fare displays and the entries you can use to
customize the display.
What Fares Are Displayed?
Below is an example of an international fare display request from Helsinki to New
York with American Airlines:
FQDHELNYC/AAA
ALSO SEE HELEWR XF MAY APPLY
MORE FARES AVAIL IN USD 3.54XA/4.95XY EXCLUDED
AB AC AF AP AY AZ BA BD CO OTHER TAX MAY APPLY
DE DL EI EK FI GF HP IB KL SURCHG MAY APPLY-CK RULE
S2 TP UA US VS XL 9W /YY*AA
AC AF AK AY AZ A0 CO C6 DL
DY D2 EC FR F9 GX G3 HP HV
ROE 0.712358 UP TO 1.00 EUR
03JUL09**03JUL09/AA HELNYC/NSP;AT/TPM 4108/MPM 4929
LN FARE BASIS OW EUR RT B PEN DATES/DAYS AP MIN MAX R
01 FFFEUOW 3785 7570 F - - - + - - 12M M
02 FFFEUR 6881 F - - - + - - 12M M
03 JFFEUOW 2225 4450 J - - - + - - 12M M
04 IFFEUR 1584 I - - - +42+ - 12M M
05 Y 777 1554 Y - - - + - - - M
06 YFFEUR 1474 Y - - - + - - 12M M
07 YR 1444 Y - - - + - - 12M+M
08 YDG 583 1166 Y - - - + - - - M
09 YDG 505 1010 Y - - - + - - - M
10 HARCEUR 874 H + - - + +SU+ 12M M
11 BARCEUR 864 B + - - + +SU+ 12M M
The fares shown on a fare display fall into one of three main categories:
• YY fares
• Carrier fares
• Contract fares
Note: The fares that appear as a result of your request depend on several
factors, including your office profile, whether you are using an airline
terminal and any geographic sales restrictions that apply.
YY Fares
YY fares are common IATA fares, which are published by the airlines that fly a
particular route. These are typically full-fare, fully-flexible fares that, in theory, can
be changed freely between airlines. YY is used as a generic airline code to
represent these fares.
Only international fare displays show YY fares. If you do not specify an airline in
your fare request, you see the YY fares for all airlines that publish fares on the
requested route.
Note: Not all airlines publish YY fares. Airlines that do publish YY fares may
not publish them for all routes.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
132 Edition 3.1
Carrier Fares
Carrier fares are fares created by an airline for a specific route, but are not YY
fares.
For example, an airline may offer a discounted fare on a non-refundable ticket or
for flights that depart after 1900.
Contract Fares
Contract fares are specific fares that are negotiated between an airline and a
private entity.
For example, an airline may have a contract with a certain company where the
employees of that company receive a discounted fare if they book flights on the
airline.
Fare Display Elements
Here we give a brief overview of each element in a basic fare display.
For more detailed information on the fare display, see HE FARES, GP DIS.
Fare Display Request
FQDHELNYC/AAA
This line shows the entry you made for your fare display request.
Airlines Publishing Fares and Taxes/Surcharge Messages
ALSO SEE HELEWR XF MAY APPLY
MORE FARES AVAIL IN USD 3.54XA/4.95XY EXCLUDED
AB AC AF AP AY AZ BA BD CO OTHER TAX MAY APPLY
DE DL EI EK FI GF HP IB KL SURCHG MAY APPLY-CK RULE
S2 TP UA US VS XL 9W /YY*AA
AC AF AK AY AZ A0 CO C6 DL
DY D2 EC FR F9 GX G3 HP HV
This section shows the airline codes for the airlines that have published fares for
this city pair.
Airlines displayed before the /YY* have published YY fares for this city pair.
Airlines displayed after the /YY* do not participate in the YY fares for this city
pair. However, they do publish fares for this route.
This section also shows any tax and surcharge information that applies to the
published fares, as well as any airline ticketing fees that are applicable.
Rate of Exchange and Currency
ROE 0.712358 UP TO 1.00 EUR
This line shows the rate of exchange (ROE) and the currency.
If nothing is specified, the system defaults to the currency of the origin city.
Mileage and Routing
03JUL09**03JUL09/AA HELNYC/NSP;AT/TPM 4108/MPM 4929
Chapter 4 Fares and Pricing
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 133
The following table lists and explains the items in the line above:
Table: Mileage and Routing
Item Description
03JUL09**03JUL09 Current date
/AA Fares for the requested airline
If you do not specify an airline, this appears as /YY.
HELNYC City pair
/NSP Normal and special fares
• NLX - normal and excursion fares
• CNX - companion, normal and excursion fares
;AT Fares based on a specific global routing indicator
/TPM 4108 Ticketed point mileage
This is the actual published mileage for the route.
/MPM 4929 Maximum permitted mileage
This is the maximum number of miles you can travel on
this route on this fare to avoid extra charges.
Fares
LN FARE BASIS OW EUR RT B PEN DATES/DAYS AP MIN MAX R
01 FFFEUOW 3785 7570 F - - - + - - 12M M
02 FFFEUR 6881 F - - - + - - 12M M
03 JFFEUOW 2225 4450 J - - - + - - 12M M
04 IFFEUR 1584 I - - - +42+ - 12M M
05 Y 777 1554 Y - - - + - - - M
06 YFFEUR 1474 Y - - - + - - 12M M
07 YR 1444 Y - - - + - - 12M+M
08 YDG 583 1166 Y - - - + - - - M
09 YDG 505 1010 Y - - - + - - - M
10 HARCEUR 874 H + - - + +SU+ 12M M
11 BARCEUR 864 B + - - + +SU+ 12M M
This section shows the fares for the requested city pair and airline. The fares are
sorted from highest to lowest by default. The following table explains the items in
each column:
Table: Fares
Column Description
LN Line number
FARE BASIS Fare basis
The fare basis code can give you information about the type of fare,
type of passenger, class of travel, minimum and maximum stay,
reservation restrictions, seasonality, and days of travel.
OW One-way fare amount
EUR Currency code
RT Round trip fare amount
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
134 Edition 3.1
Column Description
B Booking class (Reservation Booking Designator)
Note: A plus sign (+) indicates that more than one booking
class applies. Use FQS to obtain more information.
PEN Penalty information.
Note: To see more penalty information, use FQN to check the
fare note/rule. For fares in markets that are not
automated, this is always a plus sign (+).
DATES/DAYS The display contains up to two lines of date /days restrictions.
AP Advance purchase requirements
MIN Minimum stay restrictions
MAX Maximum stay restrictions
R Routing information.
If you see a + sign in the routing column, use FQR to see further
information related to routing.
Types of Fare Displays
There are many different types of fare displays, depending upon the options you
add to your fare request entry.
Here we describe three types of fare displays:
• International - for a city pair in two different countries
• Domestic - for a city pair in the same country
Domestic displays do not show YY fares.
• Shopper - to display the fares sorted from lowest to highest for a round trip
By default, shopper displays show only airlines participating in Amadeus
fares.
For more information, see What Fares Are Displayed? on page 131.
How to Request an International Fare Display
To request a fare display for a city pair in two different countries, enter:
FQD HELNYC
FQD Fare display request transaction code
HELNYC City pair
Chapter 4 Fares and Pricing
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 135
System response:
FQD HELNYC
AA AB AC AF AP AY AZ BA BD XF MAY APPLY
CO DE DL EI EK FI GF HP IB 3.54XA/4.95XY EXCLUDED
KL KU LA LH LO LP LT LX MH OTHER TAX MAY APPLY
MP NW NZ OK OS QR SK SN SQ SURCHG MAY APPLY-CK RULE
SV S2 TP UA US VS XL 9W /YY*
AA AC AF AK AY AZ A0 CO C6
DL DY D2 EC FR F9 GX G3 HP
ROE 0.712358 UP TO 1.00 EUR
01JUL09**01JUL09/YY HELNYC/NSP;AT/TPM 4108/MPM 4929
LN FARE BASIS OW EUR RT B PEN DATES/DAYS AP MIN MAX R
01 FIF 5531 + - - - - - - M
02 FIF 7374 + - - - - - - M
03 CIF 3248 + - - - - - - M
04 YIF 2261 + - - - - - - M
05 CIF 4330 + - - - - - - M
06 YIF 3014 + - - - - - - M
01JUL09**01JUL09/YY HELEWR/NSP;AT/TPM 4108/MPM 4929
07 FIF 5531 + - - - - - - M
08 FIF 7374 + - - - - - - M
09 CIF 3248 + - - - - - - M
10 YIF 2261 + - - - - - - M
11 CIF 4330 + - - - - - - M
12 YIF 3014 + - - - - - - M
The system displays:
• Common fares (YY), if these exist.
• A list of airlines that have fares for this route if no YY fares exist.
• Your owner airline fares if your terminal is configured as an airline terminal,
followed by the YY fares, if these exist.
If nothing is specified, the system defaults to the current date and the currency of
the origin city.
If the origin city and your terminal location are the same, you do not have to
include the origin city in your entry. For the example above, if your terminal is
located in Helsinki, enter:
FQD NYC
How to Request a Domestic Fare Display
If you request a domestic fare display using only a city pair, for example San
Francisco (SFO) to New York (JFK), the system displays the following screen:
FQDSFOJFK
NO YY FARES
AA AS B6 CO DH DL FL F9 HA
HP NK NW SY TZ UA US VX WN
YX
Because this is a domestic route, no YY fares are displayed. In order to see the
fares for a domestic route, you must specify an airline in your request.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
136 Edition 3.1
To request a domestic fare display, enter the fare display request and specify an
airline with the /A option:
FQD SFOJFK /AUA
FQD Fare display request transaction code
SFOJFK City pair
/AUA Slash, airline option code, airline code
System response:
FQDSFOJFK/AUA
ALSO SEE SFOEWR XF MAY APPLY
AA AS B6 CO DH DL FL F9 HA ZP EXCLUDED
HP NK NW SY TZ US VX WN YX SURCHG MAY APPLY-CK RULE
03JUL09**03JUL09/UA SFONYC/NSP
LN FARE BASIS USD PEN DATES DAYS AP MIN MAX RTG
01 F 2849.30 - - - - - - - 35
02 FPS 2454.88 - - - + - - - - 35
03 FPSN 2454.88 NRF - - - + - - 35
07 FUA2FSN 2040.00 NRF - - + - + - - 35
15 BUA 1288.37 - - - + - - - - 35
16 HUAUPN 1287.44 NRF - - + - + - - 35
17 ZUAXN 1287.44 NRF - - - + - - 35
18 HUA7UPN 1101.40 NRF - - + - 7+ - - 35
21 ZUA14NX 1008.37 NRF - - - 14+ - - 35
23 EA0GY 557.21 - - - - + - - 35
24 KHVUSA 522.01 + S - B31DEC+ - - - 60 35
F31MAR -
25 UA0GN 464.19 NRF - - - + - - 35
26 KCHVUSA 444.00 + S - B31DEC+ - - - 60 35
F31MAR -
27 HA0GN 371.16 NRF - - - + - - 35
28 VA7GN 222.33 NRF - - - 7+ - - 35
30 SA10GN 175.81 NRF - - - 10+ - - 35
31 SA14GN 157.21 NRF - - - 14+ - - 35
32 SAG10GN 147.91 NRF F14AUG - X57 10+ - - 35
33 SA1N1 138.60 NRF F04JUL - + - 1+ - - 35
34 SAK14GN 138.60 NRF F14AUG - 236 14+ - - 35
35 TA14GN 129.30 NRF F14AUG - - 14+ - - 35
35 ABE ALB ATL AUS BDL BIL BOI BOS BUF BUR CAK CHI CID CLE CLT
CMH COS CRW DAY DEN DFW DSM DTT EUG EWR FAT GEG GSO HAR HFD
HOU ICT IND LAS LAX LNK MIA MKC MKE MLI MSN MSP MSY OAK OKC
OMA ONT ORF ORL PDX PHF PHL PHX PIT RDU RIC RNO ROA ROC SAN
SAT SBA SEA SJC SLC SMF SNA STL SYR TPA TUL TUS WAS
The domestic airline-specific display sorts the fares from highest to lowest, with
the possible routing cities displayed at the bottom of the page.
Note: A US and Canadian display does not include the global indicator, the
MPM (Maximum Permitted Mileage) or TPM (Ticketed Point Mileage).
The fares are based on routings.
How to Request a Shopper Display
If the passenger is looking for the lowest fare for a round trip, you can use the
shopper display by adding the option /S after the FQD entry. The shopper fare
display sorts the fares from lowest to highest.
Chapter 4 Fares and Pricing
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 137
Note: Countries in North America, Central America and the Caribbean use the
Shopper display by default and do not need the /S added to the FQD
entry.
To request a shopper display, enter:
FQD OSLNYC /S
FQD Fare display request transaction code
OSLNYC City pair
/S Slash, shopper display option code
System response:
FQDOSLNYC/S
ALSO SEE OSLEWR TRFNYC TRFEWR XF MAY APPLY
MORE FARES AVAIL IN USD 47XY/16XA EXCLUDED
YY* AA AC AF AZ BA DL FF HE OTHER TAX MAY APPLY
KL LH MP NW OS RV SK SN SR OB FEES INCLUDED
ROE 7.42840 UP TO 5.00 NOK SURCHG MAY APPLY-CK RULE
20AUG0x**20AUG0x/OSLNYC/NSP;AT/TPM 3671/MPM 4405
LN FARE BASIS OW NOK RT PEN DATES DAYS AP MIN MAX AL R
01 HLZZEU 2200 4400 NRF - - - - 12M AF M
02 HJZZEU 2300 4600 NRF - - - - 12M AF M
03 HHAN3 4700 NRF S15SEP - - SU+ 3M+US M
04 HKZZEU 2450 4900 NRF - - - - 12M AF M
05 QHXSAPU 5500 NRF S31AUG X67+ 7 7+ 3M+CP M
06 MHXAPW 5550 NRF S31AUG 1234+ 7 7+ +US M
07 VHZ1 2835 5670 - S - - + - 12M+AA M
08 VHZNOW 2850 5700 - S - - + - - TW R
09 QHZZOW 2850 NRF - - + - - BA R
10 HHAB 5700 NRF S14SEP - 7 7+ 1M AF M
> PAGE 1/ +
This display includes an airline column that lists only airlines that participate in
Amadeus and shows the owner of the fare.
When a large number of fares exist for a city pair, the system does not show the
total number of screens until you have scrolled down to the end of the fare
display. The system only shows the current page number and the plus (+) sign.
Note: Special fare information does not appear in an international shopper
display.
Fare Display Options
You can add options to customize your fare display request entry.
The following table shows some commonly used options:
Table: Fare Display Options
Entry Explanation
FQD PARVIE /AAF Specific airline fares, followed by YY fares, if
the airline participates in the YY fares
FQD PARVIE /A-AF Specific airline fares only (no YY fares)
FQD NYCLON /ACO /KF Specific cabin fares
FQD NYCLON /ACO /CJ Specific booking code
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
138 Edition 3.1
Entry Explanation
FQD PARNYC /AAF /D1SEP Specific future date
It is optional to include the D when you are
requesting a date starting with a number.
FQD PARNYC /AAF /D1SEP08 Specific past date
It is possible to display fares in the past up
to two years.
FQD PARNYC /AAF /D1SEP* Exact outbound travel date.
FQD PARNYC /AAF /D1SEP*10SEP Exact outbound and inbound travel dates.
FQD PARNYC /AAF /D1SEP**10SEP A range of travel start dates.
FQD PARNYC/AAF /DSEP Three-month period, starting from
September 1.
FQD STORIO /ALH /R, *NPE-NAP-RF Expanded parameter codes
You can include up to three expanded
parameter codes.
FQD NYCYYZ /R, FS-NZD Requests fares in NZD.
Only valid if fares are filed in another
currency.
FQD PARVIE /R, NUC Fares in NUCs
FQD LONPAR /R, AT All taxes
FQD NYCLON /R, U Unifares for a city pair
FQD NYCLON /R, UP Unifares and published fares
FQD NYCLON /R, U364477 Unifares for a corporate contract
FQD FRAMNL /IO One-way fares
FQD FRAMNL /IR Round-trip fares
FQD SYDSYD /AQF /VRW Global routing for round-the-world fares
(RW)
FQD PARNYC /AAF /R,-PXA-ZZ Fare request type codes
You can include a maximum of three
request types.
How to Display Fare Request Type Codes
You can include fare type and passenger type codes in your FQD entry to narrow
your search.
To display a list of all the different fare type codes, enter:
HE FARE REQ
To display a list of all known and existing fare request type and passenger type
codes, enter:
FQL*
You can request up to three fare request type codes in one fare display request
entry. For example:
FQD STONYC /R, -PEX -ZZ -EX
Chapter 4 Fares and Pricing
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 139
How to Combine Fare Display Options
You can combine one or more fare display options in a single entry. Each option
must be separated by a slash.
To combine fare display options, enter:
FQD JKTBKK /AQF /R, FS-USD, -GT
You can enter the options in any order, provided that you follow these two basic
points:
• FQD must be entered first.
• The city pair is entered immediately after FQD.
The following entries return an identical system response:
FQD NCENYC /CS /R, AT /AAF
FQD NCENYC /AAF /R, AT /CS
FQD NCENYC /AAF /CS /R, AT
How to Change the Current Fare Display
You can change the current fare display using the FQD C entry.
The table below shows some examples of commonly used fare display change
entries:
Table: Fare Display Change Entries
Entry Description
FQD C /A AF Change airline
FQD C /CB Change booking code
FQD C /DSEP Change date
FQD C MUC Change destination city
For more options, see HE FQDC
Displaying Fare Notes
Fare notes (also referred to as fare rules) contain the conditions and regulations
applicable to a specific fare. Fare notes have a maximum of nine versions, each
with a specific effective and discontinue date.
When you request fare notes by line number, the system displays the note based
on the dates in the fare display. If you require a note for a past date, you must
request a fare display for the past date, and then request the note for the fare
based on the line number.
Airline ticketing fees, also called OB fees, are included in the fare displayed.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
140 Edition 3.1
How to Display Fare Notes
To display a fare note, enter the transaction code for the specific line number
from the fare display:
FQN 4
This entry requests the fare note for line 4 of the fare display.
System response:
FQN4
** RULES DISPLAY ** TAX MAY APPLY
03JUL09**03JUL09/AF PARLON/NSP;EH/TPM 217/MPM 260
LN FARE BASIS OW EUR RT B PEN DATES/DAYS AP MIN MAX R
21 MSTAYFR 249 M NRF - - + + + 6M R
FCL: MSTAYFR TRF: 21 RULE: 2180 BK: M
PTC: ADT-ADULT FTC: XPB-SUPER/SPCL INST PURCHASE
RU.RULE APPLICATION
AIR FRANCE SPECIAL FARES.
APPLICATION
AREA
THESE FARES APPLY
WITHIN EUROPE.
CLASS OF SERVICE
THESE FARES APPLY FOR ECONOMY CLASS SERVICE.
TYPES OF TRANSPORTATION
FARES ONLY APPLY IF PURCHASED BEFORE DEPARTURE.
CAPACITY LIMITATIONS
THE CARRIER SHALL LIMIT THE NUMBER OF PASSENGERS CARRIED
ON ANY ONE FLIGHT AT FARES GOVERNED BY THIS RULE AND SUCH
FARES WILL NOT NECESSARILY BE AVAILABLE ON ALL FLIGHTS.
PAGE 1/15
How to Display a List of Applicable Paragraphs or Categories
Each fare note is broken down into several paragraphs, or categories, of
information about the fare.
To see a list of the applicable categories for a fare note, enter:
FQN 4 *L
FQN Fare note display transaction code
4 Line number
*L Asterisk (*), list all categories in the fare note option
Chapter 4 Fares and Pricing
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 141
System response:
FQN4*L
VERIFY OPTION
** RULES DISPLAY ** TAX MAY APPLY
03JUL09**03JUL09/AF PARLON/NSP;EH/TPM 217/MPM 260
LN FARE BASIS OW EUR RT B PEN DATES/DAYS AP MIN MAX R
21 MSTAYFR 249 M NRF - - + + + 6M R
FCL: MSTAYFR TRF: 21 RULE: 2180 BK: M
PTC: ADT-ADULT FTC: XPB-SUPER/SPCL INST PURCHASE
OPTION LIST
RU.RULE APPLICATION MN.MIN STAY
MX.MAX STAY AP.ADVANCE RES/TKT
FL.FLT APPLICATION CD.CHILD DISCOUNTS
TC.TOUR CONDUCTOR AD.AGTS DISCOUNTS
SO.STOPOVERS TF.TRANSFERS/RTGS
TE.TKT ENDORSEMENT PE.PENALTIES
CO.COMBINABILITY HI.HIGHER INTERMEDIATE
POINT
MD.MISCELLANEOUS DATA VC.VOLUNTARY CHANGES
****** SELECT CATEGORIES ******
The available categories are shown in the Option List section of the page.
How to Display a Specific Paragraph in the Fare Note
If you already know the code for a paragraph or category, you can request to
view it directly in order to limit the amount of information the system returns on
the fare note.
In this example, you can request the categories for minimum (MN) and maximum
(MX) stays by entering:
FQN 4 * MN, MX
System response:
FQN21*MN, MX
** RULES DISPLAY ** TAX MAY APPLY
03JUL09**03JUL09/AF PARLON/NSP;EH/TPM 217/MPM 260
LN FARE BASIS OW EUR RT B PEN DATES/DAYS AP MIN MAX R
21 MSTAYFR 249 M NRF - - + + + 6M R
FCL: MSTAYFR TRF: 21 RULE: 2180 BK: M
PTC: ADT-ADULT FTC: XPB-SUPER/SPCL INST PURCHASE
MN.MIN STAY
TRAVEL FROM LAST INTERNATIONAL STOPOVER MUST COMMENCE NO
EARLIER THAN THE FIRST SUN AFTER DEPARTURE OF THE FIRST
INTERNATIONAL SECTOR
OR - TRAVEL FROM LAST INTERNATIONAL STOPOVER MUST COMMENCE
NO EARLIER THAN 3 DAYS AFTER DEPARTURE OF THE FIRST
INTERNATIONAL SECTOR.
MX.MAX STAY
TRAVEL FROM LAST STOPOVER MUST COMMENCE NO LATER THAN 6
MONTHS AFTER DEPARTURE FROM FARE ORIGIN.
PAGE 1/ 1
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
142 Edition 3.1
Depending on your market, if the fare note exceeds 20 pages in length, the
system either displays an index with the applicable paragraphs for you to select
from, or a message saying:
MAX DATA EXCEEDED, RQST BY INDIVIDUAL RULE CODE
If this happens, display the categories individually, or a few at a time.
Working with Follow-up Transactions
Here we explain some of the different follow-up transactions you can perform
related to the fare quote entries; for example, taxes, routing information and
booking codes.
Taxes
Here we describe a follow-up transaction you can use to display the taxes on a
fare.
How to Display the Tax Breakdown
If you have requested a fare display that includes taxes, you can display the
breakdown of the taxes included in the fare amount.
Here is an example of a fare display:
FQDJNBMOW/A-LH/R,-PXA-ZZ,AT
AF AZ BA IB KL KQ OS SA SN ZA/RI TAX INCLUDED
SR /YY*HE MP 2G
ROE 5.07590 UP TO 10.00 ZAR
09JUL0x**09JUL0x/LH JNBMOW/PXA/ZZ;EH/TPM 5682/MPM 6818
LN FARE BASIS OW ZAR RT B PEN DATES/DAYS AP MIN MAX R
01 BHPX6M3 9223.00 B - S23JUN 12JUL+ + - 6M M
02 LHSX9M 5283.00 L NRF S23JUN 12JUL+ + 3 9M M
03 LHSX6M 4983.00 L NRF S23JUN 12JUL+ + 5 6M M
04 GHSX4M 4683.00 G NRF S23JUN 12JUL+ + 7+ 4M M
05 GHSX2M 4383.00 G NRF S23JUN 12JUL+ +10+ 2M R
06 GHZZ1 3933.00 G NRF S23JUN 12JUL+ +14+ 12M M
>
To display the tax breakdown for the fare on line 5, enter:
FQK 5
System response:
FQK5
** RULES DISPLAY ** ZA/RI TAX INCLUDED
09JUL0x**09JUL0x/LH JNBMOW/PXA/ZZ;EH/TPM 5682/MPM 6818
LN FARE BASIS OW ZAR RT B PEN DATES/DAYS AP MIN MAX R
05 GHSX2M 4383.00 G NRF S23JUN 12JUL+ +10+ 2M R
FARE BREAKDOWN/BASIS GHSX2M
BASE TAX TOTAL
ZAR RT 4250.00 133.00 4383.00
The FQK display does not show taxes individually, but shows a breakdown of the
total fare amount including the base fare and the total tax amount.
Chapter 4 Fares and Pricing
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 143
Booking Codes
Here we explain the follow-up transactions you can use when you need to work
with booking codes.
What Is a Booking Code?
A booking code shows the reservation conditions for a fare. Some of these
reservations conditions include:
• The booking code itself (the reservation booking designator)
• Information about the travel class
• Reservation/ticket and airline/flight restrictions
• Booking code exceptions (US/Canada only)
• Mixed and joint classes of service (US/Canada only)
You can request booking code requirements for a specific fare from a fare
display, or after a pricing entry. This can be useful when you are unable to price
successfully, and receive the following system response:
*NO FARES/RBD/CARRIER/PASSENGER TYPE
*ATTN VERIFY BOOKING CLASS SEE FQS
For more information on booking codes, see HE BOOKING CODE.
How to Request the Booking Code
To display the booking code information for the fare on line 10 of a fare display,
enter:
FQS 10
System response:
FQS10
** RULES DISPLAY ** XF MAY APPLY
OB FEES INCLUDED
US/2.56XA/5.79XY EXCLUDED
OTHER TAX MAY APPLY
SURCHG MAY APPLY-CK RULE
10MAY0x**10MAY0x/KL AMSNYC/NSP;AT/TPM 3639/MPM 4366
LN FARE BASIS OW EUR RT B PEN DATES/DAYS AP MIN MAX R
10 SEENL12M 2294 S - - - + - - 12M+M
PRIME BOOKING CODE WHEN NO EXCEPTIONS APPLY
S
The booking code for this fare, S, is displayed at the bottom of the page.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
144 Edition 3.1
How to Request a Specific Booking Code Component
If the booking code display contains multiple fare components, you must select a
specific component.
Here is an example of a list with multiple fare components:
--------------------------------
3 - PSGR P1
;FQS 3-1 ADT NYCDFW AA G26
;FQS 3-2 ADT DFWLAX AA GFS26
;FQS 3-3 ADT LAXDFW AA GFS26
;FQS 3-4 ADT DFWHOU AA HW26
;FQS 3-5 ADT HOUNYC AA Y26
--------------------------------
To display one of the fare components, enter:
FQS 3-3
Routing and Mileage
Here we explain several follow-up transactions that correspond to routing and
mileage on a fare.
IATA has established a maximum permitted mileage (MPM) between any two
cities in the world. Mileage fares allow a passenger to make a small deviation
from a straight line in an itinerary, at no extra cost, or a greater deviation at a cost
based on the MPM fare amount; that is, no more than 25% over the MPM.
What Is Routing?
On the right side of a fare display, there is a column with the letter 'R' (Routing).
This column can contain one of two indicators:
• M - Mileage fares (also called constructed fares)
With constructed fares, you are limited by an amount of mileage. For more
information on mileage fares, see HE FQM.
• R - Routing fares (also called specified fares).
With specified fares, a routing is applied which indicates exactly via which
intermediate points travel is permitted.
How to Check the Routing Information
To request routing information for a specific fare, enter the transaction code
followed by the fare line number:
FQR 2
System response:
06JUL09**06JUL09/LH LONMUC/NSP;EH/TPM 575/MPM 690
LN FARE BASIS OW GBP RT B PEN DATES/DAYS AP MIN MAX R
06 DFLEX11 578 D - - - + 3+ 2+ - R
ADDON SPECIFIED LH8812 ADDON EFF19JUN09
1 * LON-CGN/DUS/HAM/FRA/STR-MUC
2 * LON-MUC
Chapter 4 Fares and Pricing
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 145
There are two routing options for this fare, shown at the bottom of the display.
How to Read a Routing String
A routing string can contain:
• A city code
• An airline code
• A flight number
A dash (-) in a routing string means that travel can be via the city or airline. A
slash (/) means "or".
Here is an example of a routing string for a fare from LON to MUC on Lufthansa
(LH):
1 * LON-CGN/DUS/HAM/FRA/STR-MUC
2 * LON-MUC
• The routing string on line 1 shows that you can travel from LON to MUC via
any of these cities: CGN, DUS, HAM, FRA or STR, on this fare.
• The routing string on line 2 shows that you can also travel directly from LON
to MUC on this fare.
Travel via the cities listed is not mandatory, unless stated. If no airline code is
included in the routing string, travel must be with the airline that owns the routing
number.
Note: A routing string states where travel is possible. The fare note states
what stopovers are possible.
How to Display Mileage Between a City Pair
You can request the published ticketed point mileage (TPM) versus the maximum
point mileage (MPM), between specific city pairs, for all global routes.
To display the published mileage table for London and Seoul for today's date,
enter:
FQO LONSEL
System response:
FQO LONSEL/10JUL0x
VIA AP MPM 11637 TPM
VIA EH MPM 8940 TPM
VIA TS MPM 8352 TPM 5663
To display the mileage for a specific date, add the date to the entry:
FQO LONSEL /24SEP
FQO Mileage table request transaction code
LONSEL City pair
/24SEP Slash, today's date
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
146 Edition 3.1
Extra Mileage Surcharge
The FRM transaction is a follow-up entry to FQD. It allows you to display the
extra mileage surcharge band for a fare shown on a fare display.
Extra mileage surcharge bands for a fare show how much more the fare costs if
the given mileage on a fare is exceeded. You can exceed the mileage on a fare
up to 25%.
For more information, see HE FRM.
How to Display the Extra Mileage Surcharge Band
Here is an example of a fare quote display (partial system display):
FQDJFKTYO/S
ALSO SEE EWRTYO LGATYO XF MAY APPLY
YY* AA AC AM AZ BA BR CO CP OB FEES INCLUDED
CX DL FF HA HE JL KE LH MP 3.00XA/6XY EXCLUDED
NH NW OZ QF RG RV SQ UA US OTHER TAX MAY APPLY
2G 9B SURCHG MAY APPLY-CK RULE
ROE 1.000000 NEAREST 1.00 USD
05APR0x**05APR0x/JFKTYO/NSP;PA/TPM 6737/MPM 8084
LN FARE BASIS OW USD RT PEN DATES DAYS AP MIN MAX AL R
01 MKXAP 1300 + S01JUL 1234+ 7+ 6+ 6M TG R
02 MKXAP 1300 + S01JUL 1234+ 7+ 6+ 6M TG R
03 MKWAP 1400 + S01JUL 567+ 7+ 6+ 6M TG R
04 MKWAP 1400 + S01JUL 567+ 7+ 6+ 6M TG R
To display the extra mileage surcharge band on line 1, enter:
FRM 1
System response:
FRM1
05APR0x**05APR0x/JFKTYO/NSP;PA/TPM 6737/MPM 8084
LN FARE BASIS OW USD RT PEN DATES DAYS AP MIN MAX AL R
01 MKXAP 1300 + S01JUL 1234+ 7+ 6+ 6M TG R
***FARE AMOUNTS SUBJECT TO FARE CONSTRUCTION CHECKS ***
GI M 5M 10M 15M 20M 25M
MPM PA 8084 8488 8892 9296 9700 10105
BASE 5PCT 10PCT 15PCT 20PCT 25PCT
USD 650 683 715 748 780 813
> PAGE 1/ 1
>
The top part of the display repeats the FQD fare line.
The middle part of the display gives the mileage from origin to destination,
followed by the mileage for each surcharge band.
The lower part of the display gives the base fare from origin to destination,
followed by the amount when a mileage surcharge is applied.
Chapter 4 Fares and Pricing
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 147
Fares and Currency
The FRC entry enables you to convert the fare amounts in a fare display to the
default currency of your terminal, or to another currency that you specify.
The fare conversion is based on the applicable bankers selling rates (BSR).
However, if no BSR is available, the conversion is made into the IATA clearing
house (ICH) amount.
How to Convert a Fare to Another Currency
Here is an example of a fare display:
FQD NYCSFO/AUA
ALSO SEE EWRSFO XF MAY APPLY
AA AS B6 CO DH DL FL F9 HA OB FEES INCLUDED
HP NK NW TZ US VX WN YX ZP EXCLUDED
SURCHG MAY APPLY-CK RULE
07DEC0x**07DEC0x/UA NYCSFO/NSP
LN FARE BASIS USD PEN DATES DAYS AP MIN MAX RTG
01 F 2475.35 - - - - - - - 35
02 FPS 2343.26 - - - + - - - - 35
03 C 1975.81 - - - - - - - 35
04 FUA 1914.42 - - - + - - - - 35
05 HUAUP4D 1541.40 - - - - - - - 35
06 ZUAX 1239.07 - - - + - + - - 35
07 YUA 1238.14 - - - - - - - 35
08 BA3 973.95 - - - - 3+ - - 35
09 ZUA7NX 960.00 NRF - - - 7+ - - 35
10 MBIZX 746.05 - - - - - - - 35
> PAGE 1/ 3
To display the fare on line 1 in the default currency of the terminal (EUR), enter:
FRC 1
System response:
FRC1
** RULES DISPLAY ** XF MAY APPLY
OB FEES INCLUDED
ZP EXCLUDED
SURCHG MAY APPLY-CK RULE
07DEC0x**07DEC0x/UA NYCSFO/NSP
LN FARE BASIS USD PEN DATES DAYS AP MIN MAX RTG
01 F 2475.35 - - - - - - - 35
FARE BREAKDOWN/BASIS F
BASE TAX TOTAL
EUR OW 1680.00 0.00 1680.00
RT 3360.00 0.00 3360.00
**** EQUIVALENT FARE SUBJECT TO FARE CONSTRUCTION CHECKS ***
BSR CONVERSION OF USD TO EUR
BSR USED 1 USD = 0.678679 EUR EFF 05DEC0x
ROUNDING OF FARES UP TO 1.00 EUR
ROUNDING OF OTHER CHARGES TO NEAREST 0.01 EUR
> PAGE 1/ 1
The system repeats the fare line from the fare display. This is followed by the
converted amount and the rates of conversion.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
148 Edition 3.1
You can also convert the fare amount to a currency that you specify in your entry:
Table: Fare Conversion Examples
Entry Description
FRC 7 /GBP Converts the fare on line 7 to GBP
FRC 7 /*GB Converts the fare on line 7 to the currency of country GB
FRC 7 /*LON Converts the fare on line 7 to the currency of city LON
Working with Fare Quote Tools
Here we explain the calculation entries you can perform, such as mileage
calculations, currency conversions and excess baggage charges.
Note: These are standalone transactions and do not need a previous fare
quote display in order for you to use them.
Mileage
The Amadeus mileage transaction compares the calculated ticketing point
mileage (TPM) with the MPM for an itinerary. The system also calculates:
• The cumulative mileage (CUM) to each city en route
• The excess mileage surcharge
• The difference between the CUM and the MPM
• Mileage deductions when extra mileage is applicable
You can include a maximum of 29 cities or 28 segments in the entry, as well as a
date, global route code and adjacent city indicators. The system compares the
ticketed point with the MPM for an itinerary.
How to Calculate Mileage
To request a mileage display from Paris to Singapore, via Stockholm, London,
Delhi and Mumbai, enter:
FQM PAR STO LON DEL BOM SIN
System response:
FQM PAR STO LON DEL BOM SIN
CTY DC TPM CUM MPM DC LVL <HGL >LWL 25M XTRA
PAR 2
STO 2 EH 960 960 1152 EH 0M 192 0 1440 0
LON 2 EH 890 1850 264 EH EXC 0 1520 330 0
DEL 3 EH 4169 6019 5376 EH 15M 163 106 6720 0
BOM 3 EH 708 6727 5436 EH 25M 68 204 6795 0
SIN 3 EH 2437 9164 8322 EH 15M 406 10 10402 0
> PAGE 1/ 1
Chapter 4 Fares and Pricing
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 149
Note: The minimum information required to calculate the mileage for an
itinerary is the FQM transaction code, the origin city, the
stopover/transfer cities, and the destination city.
Here is an explanation of the display:
Table: Mileage Display
Code Explanation
CTY City code and tariff conference area
DC Direction code for TPM
TPM Ticketed point miles between each city pair
CUM The cumulative total of the TPMs from the origin.
MPM Maximum permitted miles from the origin to each city
DC Direction code for MPM
LVL Level, indicates the mileage surcharge (M) applicable when the fare is
broken at that city. The levels can be 5M, 10M, 15M, 20M, and 25M.
Note: When EXC appears, the mileage surcharge is greater than 25%.
<HGL Higher level mileage, indicates the number of miles available before the next
higher surcharge level is reached.
>LWL Lower level mileage, indicates the number of miles over the previous
surcharge level.
25M Indicates the total number of miles the TPM can be increased before the
mileage exceeds the 25% surcharge level. It is equal to the MPM plus a
25% surcharge.
XTRA Extra, indicates the number of extra miles allowed. This amount is subtracted
from the cumulative TPM amount.
This column can also display a negative number. In this case, the MPM
figure is reduced and an asterisk (*) is placed next to the MPM figure.
Note: This applies to domestic segments only.
Currency and Exchange Rates
The Amadeus currency conversion transactions allow you to check exchange
rates and calculate amounts in different currencies. The system converts
amounts based on the rates of exchange for the current date, unless you specify
another date. You can request rates for a past date, for up to 12 months in the
past.
The exchange rates are:
• BSR - Bankers selling rate (the default conversion rate)
• BBR - Bankers buying rate
• ICH - IATA clearing house rate
You can use the currency conversion transaction when you are calculating fares
manually and you need to find the exchange rates between different currencies
and neutral units of construction (NUCs). A NUC is a fictitious currency
established by IATA as a fare calculation tool.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
150 Edition 3.1
How to Display the IATA Rate of Exchange
The IATA rates of exchange transaction allows you to request rates of exchange
between NUCs and a designated currency. You can make a comparison using
either the currency code, the country code or a city code.
The following is the minimum entry to request IATA exchange rates at your
terminal location:
FQA
You can also check the IATA rates of exchange for a country, for a specific date
up to 12 months in the past.
To check the rates of exchange in Thailand on 01 July, for example, enter:
FQA THAILAND /01JUL0X
System response:
FQATHAILAND/01JUL0x
EFF 0xJUL01 *** DISC 30SEP0x
1 NUC 45.261284 THB ROUNDING UP TO 5.00 THB
NUC - NEUTRAL UNIT OF CONSTRUCTION
THB - THAI BAHT
> PAGE 1/ 1
How to Display the Bankers' Selling Rates
To display the current Bankers’ selling rates for USD, enter:
FQB USD
System response:
FQBUSD
LIST OF BSR FOR USD EFF 03APR0x
1 AED = 0.27225 USD
1 AFA = 0.00021 USD
1 ALL = 0.00680 USD
1 ANG = 0.56179 USD
1 AOA = 0.05133 USD
1 ARS = 1.00150 USD
1 AUD = 0.47856 USD
1 AWG = 0.55865 USD
1 BBD = 0.50251 USD
1 BDT = 0.01848 USD
1 BHD = 2.65251 USD
1 BIF = 0.00131 USD
1 BMD = 1.01010 USD
1 BND = 0.55463 USD
1 BOB = 0.15408 USD
1 BRL = 0.46157 USD
1 BSD = 1.01010 USD
1 BTN = 0.02143 USD
1 BWP = 0.18515 USD
> PAGE 1/ 8
The default output is a list of all bank selling rates that exist in the database for
the US dollar (USD).
Chapter 4 Fares and Pricing
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 151
How to Display Fares in a Local Currency
To display fares in a local currency, enter:
FQD L
The system displays the fares in the currency of the city of origin.
How to Convert Currency
To convert another currency into the currency of your terminal location, enter:
FQC 100 SEK
System response:
FQC100SEK
BSR CONVERSION OF SEK TO EUR
EUR 11.00 - ROUNDED AS FARES
EUR 10.75 - ROUNDED AS OTHER CHARGES
EUR 10.75 - AMOUNT TRUNCATED
BSR USED 1 SEK = 0.10751 EUR EFF 02JAN0x
ROUNDING OF FARES UP TO 1.00 EUR
ROUNDING OF OTHER CHARGES TO NEAREST 0.01 EUR
SEK - SWEDISH KRONA
EUR - EURO
> PAGE 1/ 1
The system uses the default conversion rate (BSR) for the Swedish krona (SEK),
unless you indicate another rate.
Note: When you are converting into the currency of your terminal, you do not
have to include your own currency code.
How to Convert Between Two Currencies
You can also convert an amount between two currencies. If you wish to see the
equivalent of 500 U.S. dollars in Turkish lira, enter:
FQC 500 USD/TRL
System response:
FQC500USD/TRL
BSR CONVERSION OF USD TO TRL
TRL 718000000 - ROUNDED AS FARES
TRL 718000000 - ROUNDED AS OTHER CHARGES
TRL 717375000 - AMOUNT TRUNCATED
BSR USED 1 USD = 1434750.000 TRL EFF 15DEC0x
ROUNDING OF FARES UP TO 1000000 TRL
ROUNDING OF OTHER CHARGES UP TO 1000000 TRL
USD - US DOLLAR
TRL - TURKISH LIRA
> PAGE 1/ 1
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
152 Edition 3.1
Excess Baggage
You can request an estimation of the excess baggage charges between two
cities. Charges are normally calculated using a percentage of an airline's highest
economy class fare (this may vary). Each airline decides what it wants to charge.
Note: Displayed charges cannot be guaranteed by Amadeus and cannot be
considered as contractually binding on any carrier.
You can request rates for a specific airline and date. You can also request rates
defined by IATA based on YY fares. The charges are based on a rate per kilo at
the current date. The maximum weight allowed is 999.9k.
Charges are calculated in the currency of the departure city.
How to Request Excess Baggage Charges
To request excess baggage charge rates for 10 kilos, between Zurich and
Singapore, at the current rate, enter:
FQX ZRHSIN /10
System response:
FQX ZRHSIN/28JUL09/10/YY/CHF
RATE /GI/KILOS/ TOTAL /
92.95/EH/ 10.0/ 930/
145.18/TS/ 10.0/ 1452/
> PAGE 1/ 1
Working with Informative Pricing
Here we describe the Informative Pricing tool, including how to make a request
for a fare and some of the options you can use.
What Is Informative Pricing?
The Informative Pricing transaction (FQP) is a fare calculation tool that allows you
to estimate the fare for an itinerary.
This is especially useful at times when you need to find the price for an itinerary,
but you are not yet ready to make a reservation. You must use airport codes,
rather than city codes, in the transaction so that the system can calculate the
appropriate taxes.
You can also add options to your entry; the more specific you are, the easier it is
for the system to target a specific fare.
Informative pricing allows you to calculate discount fares, including cumulative
discounts.
For more information, see HE FQP.
Chapter 4 Fares and Pricing
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 153
Pricing Conditions
The following conditions apply to the Informative Pricing tool:
• You can use FQP for all fares except group fares and air passes.
• FQP is applicable for up to three months in the past for all itineraries and up
to 12 months in the future (which in the distribution system is 361 days).
Pricing Assumptions
If you do not enter any specific options to your entry, the system makes the
following assumptions:
• An adult passenger type.
• The current date for the first segment and an open date for all the other
segments.
• An open booking class. The system displays the lowest possible price for
each class.
• YY fares for travel agencies, and carrier-specific fares for airlines.
• Stopovers at all cities.
Note: You must specify an airline for markets where no YY fares exist.
Pricing with Informative Pricing
Here we describe how to make a fare request using Informative Pricing, its follow-
up entries and the pricing options you can use.
How to Request Informative Pricing
You can request informative pricing on an itinerary by entering the transaction
code, followed by a city pair or several city pairs.
For example, to request informative pricing for an itinerary that includes Charles
de Gaulle Paris (CDG), Kuala Lumpur International Airport (KUL) and Sydney
Airport (SYD), enter:
FQP CDG KUL SYD
System response:
FQPCDGKULSYD
* FARE BASIS * DISC * PTC * FARE<EUR> * MSG *T
01 FIF * * 1 * 10407.10 *RB *Y
02 CIF * * 1 * 6169.10 *RB *Y
03 YIF * * 1 * 4713.10 *RB *Y
> PAGE 1/ 1
The system returns a list of fares for this itinerary.
Here is an explanation of the display:
Table: Informative Pricing Display
Column Description
FARE BASIS The fare basis code
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
154 Edition 3.1
Column Description
DISC Discount code
PTC Passenger type
FARE Fare
MSG Message code
The message column can contain one or more codes.
T Tax indicator
Indicates if tax is included.
How to Use Informative Pricing Follow-Up Entries
Here we describe how to use three of the Informative Pricing follow-up entries.
Display a Ticket Image
To display the ticket image of a fare from an Informative Pricing request, enter:
FQQ 3
System response:
FQQ3
03 YIF * * 1 * 4713.10 *RB *Y
LAST TKT DTE 06JUL09
------------------------------------------------------------
AL FLGT BK T DATE TIME FARE BASIS NVB NVA BG
PAR
KUL YY Y Y 06JUL YIF 20
SYD YY Y Y YIF 20
EUR 4646.00 06JUL09PAR YY KUL YY SYD M6522.00NUC
6522.00END ROE0.712358
EUR 21.47QX XT EUR 7.04FR EUR 10.38FR EUR 10.26MY EUR
EUR 4.00IZ 13.95WY
EUR 41.63XT
EUR 4713.10
> PAGE 2/ 2
Display a Fare Note
To view a fare note from an Informative Pricing display, enter:
FQN 1
Chapter 4 Fares and Pricing
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 155
System response:
FQN1
1 - PTC 1 ADT RULES DISPLAY
FARE COMPONENT 1 ADT PARSYD YY FIF PU 1 N
FCL: FIF TRF:2004 RULE: ESWA BK: F
PTC: ADT-ADULT FTC: FU -FIRST CLASS UNRESTRICTED
RU.RULE APPLICATION
NORMAL FLEX FARES
APPLICATION
AREA
THESE FARES APPLY
BETWEEN EUROPE AND SOUTHWEST PACIFIC.
CLASS OF SERVICE
THESE FARES APPLY FOR FIRST/BUSINESS/ECONOMY CLASS
SERVICE.
TYPES OF TRANSPORTATION
THIS RULE GOVERNS ONE WAY AND ROUND TRIP FARES.
FARES GOVERNED BY THIS RULE CAN BE USED TO CREATE ONE
WAY/ROUND TRIP/CIRCLE TRIP/OPEN JAW JOURNEYS.
OTHER CONDITIONS
VIA EH- WHENEVER ALL SECTORS BETWEEN THE LAST
PAGE 1/ 7
Display a Booking Code
To display the booking code from an Informative Pricing request, enter:
FQS 2
System response:
FQS2
2 - PTC 1 ADT
FARE COMPONENT 1 ADT PARSYD YY CIF PU 1 N
PRIME BOOKING CODE WHEN NO EXCEPTIONS APPLY
C
> PAGE 1/ 1
Display Mileage Information
To display the mileage information, enter:
FQR 3
System response:
ADDON SPECIFIED MPM ADDON EFFDDMMMYY
MILEAGE APPLIES FROM ORIGIN TO DESTINATION
> PAGE 1/ 1
If the fare has more than one component, you can specify for which component
you want to display the mileage information.
To display the second component of the fare on line 3 for example, enter:
FQR 3-2
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
156 Edition 3.1
How to Add Options to the Informative Pricing Request
The following example of a basic entry includes no options, but several city pairs:
FQP LON BOM SYD TYO FRA
You can refine your search by including options in your entry as follows:
• If related to a segment, place the options next to the city codes (between
slashes).
• If related to the whole itinerary, place the options at the end of the entry.
For example:
FQP LON /D14SEP /ABA /CF BOM /AQF /CCSYD /AJL /CC TYO /VTS FRA /M
/RCH ,PAR .MAD
FQP Informative Pricing request transaction code
LON First city of your city pair
/D14SEP Date
/ABA Specific airline
If same airline for all segments, add /O at the end of the FQP
entry
/CF Booking code (RBD)
BOM Last city of your city pair
/VTS Global routing indicator
Via the Trans-Siberian route between TYO and FRA
/M Mirror image
/RCH Reduction code child
,PAR Point of sale
.MAD Point of ticketing
For a complete list of Informative Pricing options and more explanation, see HE
FQP.
Working with Itinerary Pricing
Here we describe how to request pricing for an itinerary.
What Is Itinerary Pricing?
The itinerary pricing transactions allow you to price a PNR.
Depending on which transaction you use, you can choose whether to store the
pricing response in a transitional stored ticket (TST).
There are two main itinerary pricing transactions:
• FXP - Prices an itinerary and stores the response in a TST
• FXX - Prices an itinerary without storing the response in a TST
Chapter 4 Fares and Pricing
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 157
The system prices the itinerary in the currency of the country of origin, and
includes the equivalent amount to be paid when the journey does not originate in
the country where your terminal is located.
You can request fares for selected passengers, or for all passengers in a PNR.
You can also add options to both FXX and FXP pricing transactions. A fare
proposed by the system is valid until you make an end of transaction entry (ET,
ER).
Note: You will be disconnected from the fare server if you are inactive for
more than three minutes. If this happens, you must re-enter a pricing
entry.
Pricing a PNR
Here we describe how to price a PNR.
Here is an example of a PNR that has not yet been priced:
RP/NCE1A0950/NCE1A0950 AG/SU 7JUL09/0926Z 4G25AP
NCE1A0950/0022AG/7JUL09
1.BLACK/ANDREW MR
2 AF 022 Y 18NOV 3 CDGJFK HK1 0825 1035 18NOV E AF/
3 AF 023 Y 25NOV 3 JFKCDG HK1 1650 0600 26NOV E AF/
4 APH 07 543 543 PARIS
5 TK TL15NOV/NCE1A0950
To price the PNR:
1. Display the fares for the itinerary.
FXP
System response:
FXP
* FARE BASIS * DISC * PSGR * FARE<EUR> * MSG *T
01 KEEUS * * P1 * 2913.05 * *Y
02 KHWPXUS+K* * * P1 * 1603.05 * *Y
03 KHWAPUS+K* * * P1 * 1491.05 * *Y
> PAGE 1/ 1
Since several fares apply to this itinerary, the system displays a list of the
fares.
Our terminal is located in France, so the system converts the price from US
dollars into euros if nothing else is specified.
2. Select a fare from the list.
FXT 3
Note: If you are pricing for more than one passenger, you must
passenger-associate your entry.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
158 Edition 3.1
System response:
FXT3
01 BLACK/ANDREW *
------------------------------------------------------------
AL FLGT BK T DATE TIME FARE BASIS NVB NVA BG
LAX
PAR AF 0065 K K 01SEP 1535 KHWAPUS 01SEP01SEP PC
LAX AF 0068 K K 16SEP 1320 KHXAPUS 16SEP16SEP PC
USD 1267.00 01SEP02LAX AF PAR648.50AF LAX618.50NUC
EUR 1423.00 1267.00END ROE1.000000
EUR 8.99QX XT EUR 3.58FR EUR 5.61YC EUR 14.82US EUR
EUR 6.66FR 14.82US EUR 3.48XA EUR 6.73XY EUR 3.36XF
EUR 52.40XT LAX3.00
EUR 1491.05
EUR 10.00 AIRLINE FEES
EUR 1501.05 TOTAL
AIRLINE FEES INCLUDED
RATE USED 1USD=1.12246EUR
TICKETS ARE NON REFUNDABLE AFTER DEPARTURE
ENDOS NON-END/NON-TRANS/AF ONLY
PAYMT NONREF/SAPEX
> PAGE 2/ 2
3. To end the transaction, enter:
ER
The PNR is saved with a TST and the TST indicator appears in the PNR
header line.
--- TST ---
RP/NCE1A0900/NCE1A0900 BE/SU 14JAN0x/1705Z ZSHWF7
1.BLACK/ANDREW MR
2 AF 065 K 01SEP 7 LAXCDG HK1 1435 B 1535 1115+1 *1A/E*
3 AF 068 K 16SEP 1 CDGLAX HK1 1220 2C 1320 1605 *1A/E*
4 APB LAX 1 310 419 2121
5 APH PAR 33 6 4545 36843
6 TK OK14JAN/NCE1A0900
To price the itinerary without creating a TST, enter:
FXX
How to Display a Ticket Image
To display a ticket image from the list of fares displayed, enter the transaction
code followed by the fare line number:
FQQ 2
Chapter 4 Fares and Pricing
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 159
System response:
FQQ2
02 YWEEK * * P1 * 2617.08 * *Y
LAST TKT DTE 18NOV09
------------------------------------------------------------
AL FLGT BK T DATE TIME FARE BASIS NVB NVA BG
PAR
NYC AF 0022 Y Y 18NOV 0825 YWEEK 18NOV18NOV 2P
PAR AF 0023 Y Y 25NOV 1650 YWEEK 25NOV25NOV 2P
EUR 2252.00 18NOV09PAR AF NYC1580.66AF PAR1580.66NUC
3161.32END ROE0.712358
EUR 180.00YQ XT EUR 4.00IZ EUR 7.04FR EUR 10.38FR EUR
EUR 21.47QX 3.89YC EUR 11.39US EUR 11.39US EUR 3.54XA
EUR 61.53XT EUR 4.95XY EUR 1.77AY EUR 3.18XF JFK4.50
EUR 2515.00
EUR 2617.08 TOTAL INCL EUR 102.08 AGENT TKT FEE
FEE PARTIALLY BASED ON VC=AF AND TT=ET
100.00 EUR PENALTY APPLIES
> PAGE 2/ 2
The system displays the ticket image for the selected fare, but does not create a
TST. The system takes into account any discount codes that you included in the
PNR or the pricing entry.
If you have a PNR, the ticket image will include the passenger name.
How to Price with Options
You can add options to your itinerary pricing entry. You add pricing options in the
same way that you add options to a PNR: by adding a slash, followed by the
option codes.
Below are some commonly used options:
Table: Common Pricing Options
Option Entry Description
FXP /P2,3
FXX /P2,3
Passenger association
FXP /S2-4
FXX /S2-4
Segment association
FXP /R CD
FXX /R CD
Passenger discount with the passenger discount code
For IATA discount codes, see HE IAD
For passenger type codes, see HE PTC
FXP /INF
FXX /INF
Infant association
Note: Infants must be specified in the name field of the
responsible adult.
FXP /PAX
FXX /PAX
All passengers (adults and children) except infants
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
160 Edition 3.1
Option Entry Description
FXP /R, VC-XX
FXX /R, VC-XX
Validating carrier (where XX is the airline code)
When you use this option, the system checks the PFC
collection table for the airline you specify in the entry.
The system automatically adds the FV element to the
PNR.
Note: You must issue the ticket on the airline you enter
in this option.
For a complete list of options, see HE FARES, GP OPT.
Pricing Override Options
Pricing override is permitted in all Amadeus markets. However, some airlines
may restrict the use of some override options, or all.
If such an airline is included in the itinerary where you are performing a pricing
override transaction, the following message will be displayed.
* PRICING OVERRIDE NOT ALLOWED BY CARRIER *
The same applies if you want to print a ticket belonging to an airline that is not
reflected in the itinerary, but has restricted use of override functions. The
following message will be displayed:
* PRICING OVERRIDE NOT ALLOWED BY VALIDATING CARRIER *
Note: If you as an agent use pricing override, the TST of your PNR may be
considered manual. It is your responsibility to obtain authorization from
the airline owning the fare or the ticket you are modifying.
For more information on override options, see HE FARES, GP OP2.
How to Price with Override Options
Here we describe some common override options and how to price with them. All
of these options can be used with either the FXP or FXX entries.
Past Date Pricing
Note: This option is only available to authorized users.
The past date pricing option prices an itinerary by using the fare and rules of the
date you include in your entry. Routing and currency conversion are taken from
the current date.
You can use past date pricing for up to two years in the past.
To price a date in the past, enter:
FXP /R, 12AUG08
FXP Itinerary pricing transaction code
/R, Slash, pricing option, comma
12AUG08 Past date
Chapter 4 Fares and Pricing
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 161
System response:
FXP/R,12AUG08
* FARE BASIS * DISC * PTC * FARE<EUR> * MSG *T
01 YRT1 * * 1 * 3571.71 * *Y
02 YWEEK7 * * 1 * 2434.71 * *Y
*1-2*FARE VALID FOR E TICKET ONLY
> PAGE 1/ 1
Fare Basis
You can force pricing or ticketing by fare basis code (FBC), provided that the fare
rule is filed in coded format.
You may want to do this if, for example, the pricing request displays the lowest
fare, but you know that there is a more expensive, less restrictive fare available.
To price a whole itinerary by fare basis code, enter:
FXP /L-YAP
FXP Itinerary pricing transaction code
/L Slash, pricing option
-YAP Dash, fare basis code
Zap Off
Use the zap off option to manually apply a discount to an itinerary or a segment.
The discount is applied in the currency of your terminal. A percentage discount is
always applied to the base fare. The zap off option defaults to either the base fare
or the total fare.
To zap off an amount of the total fare, in this example 20, enter:
TTP /ZO-T20A
To zap off a percentage from the base fare, for example 75%, enter:
FXP/ZO-B75P
The pricing will fail if one or more of the following conditions exists:
• The segments being priced are not on the same carrier and you want to zap
off an amount.
• When discounting an amount of the total fare, there is more than one fare
component and more than one taxation applies.
The following message is displayed:
UNABLE TO DISCOUNT/INTERLINE OR MULTI-TAX
See HE ZAPOFF for more information.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
162 Edition 3.1
Using Amadeus Best Pricer
Here we describe how to use Amadeus Best Pricer to price a PNR with the
lowest available fare for a booked itinerary.
Note: Your ability to access Amadeus Best Pricer depends on your office
profile settings.
What Is Amadeus Best Pricer?
Amadeus Best Pricer checks for lower fares and availability in lower booking
classes, or for lower fares in the same booking class as already booked in the
itinerary.
The system suggests only fares that are applicable to the itinerary and the
passenger type. It also checks the rule conditions, such as advance purchase,
and minimum and maximum stay requirements. Amadeus Best Pricer can
automatically rebook an itinerary in a lower booking class by using the highest
access level for the airline. For more information on Amadeus access levels, see
GG AIR and GP ACC.
Alternatively, the system can inform you of lower fares without rebooking, to
enable you to check if the suggested fare is suitable for the passenger, without
changing the PNR. You can also choose whether or not to store the pricing
response in a TST.
Airline ticketing fees are included in the price. For an explanation on airline
ticketing fees and available options, see HE FARES, GP OBF.
Here are the Amadeus Best Pricer entries:
Table: Amadeus Best Pricer Entries
Entry Explanation
FXB Rebooks to the lowest fare and creates a TST
FXR Rebooks to the lowest fare but does not create a TST
FXA Displays a list of lower fares
FXU Selects a fare after FXA, rebooks, and creates a TST
FXZ Selects a fare after FXA, rebooks, but does not create a TST
FXL Displays the lowest possible fare
Note: The system also informs you about seat availability.
Amadeus Best Pricer with Automatic Rebooking
You can use the Amadeus Best Pricer entries FXB and FXR to automatically
rebook an itinerary in a lower class. FXB creates a TST, while FXR does not.
You can also add options to both FXB and FXR pricing transactions. A fare
proposed by the system is valid until you make an end of transaction entry (ET,
ER).
Chapter 4 Fares and Pricing
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 163
How to Request the Best Price and Automatically Rebook
Here are the basic steps required to request the best available price for a PNR
using the FXB entry.
Here is an example of a PNR that has not been priced:
RP/NCE1A0950/NCE1A0950 AG/SU 9JUL09/1300Z 46GLDV
NCE1A0950/0022AG/9JUL09
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR 2.BARCLAY/ANN MRS 3.BLACK/ANDREW MR
4 AF1080 C 18NOV 3 CDGLHR HK3 0730 0750 18NOV E AF/
5 AF1781 C 25NOV 3 LHRCDG HK3 0735 0950 25NOV E AF/
6 APH 07 123 123 PARIS
7 TK TL15NOV/NCE1A0950
To request the best available price and rebook, enter:
FXB
System response:
FXB
ITINERARY REBOOKED
PASSENGER PTC NP FARE<EUR> TAX PER PSGR
01 BARCLAY/ADAM * ADT 1 659.00 144.77 803.77
02 BARCLAY/ANN M* ADT 1 659.00 144.77 803.77
03 BLACK/ANDRE* ADT 1 659.00 144.77 803.77
TOTALS 3 1977.00 434.31 2411.31
1-3 EUR 2532.39 - TOTAL INC EUR 121.08 AGENT TKT FEE
1-3 LAST TKT DTE 18NOV09
> PAGE 2/ 2
Since there are multiple passengers in this PNR, the system displays the list of
passenger names and the fare details. The message at the top of the display
shows that the itinerary has been rebooked.
To retrieve the PNR, enter:
ER
The TST indicator now appears in the header line of the PNR:
--- TST ---
RP/NCE1A0950/NCE1A0950 AG/SU 9JUL09/1300Z 46GLDV
NCE1A0950/0022AG/9JUL09
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR 2.BARCLAY/ANN MRS 3.BLACK/ANDREW MR
4 AF1080 C 18NOV 3 CDGLHR HK3 0730 0750 18NOV E AF/
5 AF1781 C 25NOV 3 LHRCDG HK3 0735 0950 25NOV E AF/
6 APH 07 123 123 PARIS
7 TK TL15NOV/NCE1A0950
In this example, there was a low fare in the same C class that was booked
originally, so the class did not change during the rebooking.
If you had used the FXR entry, the TST would not have been created. However,
you can use the FQQ follow-up entry with either entry to view the ticket image.
For more information, see How to Display a Ticket Image on page 158.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
164 Edition 3.1
Amadeus Best Pricer with Manual Rebooking
You can use the Amadeus Best Pricer entry FXA to display a list of lower
applicable fares.
If you use the FXA entry, the system displays a list of the lowest available fares
for the booked itinerary. However, it does not create a TST or automatically
rebook the lower fare. You must rebook manually.
You can then choose from this list to make a manual rebooking with the entry
FXU (with TST creation) or FXZ (without TST creation).
How to Display a List of Lower Fares and Rebook
Here is a PNR that has already been priced:
--- TST ---
RP/NCE1A0950/NCE1A0950 AG/SU 9JUL09/1334Z 46HGPK
NCE1A0950/0022AG/9JUL09
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR
2 AF 084 J 18NOV 3 CDGSFO HK1 1040 1320 18NOV E AF/
3 AF 083 J 29NOV 7 SFOCDG HK1 1540 1130 30NOV E AF/
4 APH 07 123 123 PARIS
5 TK TL15NOV/NCE1A0950
1. To display a list of lower available fares, enter:
FXA
System response:
FXA
* FARE BASIS * DISC * PSGR * FARE<EUR> * MSG *T
01 JRT * * P1 * 8986.11 * *Y
02 JRT1 * * P1 * 8986.11 * *Y
03 CRT * * P1 * 8041.79 * *Y
04 CRT1 * * P1 * 8041.79 * *Y
05 IWEEK * * P1 * 4687.79 * *Y
06 ZLOISIR * * P1 * 3469.95 * *Y
*1,3*
*1-6*AGENT TICKETING FEE APPLIES
> PAGE 1/ 1
2. Select the new fare from the list and rebook.
FXU 6
Chapter 4 Fares and Pricing
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 165
System response:
FXU6
06 ZLOISIR * * P1 * 3469.95 *RB *Y
ITINERARY REBOOKED
LAST TKT DTE 21OCT09
------------------------------------------------------------
AL FLGT BK T DATE TIME FARE BASIS NVB NVA BG
PAR
SFO AF 0084 Z *Z 18NOV 1040 ZLOISIR 18NOV18NOV 2P
PAR AF 0083 Z *Z 29NOV 1540 ZLOISIR 29NOV29NOV 2P
EUR 3016.00 18NOV09PAR AF SFO2116.91AF PAR2116.91NUC
4233.82END ROE0.712358
EUR 200.00YQ XT EUR 40.00IZ EUR 7.04FR EUR 10.38FR EUR
EUR 21.47QX 3.92YC EUR 11.48US EUR 11.48US EUR 3.56XA
EUR 97.84XT EUR 4.99XY EUR 1.78AY EUR 3.21XF SFO4.50
EUR 3335.31
EUR 3469.95 TOTAL INCL EUR 134.64 AGENT TKT FEE
FEE PARTIALLY BASED ON VC=AF AND TT=ET
TICKETS ARE NON-REFUNDABLE
ENDOS AF ONLY/SPECIAL FARE
> PAGE 2/ 2
The TST is updated with the new, lower fare and a message appears at the
top of the screen indicating that the itinerary has been rebooked. Notice also
that the booking class is now Z; on the original PNR it was J.
How to Display the Lowest Possible Fare and Indicate the Seat
Availability
You can use the entry FXL to display the lowest possible fare for an itinerary.
The system also advises you about the seat availability for this fare.
Note: There is no follow-up entry to rebook the itinerary with FXL. You must
use either the FXB or FXR entry.
To find the lowest applicable fare for an itinerary, enter:
FXL
System response:
LOWEST PRICE IS AVAILABLE
------------------------------------------------------------
AL FLGT BK T DATE TIME FARE BASIS NVB NVA BG
NCE
LON BA 0341 R *R 15AUG 0735 RNNLONOW 15AUG15AUG 2P
EUR 147.00 15AUG09NCE BA LON206.35NUC206.35END ROE
0.712358
EUR 23.00YQ XT EUR 10.29QX EUR 10.00IZ EUR 3.92FR EUR
EUR 3.00YQ 8.46FR
EUR 32.67XT
EUR 205.67
If the lowest fare is not available, the system displays passenger and fare details
of the lowest fare, but includes the following message at the top of the display:
LOWEST SOLD OUT//TRY WAIT LIST
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
166 Edition 3.1
Amadeus Best Pricer Options
You can add options to your Amadeus Best Pricer entries in the same way that
you add options to a PNR: by adding a slash, followed by the option codes.
How to Add Options
Here we describe two common options: adding passenger discounts and
requesting specific cabins.
For more information and a complete list of options, see HE FARES, GP OPT.
Passenger Discounts
Here is an example of a PNR with multiple passengers that has already been
priced:
--- TST ---
RP/NCE1A0950/NCE1A0950 KO/SU 9JUL09/1302Z 46GLDV
NCE1A0950/0089KO/9JUL09
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR 2.BARCLAY/ANN MRS 3.BLACK/ANDREW MR
4 AF1080 D 18NOV 3 CDGLHR HK3 0730 0750 18NOV E AF/
5 AF1781 D 25NOV 3 LHRCDG HK3 0735 0950 25NOV E AF/
6 APH 07 123 123 PARIS
7 TK TL15NOV/NCE1A0950
If the passenger type codes are not included in the PNR Name field, you can
include then in the Amadeus Best Pricer entry.
In this example, passenger 3 is a child, even though this is not shown in his
Name field. You want to price his ticket with a child discount.
In this case, you must select all passengers in the PNR, even though you only
want to apply a specific discount for a specific passenger.
To price the PNR and create the TST, enter:
FXB /P1-2/PAX //P3/RCH
System response:
FXB/P1-2/PAX//P3/RCH
NO REBOOKING REQUIRED FOR LOWEST AVAILABLE FARE
PASSENGER PTC NP FARE<EUR> TAX PER PSGR
01 BARCLAY/ADAM * ADT 1 659.00 144.77 803.77
02 BARCLAY/ANN M* ADT 1 659.00 144.77 803.77
03 BLACK/ANDRE* CH 1 330.00 144.77 474.77
TOTALS 3 1648.00 434.31 2082.31
1-3 EUR 2190.23 - TOTAL INC EUR 107.92 AGENT TKT FEE
1-3 LAST TKT DTE 18NOV09
> PAGE 2/ 2
The fare for passenger 3 now includes a child discount passenger type code and
the fare is discounted off the adult fare.
Chapter 4 Fares and Pricing
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 167
Passenger Type Codes in the Fare Discount Element
Instead of entering passenger type codes in the name fields of the PNR, or
including them in the pricing entries as above, you can store them in the fare
discount elements. Enter:
FD CH /P3
Then, to use Amadeus Best Pricer to price the itinerary and store the TST, enter:
FXB
All passengers are priced and rebooked successfully with the appropriate
discount codes, if applicable.
Cabin Requests
When searching for low fares, you can include the option /K, which searches for
fare options in the specified cabins.
To search for fares in business class, for example, enter:
FXA /KC
Using Master Pricer Expert
Here we describe how to use Amadeus Master Pricer Expert to search for travel
recommendations.
What Is Master Pricer Expert?
Amadeus Master Pricer Expert allows you to search for available flights and fares
for a travel itinerary and returns pricing recommendations without a PNR.
Your ability to use Amadeus Master Pricer Expert depends on the settings in the
FXD field of your office profile.
You can include up to six segments in your request, including up to two surface
segments. You can also enter options to describe the itinerary.
When you have selected a recommendation, you can book it using the segment
sell direct entry (long sell).
For more information, see HE FXD.
How to Search for Travel Recommendations
To search for travel recommendations, enter:
FXD JFKMIA
FXD Request recommendation transaction code
JFKMIA City pair
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
168 Edition 3.1
System response:
FXDJFKMIA
11 GROUPS AND 20 RECOMMENDATIONS RETURNED FROM USD 203.70 TO
482.70
-------- RECOMMENDATION 1 OF 2 IN GROUP 1 (USD 203.70)---------
PTC CUR TAX FARE BASIS
1 ADT 1 USD 203.70 32.54 TXA0NF2P
TOTAL 1 USD 203.70 32.54
1 US 373 T 05MAY JFK 7 CLT 0959 1200 E0 320
US1675 T 05MAY CLT MIA 1320 1522 E0 734 0523
>> FXS1 TO SELECT
1 TICKETS ARE NON-REFUNDABLE
1 LAST TKT DTE05MAY09 - DATE OF ORIGIN
The recommendations are sorted into groups of the same price, and the first
recommendation of each group is displayed.
You can scroll through the groups or select a group to display all
recommendations in the group using the MD and MU entries.
Note: The system returns up to a maximum of 20 recommendations,
depending on the setting in the SPN field of the office profile.
The first recommendation of each group is displayed.
How to Display Recommendations
To display the recommendations in a group, enter:
FXS 5
FXS Select recommendation transaction code
5 Group number
System response:
---------------------------------------------------------------
1 RECOMMENDATIONS IN GROUP 5(EUR 188.74)
---------- RECOMMENDATION 1 OF 1 IN GROUP 5 (EUR 188.74)---------
PTC CUR TAX FARE BASIS
1 ADT 1 EUR 188.74 19.74 LA0PN
TOTAL 1 EUR 188.74 19.74
1 AA 577 L 28OCT JFK 8 MIA 1110 1425 E0 757 0315
>> MPFXD TO RETURN
1 TICKETS ARE NON-REFUNDABLE
1 LAST TKT DTE28OCT09
---------------------------------------------------------------
To return to the original display of recommendations in groups, enter:
MPFXD
Chapter 4 Fares and Pricing
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 169
How to Sell from a Recommendation
To sell from a recommendation, you must use the direct sell (long sell) entry.
For example, enter:
SS AA577 L 28OCT JFKMIA 2
SS Segment sell transaction code
AA577 Airline code, flight number
L Class of service
28OCT Departure date
JFKMIA Origin and destination airport codes
2 Number of seats requested
For more information, see HE SS.
Recommendation Options
When you are making a travel recommendation request entry, you have several
options you can include for flights, pricing and ticketing.
Note: Certain options can be entered at the segment level, while others can
only be entered at the itinerary level.
How to Add Options
You can add options to your Amadeus Master Pricer Expert entries in the same
way that you add options to a PNR: by adding a slash, followed by the option
codes.
Here are some commonly used options:
Table: Common Recommendation Request Options
Entry Description
FXD 4 JFKMIA More than one seat
FXDJFK/D15JUNMIA/ D25JUNATL
/D27JUNJFK Multiple segments (up to six)
FXDJFK/D15JUN/TD0900MIA Time of departure
See HE FXD for a complete list of options.
Pricing Options
You can use pricing options in your entry by adding //R to the end of your entry
followed by the pricing option.
To display only public fares, enter:
FXDJFK/D15JUNMIA//R,P
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
170 Edition 3.1
Price to Beat Option
The price to beat option allows you to enter a maximum price for a travel
recommendation. The system searches for recommendations that are equal to or
lower than the price you have entered.
Note: The price applies to the number of seats in your entry for the entire
itinerary.
To add the price to beat option, enter:
FXD 2 PAR /D15JUNMIA //PB2500
This entry requests recommendations up to 2500 Euros for two passengers
travelling from PAR to MIA.
How to Add Passenger Type Code Options
You can specify up to three passenger type codes for one passenger, and up to
six passenger type codes in the same entry.
To add a youth passenger type code, enter:
FXDNYC/D11APRLON/RYTH
Homogenous Recommendations
When you specify different passenger type codes, the system may return
recommendations that require a different booking class for different passenger
types: a non-homogeneous recommendation.
In this case the booking class on the recommendation display is marked with an
asterisk (*) and the message 'SPLIT PNR' is displayed.
Homogenous recommendations return the same booking class for all passenger
types. You have the option of requesting homogenous recommendations only.
To make a request for a homogeneous recommendation for one adult and one
youth, enter:
FXD2PAR/D15SEPNCE//PAX/1/RMIL/1/RYTH//NS
For more information, see HE FXD.
What Is a Ticketability Check?
A ticketability check ensures that all recommendations returned for an itinerary
are suitable for ticketing.
The system checks, for example, fare rule restrictions and ticketing agreement
tables, and determines the validating carrier.
This feature can be activated at office level and performed by default, but you can
override the office default by entering the //V option for the itinerary.
For more information, see HE FXD.
How to Perform a Ticketability Check
To perform a ticketability check, enter:
FXD JFK/D15JUNMIA //VY
Chapter 4 Fares and Pricing
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 171
To disable a ticketability check, enter:
FXD JFK/D15JUNMIA //VN
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 173
Chapter 5
Ticketing
Here we give you the basics you need in order to understand the Ticketing
module in the Amadeus Central System. This chapter includes information on the
ticketing process, transitional stored tickets (TSTs), issuing and re-issuing tickets,
and using Amadeus Ticket Changer.
Before You Start
In order to successfully use the Ticketing module, you must have a good
understanding of the Fares and Pricing module. You should understand how to
request a fare display and price a PNR.
Objectives
To meet the objectives of the Ticketing module, you should know how to:
• Display and read a transitional stored ticket (TST)
• Create, modify and delete a TST
• Display the TST history
• Issue a ticket
• View agreement tables
• Manually re-issue a ticket
• Use Amadeus Ticket Changer
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
174 Edition 3.1
Introduction
The distribution system allows you to automatically price the air itinerary of a
PNR. The automatic pricing entry FXP (FXX in certain markets) creates a
Transitional Stored Ticket (TST) which contains the information necessary to
issue a ticket.
To issue a ticket, you enter TTP. If no TST exists in the PNR and you make the
TTP entry, the system prices the itinerary, creates a TST and issues the ticket.
Note: If you enter TTP in a PNR that already contains TSTs, the system
creates TSTs for all the unticketed segments and passengers, and also
issues the ticket(s) for all the existing and new TSTs.
You can price a PNR and create a TST during PNR creation, from a retrieved
PNR or from a PNR that was placed on queue. The PNR must contain at least
the passenger name element and a flight segment.
Once you have created a TST, you can display it with the TQT entry.
When you modify the itinerary or a passenger name in a PNR for which TSTs
have already been created, a PNR Change flag is automatically appended to the
header line of the TST. You must verify the content and the validity of the TST
and remove this flag before you can issue the ticket. For more information on the
PNR Change flag, see What Is a PNR Change Flag? on page 184.
When the system cannot price a PNR, for example when it contains more flight
segments than the system can price automatically, you can manually create a
TST by making the TTC entry. The response to this entry is an empty ticket panel
that you must complete with all the relevant pricing and ticketing information.
Understanding TSTs
Here we describe transitional stored tickets (TSTs), the different types of TSTs,
how to update TSTs and how to work with them.
What Is a TST?
A transitional stored ticket (TST) is a record containing the pricing and ticketing
information attached to a PNR. The system automatically stores information
requested from the fare server in the TST.
The system numbers the TST and appends the TST creation date, office
identification and agent sign. The number allocated to a new TST is unique and
cannot be reused within the same PNR for another TST. This number allows you
to identify the TST for the entire life of the PNR.
A maximum of 10 TSTs can be created for each passenger, provided that you
select different flight segments for each TST. Segments cannot overlap.
A TST can apply to multiple passengers if the air segments, fare elements and
forms of payment are the same. If any of the information is changed for one
passenger in a multiple passenger TST, a new TST is automatically created for
this passenger.
Chapter 5 Ticketing
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 175
Fare Calculation Mode Indicators
The system generates a fare calculation mode indicator (FCMI or fail code) when
you price or issue a ticket where special conditions apply. The FCMI is either a
letter or a number that indicates how the itinerary was priced.
In addition to appearing in the TST display and being stored in TST history, the
FCMI is printed on the ticket.
FCMIs are divided into two groups:
• Those created by the fare quote system when you price an itinerary
• Those created by the ticket server when you issue a ticket
Sometimes you may find that one code appears when you price an itinerary and
another when you issue the ticket. FCMIs created by the ticket server always take
precedence.
Note: The FCMIs explained in the help pages apply to the Amadeus Central
Ticketing server. There may be different explanations for FCMIs
depending on the ticket server you are using.
For a complete list of FCMIs/fail codes, see HE FCMI.
Types of TSTs
There are two types of TSTs in the system:
• Automatic
• Manual
Note: If a PNR contains an infant indicator in the name element, a separate
TST is created for the infant passenger. The ticketing status code in the
TST shows NS indicating no seat reserved.
Automatic TSTs
The system creates an automatic TST (AST) when you enter a PNR pricing
command (FXP or FXX).
If a TST does not exist and you enter the ticketing command TTP, the system
prices the flight segments of the PNR and creates the TST and an Amadeus
Interface Record (A.I.R.) which is sent to the ticketing system to request
issuance. An AST can contain up to 16 flight segments.
An AST created by the system is not displayed immediately. The system displays
a ticket image that contains the fare, validity and baggage allowance applicable
per passenger. The ticket image is for information only as the system uses the
TST to issue the ticket.
After the system creates a TST, a TST identification appears on the header line
of the PNR. This indicates that a TST is attached to the PNR. See Passenger
Name Records on page 61 for more information.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
176 Edition 3.1
Manual TSTs
A manual stored ticket (MST) is a TST that has been created manually or an
automatic TST that has been updated manually. The pricing indicator M in the
header line of the TST indicates that the TST is manual.
You can use a manual TST when the system cannot price a PNR; for example,
there are more than 16 flight segments and you need to store the fare. You can
also create an MST if you need to override the system pricing or when you re-
issue a ticket.
A manual TST is an empty TST, also called a "TST shell," that you manually
complete with all the ticketing and fare information. Before you can create a
manual TST, you must enter an itinerary and passenger names in the PNR. An
MST can contain multiple passengers if the itinerary and the fare elements are
the same for each passenger.
A manual TST can contain up to 28 flight segments, including arrival unknown
(ARNK) segments, but depending on the market and the ticketing server, a TST
containing 28 segments might be rejected due to local limitations.
Note: For users in markets that issue tickets through Amadeus Central
Ticketing, the maximum number of segments is 24.
How to Display a TST
1. To display a TST, enter:
TQT
If there is more than one TST, a TST list is displayed:
Tn P/So NAMEp TOTALq FOPr SEGMENTSs
1 PCt.1 T BARCLAY/MR EUR 114.82 CHECK 3,4
2 .2 IT BARCLAY/INF EUR 19.62 CHECK 5-7
3 .2 BARCLAY/MRS EUR 159.88 AX371449635311+ 5-7
DELETED TST RECORDS MAY EXIST - PLEASE USE TTHu
>
Here is a brief description of the sections of the TST list:
n TST number column
o Passenger name element number
p Passenger name
q Total fare amount
r Form of payment
s PNR segments that apply to the TST
t PNR Change flag
u Deleted TST records can be displayed with the TTH entry
Chapter 5 Ticketing
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 177
2. Select a TST from the list.
TQT /T2
System response:
TST00002 PC NCE1A0950 AG/23JUL I 0 LD 24JUL09 OD MUCMUC SI n
T-
FXB
1.BARCLAY/ADAM MR o
1 MUC LH 4750 E 18NOV 0725 OK E99B 18NOV18NOV 20K
2 O LHR LH 4751 E 25NOV 0935 OK E99B 25NOV25NOV 20K
MUC
FARE F EUR 41.00 p
TX001 X EUR 20.00YQAC TX002 X EUR 16.93RAEB TX003 X EUR 5.48DESE
TX004 X EUR 12.71GBAD TX005 X EUR 24.92UBAS
TOTAL EUR 121.04
GRAND TOTAL EUR 121.04
MUC LH LON28.77LH MUC28.77NUC57.54END ROE0.712358
NONREF/SPEX
6.FE CHANGES OF RES RESTRICTED VALID LH ONLY NONREFUNDABLE q
7.FM 10
8.FP CASH
9.FV LH
Here is a brief description of the sections of the TST (reading from left to right
along each row):
n TST number, PNR Change flag (if applicable), office ID, agent sign, creation date,
pricing indicator, fare calculation mode indicator (FCMI), last date to ticket, origin
and destination points, international sales indicator field, ticket type indicator,
pricing entry that was used to create the TST
o Passenger name, air itinerary with transfer/stopover indicators, not valid
before/after dates, free baggage allowance
p Fare details, including the fare currency code, base fare, taxes, airline ticketing
fees, fare calculation
q PNR fare elements
For a detailed explanation of each TST field, see HE TST, GP INR.
Note: The PNR elements are numbered the same way in the TST as they are
in the PNR.
How to... Enter
Display a TST from an index by TST number TST/T2
Display a TST by passenger TQT/P1
Display TSTs for multiple passengers TQT/P1-3,5
Display a TST by passenger type (infant associated to P1) TQT/INF/P1
Display a TST by segment numbers TQT/S5-8
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
178 Edition 3.1
How to Create a Manual TST
To create a manual TST, enter:
TTC
This entry creates one TST for all passengers using the same PNR elements and
fare discount codes: for example, infants in one TST, children in a second TST
and adults in a third.
Note: Once you begin to create a manual TST, you must use the TQT entry
to display it from the PNR. Note that if you repeat the TTC entry, the
system deletes the original TST and displays an empty TST.
To create individual TSTs for each of the passengers, enter:
TTC /D
You can create a maximum of 10 TSTs per passenger.
Updating TSTs
Here we describe the entries you can use to update a TST as well as the update
entry options available.
TST Update Entries
When you need to update a TST, there are two entries you can use: TTK or TTI.
All TST fields can be updated with either TTI or TTK entries.
The difference between the entries is relevant when you need to update the fare
fields. Fare field elements include the base fare with the issue identifier, the
equivalent fare, taxes, the total fare, the bankers’ rate and the net fare amount.
• TTK
With the TTK entry, you can update fare fields independently from one
another. You can, for example, update one specific tax field only.
• TTI
With the TTI entry, when you update fare fields, you must update them in
one single entry (with the exception of the base fare, the bankers’ rate and
the net fare) and in the following order: base fare, equivalent fare, taxes and
total fare.
When you update more than one fare field in a single entry, you must use the
same order as in the TTI entry: base fare, equivalent fare, taxes, and total fare.
The update to any TST field is subject to rules and validations that are specific to
the nature of the field. Each TST field has a letter identifier that you add to your
entry to identify the field you want to update. You can combine multiple fields in
one entry.
These entries create a TST shell if one doesn't exist. You can also make the
entry in a PNR.
For some commonly-used update options, see TST Update Entry Options on
page 179.
Chapter 5 Ticketing
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 179
TST Update Entry Options
You have several options to choose from when you need to update a TST. These
options work with both the TTK and TTI entries.
Here is a list of commonly-used options you can use to update a TST:
Commonly-Used TST Update Entry Options
Option Description
/B Fare basis
/A Baggage allowance
/V Validity date
/F Fare amount
/X Tax amount
/C Fare calculation
You can also update multiple options in one entry:
TTK /FEUR650.00 /BY /A30K
For a complete list of options, see HE TTK and HE TTI.
How to Update a TST
In this example, we describe how to update several elements of a manual TST
including the fare basis, baggage allowance, base fare, taxes and the fare
calculation.
Here is an example of a PNR that has not been priced:
RP/NCE1A0950/NCE1A0950 AG/SU 11SEP09/1421Z 2CRMT5
NCE1A0950/0022AG/11SEP09
1.BLACK/ANDREW MR
2 LH 965 Y 30OCT 5 MUCFRA HK1 0825 0935 30OCT E LH/2CRMT5
3 LH 960 Y 05NOV 4 FRAMUC HK1 0650 0745 05NOV E LH/2CRMT5
4 APH 05 123 876
5 TK TL29OCT/NCE1A0950
Since the PNR has not been priced, a TST has not been created.
1. Create the manual TST.
TTC
System response:
TST00001 NCE1A0950 AG/11SEP M 1 OD MUCMUC SI
T-
1.BLACK/ANDREW MR
1 MUC LH 965 Y 30OCT 0825 OK
2 O FRA LH 960 Y 05NOV 0650 OK
MUC
Note that in the header line, the pricing indicator has changed to M for
manual and the pricing failcode indicator now shows 1. Both fields indicate
that the TST was changed manually.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
180 Edition 3.1
2. Add the fare basis code and baggage allowance.
TTI /BQEUROP2 /A30K
System response:
TST00001 NCE1A0950 AG/11SEP M 1 OD MUCMUC SI
T-
1.BLACK/ANDREW MR
1 MUC LH 965 Y 30OCT 0825 OK QEUROP2 30K
2 O FRA LH 960 Y 05NOV 0650 OK QEUROP2 30K
MUC
3. Add the base fare.
TTK /F1264.00
System response:
TST00001 NCE1A0950 AG/11SEP M 1 OD MUCMUC SI
T-
1.BLACK/ANDREW MR
1 MUC LH 965 Y 30OCT 0825 OK QEUROP2 30K
2 O FRA LH 960 Y 05NOV 0650 OK QEUROP2 30K
MUC
FARE F EUR 1264.00
TOTAL EUR 1264.00
GRAND TOTAL EUR 1264.00
4. Add the new taxes.
TTK /X66.26YQAC /X15.33RDDP /X13.96DESE
System response:
TST00001 NCE1A0950 AG/11SEP M 1 OD MUCMUC SI
T-
1.BLACK/ANDREW MR
1 MUC LH 965 Y 30OCT 0825 OK QEUROP2 30K
2 O FRA LH 960 Y 05NOV 0650 OK QEUROP2 30K
MUC
FARE F EUR 1264.00
TX001 X EUR 66.26YQAC TX002 X EUR 15.33RDDP TX003 X EUR 13.96DESE
TOTAL EUR 1359.55
GRAND TOTAL EUR 1359.55
The system automatically recalculates the totals for you.
Chapter 5 Ticketing
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 181
5. Add the fare calculation with the /Z option.
TTI /L1-2 /Z632.00
System response:
TST00001 NCE1A0950 AG/11SEP M 1 OD MUCMUC SI
T-
1.BLACK/ANDREW MR
1 MUC LH 965 Y 30OCT 0825 OK QEUROP2 30K
2 O FRA LH 960 Y 05NOV 0650 OK QEUROP2 30K
MUC
FARE F EUR 1264.00
TX001 X EUR 66.26YQAC TX002 X EUR 15.33RDDP TX003 X EUR 13.96DESE
TOTAL EUR 1359.55
GRAND TOTAL EUR 1359.55
MUC LH FRA632.00 LH MUC632.00EUR1264.00END
6. Add the endorsement restrictions.
FE ONLY VALID ON FLIGHTS AND DATES SHOWN
The PNR is redisplayed showing the FE element:
RP/NCE1A0950/NCE1A0950 AG/SU 11SEP09/1421Z 2CRMT5
NCE1A0950/0022AG/11SEP09
1.BLACK/ANDREW MR
2 LH 965 Y 30OCT 5 MUCFRA HK1 0825 0935 30OCT E LH/2CRMT5
3 LH 960 Y 05NOV 4 FRAMUC HK1 0650 0745 05NOV E LH/2CRMT5
4 APH 05 123 876
5 TK TL29OCT/NCE1A0950
6 FE *M*ONLY VALID ON FLIGHTS AND DATES SHOWN
7. File and redisplay the PNR.
ER
Note: If you do not file the PNR, the changes are not stored in the TST.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
182 Edition 3.1
8. Display the updated TST.
TQT
System response:
TST00001 NCE1A0950 AG/11SEP M 1 OD MUCMUC SI
T-
1.BLACK/ANDREW MR
1 MUC LH 965 Y 30OCT 0825 OK QEUROP2 30K
2 O FRA LH 960 Y 05NOV 0650 OK QEUROP2 30K
MUC
FARE F EUR 1264.00
TX001 X EUR 66.26YQAC TX002 X EUR 15.33RDDP TX003 X EUR 13.96DESE
TOTAL EUR 1359.55
GRAND TOTAL EUR 1359.55
MUC LH FRA632.00 LH MUC632.00EUR1264.00END
6.FE *M*ONLY VALID ON FLIGHTS AND DATES SHOWN
Working with TSTs
Here we describe several tasks you can do when working with TSTs.
What Is a Confidential TST?
Note: Confidential TSTs are not available in the following markets: US, CA,
MX, Central America, Caribbean, BM, GU and Micronesia.
You can make a TST confidential so that it can be displayed and modified by your
office only. The confidentiality flag can be set for any type of TST regardless of
status. Both confidential and non-confidential TSTs can exist in the same PNR.
Note: If a PNR contains a confidential TST, the ownership of the PNR cannot
be changed.
If no Amadeus extended ownership agreements exist, only the office that sets the
confidentiality of the TST can display and modify it.
If Amadeus extended ownership agreements do exist, only those offices listed in
the Amadeus extended ownership table can either display and ticket the
confidential TST, or display, modify and/or ticket it.
Confidential TSTs can be deleted by any office in the same way as non-
confidential TSTs.
For more information, see HE TTD.
How to Make TSTs Confidential
A confidential TST is indicated by an asterisk (*) in the PNR header line and in
the TST list.
Here is an example of the header line of a confidential TST with the indicator:
TST00001* NCE1A0980 AA/08JAN A 0 OD NCENCE SI
T-
FXP
Chapter 5 Ticketing
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 183
To make all TSTs confidential, enter:
TTD
System response:
ALL TST(S) CONFIDENTIAL
>
To make a specific TST confidential, enter:
TTD /T1
System response:
SELECTED TST CONFIDENTIAL
>
To remove the confidentiality of a specific TST, enter:
TTD /X /T1
System response:
CONFIDENTIAL FLAG REMOVED
>
How to Delete a TST
A TST is associated to passenger name(s).
Each time a TST is deleted, it is moved to the TST history at end of transaction.
When a TST that contains multiple passengers is deleted, each passenger is
shown separately but the same TST number is used. Deleted TSTs can be
displayed from the TST index with the TTH entry.
The time, date, office identification and agent sign of the user deleting the TST is
automatically appended to the TST history.
How to... Enter
Delete a specific TST TTE/T1
Delete all TSTs in a PNR TTE/ALL
Delete TSTs by passenger numbers TTE/P1,3
Delete passenger name from a TST TTE/T1/P1
Notes: You must use the TST number (/T) and the passenger name element
selection option (/P) in that order. Only the passengers selected are
removed from the TST.
If you specify multiple TSTs and/or passengers, you must separate the
numbers by a comma (,) to indicate a series or a dash (-) to indicate a
range.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
184 Edition 3.1
What Is a PNR Change Flag?
If you change the itinerary or a passenger name after a TST has been created, a
PNR Change flag is displayed in the TST to indicate that there has been a
change.
The system automatically appends a PNR Change flag to the TST when:
• A name change has been performed in the PNR.
• Flights have been rebooked after TST creation.
You cannot issue a ticket against a TST that has a PNR Change flag.
The PNR Change flag must be removed before you can issue the ticket. You
must reprice the itinerary. The system then creates a new TST with an automatic
pricing indicator.
Note: A name change in a PNR does not mean that the airline has accepted
the name change.
PNR Change Flag Example
Here is a TST with a PC indicator (next to the TST number in the header line):
TST00001 PC NCE1A0950 AG/27JUL M 0 LD 03AUG09 OD PARPAR SI
T-
FXB
1.BARCLAY/ADAMSON MR
1 CDG AF 1080 N 01NOV 0745 OK NSTAYFR 01NOV01NOV 20K
2 O LHR AF 1981 N 08NOV 0640 OK NSTAYFR 08NOV08NOV 20K
CDG
FARE F EUR 37.00
TX001 X EUR 60.00YQAC TX002 X EUR 10.03QXAP TX003 X EUR 1.00IZEB
TX004 X EUR 3.92FRSE TX005 X EUR 10.38FRTI TX006 X EUR 12.71GBAD
TX007 X EUR 24.92UBAS
TOTAL EUR 159.96
GRAND TOTAL EUR 159.96
PAR AF LON25.97AF PAR25.97NUC51.94END ROE0.712358
8.FE REF/CHANGES/CXR RESTRICTED
This message is a warning to check the stored fare and make sure it still applies
to the passenger and the itinerary.
For more information on the PNR Change flag, see HE TTF. For more
information on changing passenger names, see HE NU.
The PC is also appended to the TST number in TST list displays. For example:
T P/S NAME TOTAL FOP SEGMENTS
1 PC2 WEBER/A MR EUR 4496.01 CHECK 2,5
2 PC1 FLORES/M MRS EUR 4496.01 CASH 3-4
NO DELETED TSTS
>
Chapter 5 Ticketing
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 185
How to Remove a PNR Change Flag from a TST
To remove a PNR Change flag from a TST, enter:
TTF /T1
System response:
TST FLAG REMOVED
>
You can also remove the PNR Change flag when you issue the ticket. Enter:
TTP /T1 /F
The following table describes options you can use when removing the PNR
Change flag:
TTF Entry Options
Entry Removes the PNR Change flag:
TTF When only one TST exists
TTF /T1 From TST number 1
TTF /T1,3-5 From TST number 1, and 3 through 5
TTF /ALL From all existing TSTs
TTP /F /P1 In the ticketing entry for passenger 1
Note: The pricing indicator is set to M (manual) after the TTF entry.
TST History
HE TTH
TST history contains TST elements that have been changed, cancelled or
deleted. When you change or delete any portion of a TST, the modification is
recorded in the TST history at end transaction.
There are two types of TST history:
• Current TST history
• Deleted TST history
Current TST history contains all additions, changes and deletions made to the
TST, such as an individual passenger cancellation from a TST with multiple
passengers or updates resulting from TTU/TTS/TTA entries.
Deleted TST history contains deleted TSTs. There is one unique TST history for
each TST number. Deleted TSTs that contain multiple passengers show each
passenger separately but the same TST number is used. Deleted TSTs are listed
in the DELETED TSTS section of the TST index.
If you price a TST twice before you file the PNR (end transaction), only the last
allocated TST numbers are stored in the PNR. Consequently the active TSTs
may not begin with 1 and the active TST numbers in a PNR may not be
consecutive.
For more information, see HE TTH.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
186 Edition 3.1
How to Display TST History
When only one TST exists for a PNR, make the following entry to display the
history:
TTH
System response:
** CURRENT HISTORY
CT I/M
FC/ AUTOMATICALLY PRICED *0*
CA 20K MUC LH 965 Y 30SEP09 0830 OK
CA 20K FRA LH 964 Y 05OCT09 0905 OK
002 RF- CR-NCE1A0950 SU 0022AG 27JUL/1303Z
If more than one TST exists, TTH displays a TST list or index and you must
specify the TST for which you want to display the history.
Here is an example of a TST list:
T P/S NAME TOTAL FOP SEGMENT
4 .1 LAVENDER/J MR EUR 1006.05 3-6
6 .2 I LAVENDER/PHRED EUR 126.07 3-6
8 .2 LAVENDER/ER MRS EUR 1019.73 3-6
DELETED TSTS
5 A LAVENDER/ER MRS EUR 1006.47
1 A LAVENDER/J MR EUR 1006.47
1 A LAVENDER/ER MRS EUR 1006.47
3 A LAVENDER/PHRED(INF) EUR 125.01
2 B LAVENDER/J MR EUR 1019.73
To display the TST history for TST 2, enter:
TTH /T2
TTH TST history transaction code
/T2 Slash, TST identifier (T), TST number (2)
Issuing Tickets
To issue a ticket, enter:
TTP
The TTP entry performs the following functions:
• Prices the air itinerary if not previously priced
• Creates a TST if not previously created
• Creates a validating airline element (FV) on the PNR
• Issues the tickets
• Updates the ticketing element (TK) to show the date the ticket was issued
and changes the ticketing indicator to OK
• Ends transaction and files the PNR (ET)
Chapter 5 Ticketing
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 187
Amadeus creates an Amadeus Interface Record (A.I.R.) for all unticketed
passengers and segments in the PNR and sends the AIR to the ticketing system.
There is one AIR created for each TST.
The ticketing system responds with either an acknowledgement (TRACK) or a
rejection (TREJ). If the ticketing system accepts the interface record, the ticket is
printed.
When you enter TTP, the system checks to see if a TST already exists. If yes, the
system issues a ticket for the segments in the existing TST and creates a new
TST for the unpriced segments (if any) and issues the tickets. This causes the
system to issue more than one ticket. If you want only one ticket for the complete
itinerary, you must delete all existing TSTs before you enter TTP.
Note: When issuing tickets, system processing can vary from market to
market. Certain markets require a TST before a ticket can be issued.
Other markets include the total price of all the tickets issued in the
response.
For more information on the TTP entry, see HE TTP.
E-Tickets
Most airlines are evolving away from paper tickets and towards the use of
electronic tickets (e-tickets). The process of generating a ticket in the system is
the same for both types of tickets. However, with an e-ticket, there is no paper
document to print, with the exception of itinerary receipts, agent coupons and
credit card charge forms.
Electronic ticketing allows you to send ticketing information directly to an airline
so that passengers can check in at the airport and board flights without requiring
printed tickets.
When you issue an electronic ticket (e-ticket) through Amadeus by making a TTP
entry, the system sends the flight coupons as a message to the airline. If the
airline accepts the e-ticket request, the information is stored in the airline's own
system as an e-ticket record.
Note: The amount of time that an e-ticket record remains stored in the airline's
system varies between airlines. For information about airline-specific
electronic ticketing policies, enter: HE ETT XX (where XX is the two-
character airline code).
Only the flight coupons are sent to the airline to be stored as an e-ticket record.
All other ticketing documents, such as agent coupons and credit card charge
forms, are still printed on paper.
You can display the e-ticket record once it has been created. The e-ticket record
is stored in the airline's database. The following information is taken from the
PNR and the TST to create and display an e-ticket record:
• Ticket number
• Passenger name
• Flight segments
• Fare, equivalent fare, taxes, and total
• Frequent traveller information
See How to Display an E-Ticket Record on page 190 for information on
displaying an e-ticket record.
For more information on e-tickets, see HE ETT, GP ETK.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
188 Edition 3.1
Fare Elements Required to Issue a Ticket
Validating Carrier Element
When you price a PNR, the system automatically creates a passenger- and
segment-associated validating carrier element (FV) for every TST to ensure
consistency between pricing and ticketing.
The FV element is mandatory for travel agencies; however, it is not mandatory for
airline agents as their carrier's own two-character airline is used.
Note: You can only issue a ticket if both the validating carrier used for pricing
and the one in the FV element is the same.
For more information, see HE FV.
Form of Payment Element
The form of payment element (FP) indicates how the ticket is paid.
You enter the form of payment element by using the transaction code followed by
the form of payment:
FP CASH
For a complete list of payment types, see HE FP.
Commission Element
The commission element (FM) is optional, depending on your specific
commission agreement for ticketing. It is for travel agencies only.
You enter the commission element, for example, as a percentage or an amount:
FM 9
FM 50A
For more entries, see HE FM.
Ticket Pre-Validation
You can pre-validate the ticketing information without actually issuing the ticket by
adding the option /TKT to the ticketing entry. For example, enter:
TTP /TKT
The system checks all the information contained in the TSTs and the A.I.R.s. If
the ticketing information is correct, the system displays the following message:
OK TO TICKET
>
If the ticketing information is incorrect, the system displays an error message.
You then make the necessary corrections and repeat the entry.
You can use the /TKT option in combination with all other TTP options. See TST
Update Entry Options on page 179.
Note: Using the /TKT option performs a validation check only in the
distribution system. The entry is not validated by the airline's system.
You may receive an error message from the airline when you issue the
ticket.
Chapter 5 Ticketing
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 189
How to Issue a Ticket from a PNR
Follow these steps to issue a ticket from a single-passenger PNR:
1. Retrieve the PNR using the record locator.
RT /SW34JT
2. Price the itinerary.
FXX or FXP
The validating carrier element (FV) is created automatically.
3. Enter the form of payment.
FP CASH
4. Enter a commission amount (optional).
FM 10A
5. Issue the ticket.
TTP
Ticket and AIR Sequence Numbers
When you issue a ticket, the system first creates a unique 10-digit sequence
number for each TST. This number is stored in an FB element and is called the
Amadeus Interface Record (A.I.R.) sequence number.
When the ticket is issued, the ticketing system updates the PNR and creates an
FA element with the ticket number and the ticket amount. The system creates
one FA element for each passenger.
You cannot modify FB and FA elements; you can only cancel them. If you want to
reprint a ticket, you must either cancel the existing FA and FB elements and
make a new ticket print entry (TTP) or passenger-associate the TTP entry.
Here is an example of a PNR that has been ticketed and shows the FB and FA
elements:
--- TST ---
RP/NCE1A0900/NCE1A0900 CM/SU 2JUL07/1459Z JX7GXL
1.ABOU/RENE MR 2.SMITH/G MR
3 KL 363 C 08JAN 4 AMSMAD HK2 1035 1310 *1A/
4 KL 364 C 20JAN 2 MADAMS HK2 I 1510 1740 *1A/
5 AP AMS 6 45 33 2-H
6 TK OK02JUL/NCE1A0900
7 FA PAX 074-2345780980/EUR1109.49/02JUL07/NCE1A0900/
/20497890/S3-4/P1
8 FA PAX 074-2345780981/EUR1109.49/02JUL07/NCE1A0900
/20497890/S3-4/P2
9 FB PAX SN0200000620 TTP/RT/S3-4/P1-2
10 FP CASH
11 FV KL
For more information on shadow AIR sequence numbers, see HE FG.
How to Use Entry Options
You can use options when issuing a ticket if you need to issue tickets only for a
specific passenger or segment, for example.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
190 Edition 3.1
Here are some commonly used entry options:
Table: Common Ticketing Entry Options
Option Description
TTP /INF Issue tickets for all infants
TTP /PAX Issue tickets for all passengers except infants
TTP /P1
TTP /P1,3
TTP /P1-3,5
Issue tickets only for passenger 1
Issue tickets for passengers 1 and 3 only
Issue tickets for passengers 1, 2, 3, and 5
TTP /S2
TTP /S2,5
TTP /S2-3,5
Issue ticket only for segment 2
Issue tickets for segments 2 and 5
Issue tickets for segments 2, 3, and 5
TTP /T1 Issue tickets only for TST number 1
TTP /T1 /F Issue tickets for TST number 1 and remove PNR
Change flag
See What Is a PNR Change Flag? on page 184.
TTP /RT Issue the ticket and retain the PNR
TTP /R Issue the ticket and reprice the PNR
TTP /O Issue the ticket on a TST that has expired (past date
TST)
How to Display an E-Ticket Record
To display the e-ticket record when there is only one FA or FHE element in the
PNR, enter:
TWD
If there is more than one FA or FHE element in the PNR, you must add the line
number of the FA or FHE element for the e-ticket record you want to display.
Enter:
TWD /L10
How to Display an E-Ticket Record Using the Ticket Number
You can also display an e-ticket record without a retrieved PNR by including the
ticket number in your TWD entry:
TWD /TKT005-1234567890
In addition to ticket number, you can display an e-ticket record by phone number,
frequent traveller number, credit card number, or trip information.
For more information and examples, see HE TWD.
Chapter 5 Ticketing
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 191
Working with Agreement Tables
Here we describe three types of airline reporting and agreement tables in
Amadeus:
• Bank Settlement Plan (BSP) / Airline Reporting Corporation Membership
Table (ARC)
Each time an agency issues a ticket on a given airline, the agency must
report the sale to that airline for payment purposes.
To simplify the reporting of sales to the airlines, IATA and the airlines have
formed reporting plans. Airlines wishing to participate in the reporting plans
sign an agreement where they will accept payment from a third party, usually
a bank. Bank Settlement Plans (BSPs) are sometimes referred to as Area
Reporting Plans (ARPs). In the U.S, the reporting plan is called ARC (Airline
Reporting Corporation).
The validating airline is checked against a BSP/ARC table to verify whether
or not the airline participates in the BSP/ARC, which are settlement and
reporting plans.
• Interline Ticketing Agreement (ITA)
The system verifies if an interline ticketing agreement exists between the
validating airline and both marketing and operating carriers.
• General Sales Agent Table (GSA)
The system verifies if a GSA agreement exists between the validating airline
and one airline in the itinerary (the marketing carrier only) if the validating
airline is not present in the itinerary.
These tables list the airlines (general sales agents) to which other airlines
have delegated authority to issue air transportation documents on their behalf
in a particular country.
For additional information on agreement tables, see HE TGAD.
How to Display BSP Tables
To display an alphabetical list of the countries participating in all settlement and
reporting plans, enter:
TGBD
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
192 Edition 3.1
System response (partial display)
--INDEX--
AE GULFAREA
AG ANTIGUAANDBARBUDA
AL ALBANIA
AN NETHERLANDSANTILLES
AR ARGENTINA
AT AUSTRIA
AU AUSTRALIA
AW ARUBA
BA BOSNIAHERZEGOVINA
BB BARBADOS
BD BANGLADESH
BE BELGIUM
BF BURKINOFASO
BG BULGARIA
BH BAHRAIN
BJ BENIN
BM BERMUDA
BO BOLIVIA
BR BRAZIL
BS BAHAMAS
BW BOTSWANA
)>
To display a list of carriers participating in BSP/ARP/ARC plans in a specific
country, for example France, enter the country code:
TGBD -FR
System response (partial display):
--BSP/ARP PLAN FOR: FR FRANCE
AA AB AC AF AH AI AM AR
AT AV AY AZ A3 A4 A7 BA
BD BE BI BR BT BW B2 CA
CF CI CM CO CU CX CY CZ
DE DL DT D3 EC EI EK EO
ET EY FB FI FV F7 GA GF
GM GY G0 G2 HF HM HR HU
HV HX HY IB IC IG IR IT
IW IY IZ I5 JJ JK JL JP
JU J2 KC KD KE KM KU LA
LG LH LI LN LO LV LW LX
LY MA MD ME MH MK MS MU
MX NH NT NZ OA OK OL OM
OS OU OV OZ PG PK PR PS
PW QF QG QI QR Q3 RB RE
RG RJ RO SA SB SE SK SN
SQ SS SU SV SW S4 S7 TF
TG TK TN TP TS TU TX T3
T7 UA UD UL UN UP US UT
UU UX U8 VD VH VN VR VS
VT VU VV VY V0 V3 WM WY
)>
Chapter 5 Ticketing
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 193
How to Display Interline Agreements
To display a master list of all carriers for which Amadeus maintains interline
ticketing agreements, enter:
TGAD
System response (partial display):
--INDEX--
AA AB AC AE AF AH AI AM
AP AQ AR AS AT AU AV AW
AY AZ A0 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6
A7 A9 BA BC BD BE BG BI
BK BN BP BR BT BV BW BX
B2 B3 B7 B8 CA CB CC CF
CI CK CM CO CP CS CT CU
CW CX CY CZ C2 C3 C9 DB
DE DI DJ DK DL DM DN DP
DT DU DV D2 D3 D6 D7 D9
EB EC EF EG EH EI EK EM
EN EQ ET EU EY E3 E5 E8
E9 FB FE FI FJ FL FM FN
FQ FT FV F5 F7 F9 GA GB
GD GE GF GH GJ GL GN GO
GU GV GW GY G0 G3 G5 G7
HA HF HG HJ HM HP HQ HR
HS HU HX HY H2 IB IC IE
IF IG II IK IN IQ IR IT
IX IY IZ I1 I5 I9 JA JE
JG JH JI JJ JK JL JM JO
)>
Specific Interline Agreements for an Airline
You can also request a list of interline agreements for a particular airline.
For example, to display the list of airlines that Air France (AF) has interline
agreements with, enter:
TGAD -AF
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
194 Edition 3.1
System response (partial display):
--AIRLINES HAVING AGREEMENT WITH: AF
AA TPE - AC TPE - AE TPE - AF TPE -
AH TPE - AI TPE - AJ TP - AM TPE -
AP TPE - AR TPE - AS TPE - AT TPE -
AV TPE - AY TPE - AZ TPE - A3 TPE -
A5 TPE - A9 TP - BA TPE - BD TPE -
BE TPE - BI TP - BP TPE - BR TP -
BW TP - B2 TP - CA TPE - CB TPE -
CI TPE - CM TPE - CO TPE - CS TP -
CU TPE - CX TPE - CY TPE - CZ TPE -
DB TP - DL TPE - DT TP *- EI TPE -
EK TPE - ET TPE - EY TPE - FB TPE -
FI TPE - FV TPE - F7 TPE - GA TP -
GF TPE - GU TPE - G3 TPE - HA TPE -
HF TP - HM TPE - HU TPE - HX TP -
HY TPE - IB TPE - IC TPE - IG TPE -
IR TPE - IT TPE - IY TP - JJ TPE -
JK TPE - JL TPE - JM TP - JP TPE -
JU TPE - JZ TPE - J2 TP - KA TPE -
KE TPE - KK TPE - KL TPE - KM TPE -
KQ TPE - KU TPE - LA TPE - LG TPE -
LH TPE - LI TPE - LO TPE - LP TPE -
Interline Agreement Codes
The code after the airline code describes the type of agreement between the
airlines. There are three types of ticketing agreements:
• T - paper ticketing
• P - prepaid ticket advice (PTA)
• E - electronic ticketing
If an asterisk (*) appears next to the code, it means there are exceptions to the
agreement.
Re-issuing Tickets
You need to re-issue a ticket when there has been a change of airlines, fare or
routing after the ticket has been issued, but before the journey has been
completed.
The following methods are available for processing a re-issue:
• Creating a manual TST with the TTC transaction
• Updating an already existing TST with the TTU transaction
• Repricing the itinerary and creating a new TST with the FXP or FXX
transactions
You can use the FQP and the FXP transactions to recalculate the fare, with the
point of sale/ticketing override and past date options.
For more detailed information on ticket re-issue, see HE REISSUE.
Chapter 5 Ticketing
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 195
How to Re-issue a Ticket
If you have to make a change to an e-ticket that is not allowed under the
revalidation rules, you must exchange the ticket. This is also known as re-issuing
the ticket.
To re-issue a ticket:
Update the PNR
1. Book new flights.
2. Update the TST with the segments you want to issue.
TTU /T1 /S3-5
3. Cancel unwanted segments.
Note: When all segments in the itinerary are rebooked, the TST is
automatically deleted. Be careful to update your existing TST before
cancelling the unwanted ones.
4. Recalculate the new fare using FQP, override point of sale/ticketing and past
date to the date of original issue.
FQP NYC/ALHFRA-/AAFPAR-/D13DEC/ALHMUC-/ALHNYC/R,NYC,12FEB09
5. Determine if there is any additional collection required.
Convert the difference in the currency of the country of origin into the
currency of the country where the re-issue takes place using today's Bankers’
Selling Rate (BSR).
6. Enter the FO element.
The check digit is optional.
FO 001-1234567890 3 C23 NYC 12JUL0X /8049876
7. Enter the old form of payment and the new form of payment, if there is one.
FPO /CASH+ /CASH
Update the TST
Note: All information is taken from the ticket image.
1. Display the TST.
TQT
2. Update the non-valid after date.
This is normally one year unless it is a special fare. Calculate from the first
flown segment. If it is an open segment, calculate from the date of issue.
TTK /VXX 12JUL
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
196 Edition 3.1
3. Update the fare field elements.
- Enter the new Base Fare in the currency of the country of origin.
- Equivalent Currency (if any).
- Old Tax in the currency of payment, and New Tax (if any) in the currency
of the country where the re-issue takes place.
- Total Amount, in the currency of the country where the re-issue takes
place. 0 (zero) if there is no additional collection, or the additional amount
to be collected.
TTK /RUSD3744 /OUSD13.20US /XEUR3.92FR /TEUR250.92
4. Enter the Banker's Selling Rate (BSR) that was used to convert the additional
collection into the currency of payment (if different from the currency of the
country of origin).
TTK /K1.15955
5. Display the e-ticket record.
TWD /L (FA line number)
6. Remove the PNR Change flag and issue the ticket.
TTP /T1 /F
Using Amadeus Ticket Changer
Amadeus Ticket Changer (ATC) allows you to automatically recalculate and
prepare documents for the issuance of all voluntary re-issues or revalidations of
electronic and paper tickets based on the IATA industry standard.
Once you have made the necessary modifications to the passenger itinerary and
entered the pricing entries, the system processes the best pricing solution
according to the re-issue conditions.
A re-issue generates a new ticket and a penalty miscellaneous charges order
(MCO), and/or a refundable balance MCO, and/or a non refundable amount
MCO, if any exist. You can re-issue both paper and e-tickets with Amadeus
Ticket Changer.
For more information on Amadeus Ticket Changer participating airlines, enter:
FQN ATC /CXR
For more information on Amadeus Ticket Changer, see HE ATC.
How to Verify If a Fare Rule is Eligible for ATC
All fares that have the VC.VOLUNTARY CHANGES category attached in the
fare rule qualify for Amadeus Ticket Changer.
To verify if a fare rule qualifies for Amadeus Ticket Changer, enter:
FQN XX *VC
Replace XX with the fare quote display line number of the fare rule you want to
display.
Chapter 5 Ticketing
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 197
How to Re-issue a Ticket Using ATC
Here we describe a basic ticket re-issue using Amadeus Ticket Changer.
For a more detailed ticket re-issue, see HE STEPS.
To re-issue a ticket using ATC;
1. Retrieve the PNR.
2. Rebook the itinerary.
3. Cancel the old flight segments.
XE 2-3
4. Cancel the old TST (if required).
TTE /T1
5. Reprice the ticket using ATC confirmed pricing.
FXQ
6. Update the old form of payment with a new one, in case of additional
collection.
FPO /CASH+ /CASH
7. Enter the form of payment for the penalty MCO, if any.
5/ FP CASH
8. Display the e-ticket record.
TWD /L7
9. Issue the ticket and the penalty MCO, if applicable.
TTP /TTM
Note: For this last step, users in the US must use the following entries:
TTP /EXCH
TTM /EXCH
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 199
Chapter 6
Queues
Here we give you the basics you need in order to understand the Queues module
in the Amadeus central system. We include information on the different types of
queues and explain how to work with them.
Before You Start
In order to successfully use the Queues module, you must have a good
understanding of the PNR, Fares and Ticketing modules.
Objectives
To meet the objectives of the Queues module, you should know how to:
• Display the queue bank
• Place PNRs or messages on queue
• Handle PNRs or messages on queue
• Activate and deactivate queues
• Print queues
Introduction
Amadeus Queues gives airlines, travel agencies and providers the ability to send
and receive PNRs that require action, and to send and receive messages.
Each airline and travel agency is automatically provided with a bank of predefined
queues (16 for a travel agency and 19 for an airline).
The system places PNRs automatically on these predefined queues. PNRs are
placed on the queues by the office identification contained in the PNR header
line.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
200 Edition 3.1
PNRs may require further action for the following reasons:
• Segments, services, options, or seats from a waitlist have not yet been
confirmed.
• The office responsible for the PNR has changed.
• There has been a change in the flight segment.
• There has been a change in the ticketing arrangement.
• The ticketing time limit has expired.
• There has been a change in the group PNR.
Amadeus Queues allows you to search the queues for PNRs that meet specific
criteria (for example, PNRs for which the ticketing date is approaching).
In addition to the predefined queues, you can add queues on which you can
manually place PNRs.
Queue Categories
Queue categories are sub-queues that you can use to organize the PNRs in the
queue. Each queue can have up to 256 categories.
Queue Date Ranges
A date range functions as a separate sub-queue. Date ranges can be changed to
meet the requirements of your office, as required.
Queue Types
Special and Dual Queues
There are two types of automatic queues in the Amadeus queue system:
• Special queues - Can contain up to 256 categories, but cannot have date
ranges.
• Dual queues - Can contain up to 256 categories; each category can have up
to four date ranges.
Delay-Date and Delay-Time Queues
You manually place PNRs on the delay queue that requires action on the date or
time specified. The delay queue contains two sections for date-delayed and time-
delayed PNRs. It does not contain any categories.
When you enter a QD/TIME or QD/DATE transaction, the system places the
PNR in the delay queue for the applicable time or date. The system returns the
PNR to the original queue and category when the date or time is reached.
Commonly Used Queues
Here is a description of some commonly used queues.
Table: Common Queues
Queue Description
Q0 General
Chapter 6 Queues
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 201
Queue Description
Q1 Confirmation
Q2 Confirmation from waitlist
Q3 Option
Q4 Responsible office change
Q7 Schedule change
Q8 Ticketing
Q12 Expired time limit
Q25 Multi-list
(Categories 0-254 are activated)
Q26 Multi-list
(Only categories 0-31 are activated)
Q87
Q87/C0
Q87/C1
Q87/C6
Q87/C8
Groups
Default
AIR
SPCL SVC (SSR elements)
KL (Waitlist status)
Q94 Customer profile message
Q96 Past date record message
Q97 Message
For more details, see HE QUEUE.
Nightly File Maintenance
The system runs a file maintenance process every night at midnight GMT time
(system time).
The system reads the OP and TK elements in PNRs, as well as the delay queue,
and moves PNRs to queues 3, 8, 12 and the delay queue at midnight local time
(unless a specific time is added).
PNRs are moved to each date range (D4 to D3 to D2) as the appropriate amount
of time passes.
Working with Queues
Here we describe several tasks that you can perform when working with queues.
What Is the Queue Bank?
Queue banks are a collection of queues where PNRs and messages are
automatically placed and categorized so that you can work on them.
The queue bank is created at the same time that a new office ID is created and
has the same office ID as the office. One office queue bank can use up to 80
queues.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
202 Edition 3.1
The queue bank is created with several default queues. However, you can also
add or remove queues as required. See How to Customize Queues and
Categories on page 214.
For queue processing to function properly, the queue bank must include the
following:
• 0 - General queue
• 1 - Confirmation queue
• 3 - Option queue
• 97 - Message queue
• DLY/DATE - DLY/TIME queue
If you customize your queue bank, PNRs are not automatically placed on these
customized queues, but default to queue 0.
How to Display the Queue Bank
To display the queue bank, enter:
QTQ
System response:
1138 16SEPn
QUEUEo...NCE1A0950.......Q/TTLp.ADDSq.LQCr.IWs
....DLY/DATt ........... 0..................
....DLY/TIM.............. 0..................
Q97.OURMSGSu............ 2. 11. 1. 10
Q 0.GENERAL.............. 61. 63. 0. 2
Q 1.CONFO .............. 1. 5. 0. 4
Q 2.KL .............. 0. 3. 2. 5
Q 3.OPTION .............. 2. 68. 2. 68
Q 4.RPCHNG .............. 5. 33. 0. 28
Q 5.RATES .............. 1. 36. 0. 35
Q 6. .............. 5. 5. 0. 0
Q 7.SKEDCHG.............. 14. 12. 3. 1
Q 8.TKTG .............. 52. 48. 6. 2
Q 9.STEPHEN.............. 0. 0. 0. 0
Q10. .............. 1. 2. 0. 1
Q11.TEST DB.............. 0. 0. 0. 0
Q12.XTL .............. 23. 23. 0. 0
Q14.PURGED .............. 1. 0. 1. 0
Q15. .............. 0. 0. 0. 0
Q16. .............. 0. 0. 0. 0
Q17. .............. 4. 0. 4. 0
This entry displays all active queues, whether they contain PNRs or not.
Chapter 6 Queues
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 203
Here is an explanation of the screen:
n Time and date you made the request
o Queue number column
p TTL (Total) - The total number of PNRs/messages to be worked.
q ADDS (Additions) - The number of PNRs/messages received since the queue was
activated or since the last queue count request (QCR).
r LQC (Last queue count) - Displays zero (0) if the queue count has never been
reset, or the number of PNRs/messages in the TTL column when the queue
count was last reset.
s IT (Items worked) - The number of PNRs/messages worked.
t Date-delayed and time-delayed PNRs/messages
u Queue name (if applicable)
For more information, see HE QTQ.
How to Display Only Active Queues That Contain PNRs
To display only the active queues that contain PNRs, enter:
QT
System response:
1145 16SEP
QUEUE....NCE1A0950.......Q/TTL...ADDS...LQC...IW
Q97.OURMSGS.....................................
MY MESSAGES .C 0.... 2. 11. 1. 10
Q 0.GENERAL...................................
.................C 0.... 61. 63. 0. 2
Q 1.CONFO .....................................
.................C 0.D1. 1. 1. 0. 0
Q 3.OPTION .....................................
.................C 0.... 1. 67. 0. 66
.................C 21.... 1. 1. 2. 2
Q 4.RPCHNG .....................................
.................C 0.... 5. 33. 0. 28
Q 5.RATES .....................................
.................C 0.... 1. 36. 0. 35
Q 6. .....................................
.................C 0.... 5. 5. 0. 0
Q 7.SKEDCHG.....................................
.................C 0.D1. 1. 1. 0. 0
....ASC ...C 1.D1. 13. 11. 3. 1
Q 8.TKTG .....................................
.................C 0.D1. 47. 48. 1. 2
For more information, see HE QT.
How to Perform a Queue Count Reset
To reset the queue count to zero for all the queues in your office, enter:
QCR
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
204 Edition 3.1
System response:
OK
1425 12JAN
QUEUE....NCE1A0900.......Q/TTL..ADDS...LQC....IW
....DLY/DAT.............. 0..................
....DLY/TIM.............. 0..................
Q97.MESSAGE.............. 48. 0. 48. 0
Q 0.GENERAL.............. 1. 0. 1. 0
Q 1.CONFO .............. 8. 0. 8. 0
Q 2.KL .............. 1. 0. 1. 0
Q 3.OPTION .............. 1. 0. 1. 0
Q 4.RPCHNG .............. 0. 0. 0. 0
The system automatically sets the ADDS and IW columns to zero (0), and copies
the TTL column to the LQC column.
For more information on queue count resets and recalculations, see HE QCR.
How to Start a Queue
To start processing queues in the queue bank, enter:
QS 0
The first PNR in the queue is displayed for you to work on.
As soon as the transaction that you perform on the current PNR or message is
complete, the next item on queue is displayed (except for QI and QF
transactions).
You must include the queue number in your entry. You can also include:
• A specific category and date range
• An office ID, if you want to start processing queues for a different office
The Amadeus queue system automatically displays each PNR or message on
queue in sequence, so you do not need to make more than one QS entry to
process a queue.
For more information, see HE QS.
How to Remove the Current PNR and Display the Next One
To remove the current PNR or message from the queue, enter:
QN
After you make the QN entry, the system displays the next PNR or message.
To end transaction on a PNR before removing it from the queue, use the ET entry
instead of QN.
For more information, see HE QN.
How to Delay a PNR
To re-queue the current PNR or message to the bottom of the queue and display
the next PNR/message, enter:
QD
Chapter 6 Queues
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 205
If the current PNR or message is the last remaining item in the queue, the QD
entry takes you out of the queue.
For more information, see HE QD.
How to Specify a Delay Date or Time
You can also specify a date or time (or both) in your entry.
To re-queue for a specific date, enter:
QD 12JAN
To re-queue for a specific time, enter:
QD 1500
You can use either the 12-hour or 24-hour time format in your QD entry.
Note: When you delay a PNR to a specific time, that time must be at least two
hours later than the current time.
To combine both the date and time, enter:
QD 12JAN /1500
How to Ignore Changes and Exit a Queue
To ignore changes to a PNR or message and exit the queue, enter:
QI
When a PNR has been displayed from a queue, the system does not accept an
end transaction entry until you have taken some action on the PNR.
If you enter QI, the system ignores the retrieved PNR or message and leaves it at
the top of the queue. This allows you to exit the queue without affecting the order
of the items in the queue.
When you enter QI, the PNR remains in its currently assigned date range.
For more information, see HE QI.
How to Confirm a Status Change
You have two options when you need to change the status of a PNR that you are
working on in a queue.
To end the transaction and change the advice codes, enter:
ETK
To end the transaction, change the advice codes and redisplay the PNR, enter:
ERK
These entries change the advice codes in the air, hotel, car, and auxiliary
segments, as well as SSR elements, into holding status code. The system also
transfers any itinerary element or SSR request with an inactive status code to
PNR history.
Elements that contain the codes HX, NO, UN, and UC are also transferred to the
history section of the PNR. In addition, associated elements, such as the FA or
FB element, are updated or removed from the PNR as appropriate.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
206 Edition 3.1
For more information, see HE ETK or HE ERK.
How to Remove a PNR from a Queue
To remove a PNR from a queue:
1. Retrieve the PNR using the RT entry and the record locator.
RT Y2LNE8
2. Display all the queues that contain the PNR.
RTQ
System response:
------------------------------------------------------------
PNR QUEUE LIST - Y2LNE8
------------------------------------------------------------
NUM OFFICE ID QUEUE CAT DR DATE / TIME SIGN
0001 NCEPL2120 003 000 00 20AUG/ 0822 TS
0002 NCEPL2120 016 003 01 20AUG/ 0823 DM
0003 NCEPL2120 033 001 02 20AUG/ 0829 AH
0004 NCEPL2120 013 000 01 20AUG/ 0827 JP
3. Remove the PNR:
- From a specific queue
Enter the line number from the list, not the queue number.
QXP 3
System response:
------------------------------------------------------------
PNR QUEUE LIST - Y2LNE8
------------------------------------------------------------
NUM OFFICE ID QUEUE CAT DR DATE / TIME SIGN
0001 NCEPL2120 003 000 00 20AUG/ 0822 TS
0002 NCEPL2120 016 003 01 20AUG/ 0823 DM
0003 NCEPL2120 013 000 01 20AUG/ 0827 JP
- From all queues, enter:
QXP /ALL
System response:
PNR Y2LNE8 REMOVED FROM ALL QUEUES
For more information, see HE QXP.
How to Redisplay a Queue Message
If you clear your screen before you have finished working with a queue message,
you can redisplay the message.
Enter:
QU
For more information, see HE QU.
Chapter 6 Queues
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 207
What Is Queue Placement?
You can manually place PNRs and messages on queue by making QE entries in
either of the following situations:
• In queue mode - you have already started working a queue by entering QS.
After you place a PNR or message on queue using a QE entry, the system
displays the next PNR or message in the queue. If there are no more items,
you exit queue mode automatically.
• Outside queue mode - you have already retrieved a PNR or you have a
record locator.
Note: Automatic queue placement does not check for duplicate PNRs. For all
placement entries, the system ignores automatic sorting by agent sign.
If you do not specify a category, the PNR or message is placed in category 0 of
the specified queue.
If you attempt to place a PNR or message on a queue that is not active, or in a
category that does not exist, the system places it in Q0C0 by default.
In queue mode, if you use QE to place a PNR or message on another queue, it is
removed from the current queue. Queue history (RHQ) will include the placement
of the PNR on the other queue but not its removal from the current queue.
How to Manually Place a PNR in a Queue
Here are some examples of how to manually place a PNR in a queue:
Table: Manual PNR Queue Placement
Entry Description
QE 8 Places the PNR on queue 8
QE 8 C1 Places the PNR on queue 8, category 1
If you do not specify a category, the PNR is automatically placed in category 0.
For more information, see HE QE.
How to Browse a Queue
You can browse a queue and retrieve PNRs or messages from it without updating
them or changing their positions on queue.
To browse a queue, enter:
QSB 1 C25 D1
QSB Queue browse transaction code (mandatory)
1 Queue to browse (mandatory)
C25 Category to browse (optional)
D1 Date range to browse (optional)
You cannot perform the following actions when browsing a queue:
• End transaction (ET) on a PNR
• Place a PNR on another queue (QE)
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
208 Edition 3.1
• Remove a PNR from the queue (QN, QNF, QF, or QM)
For more information, see HE QSB.
How to Display a List of PNRs in a Specific Queue
To display a list of PNRs in a specific queue, enter:
QV /0
System response:
QUEUE VIEW - NCE1A0950 Q0 C0 (24) 3 FOUND ON 24 SCANNED
----------------------------------------------------------------
NO. NAME RLOC PROVIDER DATE BRDOFF ST SIGN/OID PLACED
----------------------------------------------------------------
001 TEST YPBPUY BA0341 C 20SEP NCELHR PK CL NCE1A0950 27JUL
002 WHITE 27DBYO AF6203 N 15NOV NCEORY HK AA NCE1A0950 15SEP
003 AMADEUS 27P99I QF0031 L 20OCT SYDLHR HK AA NCE1A0950 15SEP
NO MORE ITEMS
For more information, see HE QV.
How to Display the Queue Planner by PNR Record Locator
You can use the queue planner to display PNRs by record locator.
To display the summary planner, which shows the total of all PNRs on the
ticketing, delay and option queues, enter:
QVR
System response:
-------------------------------------------------------
TKT OPT AND DELAY SUMMARY : NCE1A0900
-------------------------------------------------------
NUM RLOC/FA TYP ITM QUE CAT STA DATE TIME
-------------------------------------------------------
0001 ANEHGZ O P 003 001 N 13MAY09 08:00
0002 ANEP31 O P 003 001 N 13MAY09
0003 CFY6TR D P 007 001 N 13MAY09 08:00
0004 DRG4YU T P 008 001 N 15MAY09 08:15
0005 SDHN7A T P 008 001 N 15MAY09 09:00
0006 EJD5K3 D P 001 002 N 20MAY09 09:00
0007 8E10ECEA D M 097 000 N 20MAY09 09:30
-------------------------------------------------------
Here are some example entries you can use to display the PNRs on the ticketing,
delay and option planners:
Table: Queue Planner by Record Locator Entries
Entry Description
QVRT Ticketing planner
Displays PNRs that are queued to the ticketing queue
at a future date.
QVRD Delay planner
Displays PNRs that have been delayed for action from
the queue and that will be returned to the queue at a
future time or date.
Chapter 6 Queues
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 209
Entry Description
QVRO Option planner
Displays PNRs that are queued to the option queue at
a future date.
You can enter a date in any of the entries. For example:
QVR /25JUN
If you do not specify a date in your entry, the system orders the display by date,
in chronological order, from the current date, followed by the numeric order of the
queue. It includes PNRs with dates up to 361 days in the future.
For more information, see HE QVR.
How to Display All Queues That Contain the PNR, from the PNR
To display all queues that contain a PNR when you are working in the PNR,
follow these steps.
1. Retrieve the PNR using the RT entry and the record locator.
RT Y2LNE8
2. Display all the queues that contain the PNR.
RTQ
System response:
------------------------------------------------------------
PNR QUEUE LIST - Y2LNE8
------------------------------------------------------------
NUM OFFICE ID QUEUE CAT DR DATE / TIME SIGN
0001 NCEPL2120 003 000 00 20AUG/ 0822 TS
0002 NCEPL2120 016 003 01 20AUG/ 0823 DM
0003 NCEPL2120 033 001 02 20AUG/ 0829 AH
0004 NCEPL2120 013 000 01 20AUG/ 0827 JP
For more information, see HE RTQ.
How to Print a Queue
You can print the PNRs and messages on a queue and either keep them on the
queue or remove them from the queue, depending on the entry used.
Note: You can only use this entry outside queue mode for PNRs and
messages.
Here are some examples of print entries:
Table: Queue Print Entries
Entry Description
QP Prints the PNRs/messages on queue and removes
them from the queue
QP 87 Prints queue 87, category 0
QP 87 C1 Prints queue 87, category 1
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
210 Edition 3.1
Entry Description
QPR Prints the PNRs/messages on queue and retains them
on the queue
For more information, see HE QP.
What Is the Queue Count Planner?
The queue count planner allows you to view the future queue placement of PNRs
for the ticketing, option and delay queues.
There are several ways you can display the queue count planner. Here we
describe three of them:
• Time-deferred
• Date-deferred
• Month-deferred
How to Display a Time-Deferred Queue Count
To display the time-deferred summary planner, which shows the total of all PNRs
on the ticketing, delay and option queues, enter:
QCT
System response:
1609 13JUN QUEUE COUNT TIME DEFERRED - TKT/OPT/DLY
NCE1A0900 ******* AM ****** ******* PM ******
PNR/TIM 00......0 06.....50 12......0 18......8
01......0 07......0 13......7 19.....11
02......0 08......3 14......0 20......0
03......0 09.....10 15......4 21......0
04......0 10......0 16......9 22......0
05......0 11......0 17.....12 23......0 >MD
Here are some example entries that you can use to display the time-deferred
PNRs on the ticketing, delay and option planners:
Table: Time-Deferred Queue Entries
Entry Description
QCTT Time-deferred ticketing planner
Displays PNRs that are queued to the ticketing queue
at a future date.
QCTD Time-deferred delay planner
Displays PNRs that have been delayed for action from
the queue and that will be returned to the queue at a
future time or date.
QCTO Time-deferred option planner
Displays PNRs that are queued to the option queue at
a future date.
You can add a date or office ID to any of the entries:
QCTT /25JUN
Chapter 6 Queues
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 211
For more information, see HE QCT.
How to Display a Date-Deferred Queue Count
To display the date-deferred summary planner, which shows the total of all PNRs
on the ticketing, delay and option queues, enter:
QCD
System response:
1631 13JUN QUEUE COUNT DATE DEFERRED - TKT/OPT/DLY
NCE1A0900 TKT/TTL OPT/TTL DLY/TTL TTL
ON QUEUE .....4 .....2 .....5 ....11
TOTAL ....38 ....15 ....18 ....71
15JUN ....12 .....9 .....3 ....24
21JUN .....3 .....0 .....6 .....9
31PLUS ....23 .....6 .....9 ....38
Here are some example entries that you can use to display the date-deferred
PNRs on the ticketing, delay and option planners:
Table: Date-Deferred Queue Entries
Entry Description
QCDT Date-deferred ticketing planner
Displays PNRs that are queued to the ticketing queue
at a future date.
QCDD Date-deferred delay planner
Displays PNRs that have been delayed for action from
the queue and that will be returned to the queue at a
future time or date.
QCDO Date-deferred option planner
Displays PNRs that are queued to the option queue at
a future date.
You can add an office ID to any of the entries:
QCDT /NCEAF0100
For more information, see HE QCD.
How to Display a Month-Deferred Queue Count
To display the month-deferred summary planner, which shows the total of all
PNRs on the ticketing, delay and option queues, enter:
QCM
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
212 Edition 3.1
System response:
HALF MONTHLY SUMMARY
QUEUE TYPES: TKT/OPT/DLY OFFID: NCE1A0900
JUL 13-15.... 10 NOV 1-15.... 21 MAR 1-15.... 8
JUL 16-31.... 6 NOV 16-30.... 43 MAR 16-31.... 4
AUG 1-15.... 35 DEC 1-15.... 29 APR 1-15.... 3
AUG 16-31.... 12 DEC 16-31.... 18 APR 16-30.... 0
SEP 1-15.... 15 JAN 1-15.... 31 MAY 1-15.... 1
SEP 16-30.... 23 JAN 16-31.... 9 MAY 16-31.... 0
OCT 1-15.... 16 FEB 1-15.... 8
OCT 16-31.... 9 FEB 16-29.... 11
Here are some example entries that you can use to display the month-deferred
PNRs on the ticketing, delay and option planners:
Table: Month-Deferred Queue Entries
Entry Description
QCMT Month-deferred ticketing planner
Displays PNRs that are queued to the ticketing queue
at a future date.
QCMD Month-deferred delay planner
Displays PNRs that have been delayed for action from
the queue and that will be returned to the queue at a
future time or date.
QCMO Month-deferred option planner
Displays PNRs that are queued to the option queue at
a future date.
The system displays the totals by half-month increments for the next 11 months.
You can add an office identification to any of the four entries:
QCM /NCEAF0100
For more information, see HE QCM.
How to Copy a PNR from the Queue Planner
You can request PNRs stored in a queue to be copied to a specific queue and
removed from the planner.
Here are some example entries for the ticketing (QWDT), delay (QWDD) and
option (QWDO) planners:
Table: Copying PNRs from the Queue Planner
Entry Description
QWDT/25JUN
QWDD/25JUN
QWDO/25JUN
Moves PNRs for a specific date.
QWDT/25JUN/NCEAF0100
QWDD/25JUN/NCEAF0100
QWDO/25JUN/NCEAF0100
Moves PNRs for a specific date and office ID.
Chapter 6 Queues
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 213
Entry Description
QWDT/25JUN/8
QWDD/25JUN/8
QWDO/25JUN/8
Moves PNRs for a specific date and to a specific
queue.
QWDT/25JUN/8C3
QWDD/25JUN/8C3
QWDO/25JUN/8C3
Moves PNRs for a specific date, and to a specific
queue and category.
QWDT/25JUN/NCEAF0100/8C3
QWDD/25JUN/NCEAF0100/8C3
QWDO/25JUN/NCEAF0100/8C3
Moves PNRs for a specific date, office identification,
and specific queue/category.
QWDT/ALL
QWDD/ALL
QWDO/ALL
Moves all future PNRs.
If you specify a different office identification from the one associated to your
terminal, the system copies the PNRs to the office's queue/category.
For more information, see HE QWD.
Ticketing Planner
If you do not specify a queue number, the system automatically places the PNRs
on queue 8. If you do not enter a category number, the category is determined by
the type of ticketing field in the PNR.
Note: You cannot specify a date range. Date ranges are determined by the
dates in the PNR and existing date ranges of the receiving
queue/category.
Delay Planner
If you do not specify a queue number, the system automatically places them on
the queue from where the original delay request was made. If you specify a
message queue, the system only copies messages to that queue.
Note: These entries are valid for all duty codes
Option Planner
If you do not specify a queue number, the system automatically places them on
queue 3, category 0.
How to Add a Queue
You can customise the queue bank to fit the needs of your office by adding
additional queues. You can define specific queues, categories and date ranges.
You can add a new queue to a queue bank or restore a queue that was deleted
from an original queue bank.
Here are some examples of queue activation entries:
Table: Queue Add Entries
Entry Description
QA 6 C1 Adds a special queue.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
214 Edition 3.1
Entry Description
QA 5 C2 Adds a special queue with two categories.
QA6C2D01NOV-15NOV-30NOV Adds a dual queue with date ranges.
When you add queues to the queue bank, the system does not automatically
place PNRs on those queues; you must do it manually.
Note: Queues can only be added by agents with an SU duty code.
You can activate a queue using any number up to and including 99, as long as
the number is not already assigned to a queue.
For more information, see HE QA.
How to Customize Queues and Categories
You can customize the names of the queues and categories in your queue bank.
Here are some example entries:
Table: Customizing Queues and Categories
Entry Description
QAQ5FARES Adds or changes the name for queue 5.
Note: The queue name can be up to seven characters
long.
QAQ5 Deletes the name for queue 5.
QAN5C2MAILING Adds or changes the category name of a special
queue.
Note: A category identity can be up to 16 alphanumeric
characters long (no special characters).
QAN5C2 Deletes the category name for queue 5.
For more information, see HE QAN or HE QAQ.
How to Delete a Queue
You can delete queues that you seldom use. PNRs that are normally sent to
those queues are directed to the general queue.
To delete a queue, enter:
QK 4
QK Queue delete transaction code (mandatory)
4 Queue number (mandatory)
Note: You can only delete a queue if it does not contain any PNRs or
messages
You cannot delete the following queues:
• Q0 - General
• Q97 - Messages
Queues
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 215
• Queues for time- and date-delayed PNRs
For more information, see HE QK.
How to Remove All PNRs from a Queue
You can remove all the PNRs from a queue or category.
Here are some example entries:
Removing PNRS/Messages from a Queue or Category
Entry Description
QR 87 Removes all PNRs/messages from a specific queue,
category zero.
QR 28/29/87 Removes all PNRs/messages from specific queues,
category zero.
QR 87 CA Removes all PNRs/messages from a specific queue,
all categories.
QR 28CA/29CA/87CA Removes all PNRs/messages from specific queues, all
categories.
QR87C1 Removes all PNRs/messages from a specific queue
and category.
When you make the QR entry, you will receive a warning message before the
PNRs or messages are removed from queue:
ALL PNRS/MSGS WILL BE REMOVED FROM QUEUE
RE-ENTER TO CONFIRM
You have one minute to repeat the entry to confirm that you want all the
PNRs/messages removed from the queue.
For more information, see HE QR.
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 217
Chapter 7
Profiles
Here we describe the basic information you need in order to understand the
Profiles module in the Amadeus central system. We include information on the
different types of profiles and show how to enter and exit profile mode, as well as
how to create and manage profiles.
Before You Start
In order to successfully use the Profiles module, you must have a good
understanding of the PNR module. You should understand how to create and add
elements to a PNR, as well as retrieve an existing PNR.
Objectives
To meet the objectives of the Profiles module, you should know how to:
• Use profile mode
• Create new profiles
• Create profiles from a PNR and PNRs from profiles
• Display profiles
• Associate a traveller profile to a company profile
• Retrieve and modify profiles
• Deactivate and reactivate profiles
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
218 Edition 3.1
Introduction
Here we describe profiles, the elements they contain and profile mode in the
system.
What Is a Profile?
A profile is a record containing useful information about a traveller, company or
agency that can assist you when making reservations in Amadeus. There are
three main types of profile:
• Traveller profiles - contain information about individual passengers
• Company profiles - contain information about companies
• Agency profiles - contain information about your own office
After you create a profile, it is stored and maintained in the system with its own
record locator. You can update profile data when required. You can also
associate traveller profiles to company profiles.
You can also create PNRs automatically from customer profiles. See How to
Create a Profile from a PNR on page 235.
An additional type of profile in the system is the management profile. This is
attached to your office information and determines the items that can be included
when you create profiles.
For more information, see Working with the Management Profile on page 232.
Profile Sections
A profile is divided into different sections, each of which contains different types
of information.
Itinerary/PNR Transferable Data
This section includes information about:
• Passenger names
• Contact information, such as telephone number, fax number and email
address
• SSRs and remarks
• Fare discounts
This section contains all the elements that you can transfer to a PNR, or that are
automatically transferred by the system. You can enter the elements in any order;
the system then places them in the correct sequence.
Here is an example of the Itinerary/PNR Transferable Data section in a profile:
*T* ROMERO/ISA
------- PNR TRANSFERABLE DATA MUC1A0701 M
1 A NM 1ROMERO/ISA
2 A AP MUC 345 789-H
3 S TK OK
4 S SR VGML
END OF DISPLAY
*PROFILE MODE*
Chapter 7 Profiles
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 219
For a complete list of items, see HE PROFILE, GP PNE.
General Information
The General Information section includes information about:
• Company and agency name
• Index field, which allows you to create your own system for filing and
reference of profiles
• Country information, including country of birth and citizenship
• Language spoken
• Date of birth
None of the information in the General Information section can be transferred to
the PNR.
Here is an example of the General Information section in a profile:
*T* WILSON/ALFRED MR C AMADEUS MARKETING U56O5F
------- PNR TRANSFERABLE DATA MUC1A0701
1 A NM 1WILSON/ALFRED MR
------- GENERAL INFORMATION
C 2 PCN/ AMADEUS MARKETING
3 PIN/ ARC001
4 PCO/ DE
5 PCZ/ CZ
6 PCB/ DE
7 PLS/ DE
8 PBD/ 01JUL1949
END OF DISPLAY
*PROFILE MODE*
For a complete list of items, see HE PROFILE, GP GEX.
Documents
This section includes information about:
• Passports and visas
• Driving licenses and identity cards
These documents can only be stored in a traveller profile.
Here is an example of the Documents section in a profile:
------- DOCUMENTS
3 PAS/ DE /DP341782 /12AUG2000/12AUG2010
4 PIV/ IN /RZ589383773 /01JUL2003/01DEC2003
5 PCE/ FR /GTR28374765 /15JAN1987/
6 PID/ ES /Y575647464 /01JAN2002/31DEC2007
n o p q r
n Document type
o Country code, either for the issuing country or the country to which the visa
applies
p Document number
q Issue date
r Expiry date
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
220 Edition 3.1
For a complete list of items, see HE PROFILE, GP DOE.
Follow Up
This section includes information about follow-up entries. Follow up allows you to
place a company, agency or traveller profile on a list for action to be taken at a
later date.
You can set up to three follow-up items for each profile. A profile remains on the
follow-up list until all follow-up elements are deleted from the profile.
Here is an example of the Follow Up section in a profile:
*T* ARCHER/ALEX MR
------- PNR TRANSFERABLE DATA MUC1A0701 M
1 A NM 1ARCHER/ALEX MR
------- FOLLOW UP
2 PFO/ VERIFY EXPIRATION DATE VISA CARD /04FEB2013
END OF DISPLAY
*PROFILE MODE*
For a complete list of items, see HE PROFILE, GP FLW.
Types of Profile Element
Each element in a profile is identified by a unique three-letter transaction code
and is numbered in the same way as in a PNR. You use the existing PNR
transaction codes to create the PNR elements you want to store in the profile.
When you are working with profiles and PNRs, you can transfer elements
between the two. How the elements are transferred is indicated by one of two
codes:
• Automatic elements (A) - These elements are transferred to a PNR
automatically.
• Selectable elements (S) - You must select these elements if you want them to
be transferred to a PNR.
The element types are indicated in the profile example shown below:
------- PNR TRANSFERABLE DATA
1 A NM 1BUTLER/BORIS MR
2 A OS YY PLEASE ASSIST IN BOARDING
3 A AM 6 ARLINGTON ROAD, LONDON NW1 4JX
4 S ST /N/A
5 S AP LHR 568 7645-H
6 S SR VGML
7 S SR WCHR
------- ITINERARY
8 S SO YWYCDGNYC
Note: Mandatory PNR elements (name, contact, etc.) are always transferred
to a PNR, regardless of the options you choose when making your
transfer entry.
For more information on transferring elements between profiles and PNRs, see
How to Add PNR Transferable Data on page 222.
Chapter 7 Profiles
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 221
What Is Profile Mode?
You can create, modify, deactivate or reactivate a customer profile using cryptic
entries. To do this you must first access the profile in profile mode.
When you are in profile mode, you can only enter customer profile transaction
codes and request online help. You cannot retrieve or work on PNRs. Any other
transaction code results in an error response.
You can perform all other customer profile functions, such as display, print, or
transfer, either in or out of profile mode.
How to Enter Profile Mode
To enter profile mode, enter:
PM
System response:
WELCOME TO CUSTOMER PROFILE EXPERT MODE
FOR ON-LINE HELP TYPE HE PEMODE
*PROFILE MODE*
The indicator *PROFILE MODE* is displayed at the bottom of each system
response to remind you that you are working in profile mode.
How to Exit Profile Mode
To exit profile mode, enter:
PME
System response:
PROFILE MODE EXITED
Working with Traveller Profiles
In profile mode, you can create a traveller profile, a company profile, a traveller
associated to a company profile, or an agency profile.
For more information about entering profile mode, see How to Enter Profile Mode
above.
How to Create a Traveller Profile
To create a traveller profile in profile mode, you use the standard PNR name
element format. Enter, for example:
NM1 LEWIS/ARTHUR MR
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
222 Edition 3.1
System response:
*T* LEWIS/ARTHUR MR
------- PNR TRANSFERABLE DATA NCE1A0900 M
1 A NM 1LEWIS/ARTHUR MR
END OF DISPLAY
*PROFILE MODE*
>
The name element is the only element required to create and store a traveller
profile.
In order to save the profile, you must use the special end transaction for profile
mode. See How to End a Profile on page 226.
For information on creating profiles from PNRs, see How to Create a Profile from
a PNR on page 235.
How to Add PNR Transferable Data
To add elements in the PNR transferable elements section of the profile, you use
the same entries as you would for PNR elements.
Here are some examples of entries and their corresponding PNR elements:
Table: PNR Transferable Data Entries
Entry Description
NM1 BLACK/ANDREW MR Name
AP NCE 04 92 94 55 66 Contact
FP CASH Form of payment
SR*VGML Special service request
OS YY VIP AMADEUS VP Other service information
RM PLS DELIVER TO
TRVL DEPT General remarks
RC VIP PLS ASSIST Confidential remarks
AM 123 AV DE GAULLE
75001 PARIS FRANCE Mailing address
FV AF Validating carrier
For more information on PNR elements, see PNR Basics on page 63.
Chapter 7 Profiles
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 223
How to Add Document Information About a Traveller
You use the documents section of a profile to store information about a traveller's
documents.
You can only store documents in a traveller profile.
To store a traveller's passport information, enter:
PAS/CO-DE/NR-DP341782/IS-12AUG2000/EX-12AUG2010
PAS Passport information transaction code
/CO-DE Slash, country indicator, dash, two-letter country code
/NR-DP341782 Slash, number indicator, dash, document number
/IS-12AUG2000 Slash, issue date indicator, dash, issue date
/EX-12AUG2010 Slash, expiry date indicator, dash, expiry date
The entries for the other document types you can enter follow the same format
but have different transaction codes.
Each document must contain at least one of the following items:
• Country
• Document number
• Issue date
• Expiry date
Here are examples of other entries you can use to enter document information
about a traveller:
Table: Traveller's Document Information Entries
Entry Description
PIV Visa information
PCE Driving license information
PID Identity card information
Note: You can store up to 10 documents per profile.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
224 Edition 3.1
How to Add Travel Policies
You can add different travel policies and preferences to a profile. Here we
describe how to add airline, cabin class, hotel and car preferences.
The travel policies and preferences you enter can be limited to regions or
countries. To display a list of the region codes, see HE REGION.
Airline Preferences
To add an airline preference, enter:
PPA/A-LH/DN-EUROP
PPA Airline preference transaction code
/A-LH Slash, airline indicator, dash, airline code
/DN-EUROP Slash, destination indicator, dash, region code
For more details, rules and other options you can add to the entry, see HE PPA.
Cabin Class Preferences
To add a preference for cabin class, enter:
PPK/K-C
PPK Cabin class preference transaction code
/K Slash, cabin class indicator
-C Dash, cabin class
For more details, rules and other options you can add to the entry, see HE PPK.
Hotel Preferences
To add a hotel chain preference, for example Sheraton Hotels (SI), enter:
PPH/CO-SI
PPH Hotel preference transaction code
/CO Slash, hotel chain indicator
-SI Dash, hotel chain code
When adding hotel preferences, you can optionally specify a specific hotel name,
bed type and room type, as well as region and city information.
Note: A specific hotel chain or hotel master chain (/CO-XX) is mandatory in
your entry.
For more details, rules and other options you can add to the entry, see HE PPH.
Chapter 7 Profiles
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 225
Car Preferences
You can store car company and vehicle type preferences, depending on the
location.
To add a preference for Hertz (ZE) as the preferred car company in France,
enter:
PPC/CO-ZE/DN-FR
PPC Car preference transaction code
/CO-ZE Slash, car company indicator, dash, car company code
/DN-FR Slash, destination indicator, dash, country code
Note: A specific car company code (/CO-XX) is mandatory in your entry.
For more details, rules and other options you can add to the entry, see HE PPC.
How to Add a Traveller's Country of Citizenship
To add a traveller's country of citizenship to the profile, enter:
PCZ/ FR
System response:
------- GENERAL INFORMATION
2 PCZ/ FR
You can add up to three countries of citizenship to the profile:
PCZ/ FR, NZ, GB
For a list of region codes, see HE REGION.
How to Add a Traveller's Languages
To add the languages spoken by the traveller to the profile, you use the
transaction code followed by the country code for the language. Enter:
PLS/ DE
System response:
------- GENERAL INFORMATION
2 PLS/ DE
You can add up to five country codes for the languages spoken:
PLS/ DE, FR, ES, GB, SE
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
226 Edition 3.1
How to End a Profile
You must end a profile in order to save changes. There are several options you
can use to end transaction for a profile.
Here are the entries:
Table: End Transaction Entries
Entry Description
PE End transaction and file the profile
PER End transaction, file and redisplay the profile
PEE End transaction, file and exit profile mode
For more information, see HE PE.
How to Ignore a Profile
You can ignore a newly created profile or ignore any current updates to a
retrieved profile.
Here are the entries:
Table: Ignore Profile Entries
Entry Description
PI Ignore the updates and file the profile
PIR Ignore the updates and redisplay the profile
PIE Ignore the updates and exit profile mode
For more information, see HE PI.
Modifying Profiles
Here we explain the different tasks you can perform when you are working with
profiles.
How to Retrieve a Traveller Profile
You can display a traveller profile in profile mode. The system automatically
displays the PNR transferable data section. The other data sections are not
displayed unless they contain information.
Enter, for example:
PDN/-BRAUN/
PDN/ Display profile transaction code, slash
-BRAUN Dash, name
/ Slash (optional)
Chapter 7 Profiles
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 227
Note: If you include the slash (/) at the end of the entry, the system displays
the profile that matches the family name exactly. If you do not include
the slash, the system displays a list of all profiles that begin with the
name you specify.
System response:
*T* BRAUN/CLAUDIA MISS 22B3F6
------- PNR TRANSFERABLE DATA MUC1A0701
1 A NM 1BRAUN/CLAUDIA MISS
2 A AP FRA 456 907-H
3 S TK OK
4 S SR VGML
END OF DISPLAY
*PROFILE MODE*
The header line indicates that this is a traveller profile (*T*) and the record
locator is shown to the right of the name.
For more information, see HE PDN.
How to Retrieve a List of Traveller Profiles
You can display a list of travellers who are associated with a specific company
profile. You can do this for your office or another office (when security permits).
Enter, for example:
PLT//AMADEUS/
PLT Display traveller profile list transaction code
//AMADEUS/ Double slash, company name, slash (optional)
System response:
TRAVELER LIST FOR AMADEUS
TRAVELER RECLOC COMPANY
1 ARCHER/ALEX MR ABC123 AMADEUS
2 GRAF/HEINZ MR ABC321 AMADEUS
*PROFILE MODE*
This entry displays a list of travellers associated to the company name that
exactly matches 'Amadeus'.
Here are some other entries you can use:
Entry Description
PLT//AMADEUS Display a list of travellers associated to any company
whose name starts with 'Amadeus'.
PLT/NCE1A0900/AMADEUS Display a list of travellers in office ID NCE1A0900
who are associated with any company whose name
starts with 'Amadeus'.
PLT/NCE1A0900/AMADEUS/ Display a list of travellers in office ID NCE1A0900
who are associated with any company whose name
exactly matches 'Amadeus'.
For more information, see HE PLT.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
228 Edition 3.1
How to Retrieve a List of Company Profiles
You can display a list of the company profiles associated with your office or with
another office (when security permits).
Enter, for example:
PLC
System response:
SIMILAR COMPANY NAME LIST
COMPANY RECLOC
1 ABBOT FT7J2J
2 AMADEUS HY7FGQ
3 BRITISH TELECOM QHY1TQ
4 EUROP OXYGEN GHU0LP
5 PHILIPS HY61BU
6 THOMSON CORP JGHYT1
To display the company profiles associated to a different office, enter:
PLC/NCE1A0900
How to Deactivate a Profile
When you have a traveller, company or agency profile that is no longer needed,
you can deactivate it.
To deactivate a profile displayed on your screen in profile mode, enter:
PX
System response (for traveller profile):
TRAVELLER ARCHER/ALEX MR
WILL BE DEACTIVATED
TYPE PE TO CONFIRM OR PI TO IGNORE
*PROFILE MODE*
The system automatically displays a message requesting that you confirm (PE) or
ignore (PI) the deactivation process.
Deactivated profiles cannot be modified, nor used to transfer information to or
from a PNR.
A profile remains for a maximum of 30 days. If you do not reactivate it during this
time, it is automatically deleted.
Note: Profiles that are unused for 700 days are deactivated automatically.
Unused means that the profile has not been displayed, modified or
transferred during that time.
For more information, see HE PX.
How to Display a List of Deactivated Profiles
You can display a list of profiles that have been deactivated.
Enter:
PLX
Chapter 7 Profiles
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 229
System response:
DEACTIVATED PROFILES LIST
PROFILE NAME RELATED PROFILE NAME
04DEC99
1 T ARCHER/ALEX MR
2 C AMADEUS MARKETING
3 T GRAF/HEINZ MR C BMW CORP
05DEC99
4 T ARCHER/ALEX MR
For more information, see HE PLX.
How to Reactivate a Profile
When you have a profile displayed on your screen, you can reactivate it. Enter:
PR
You can also reactivate a profile directly from the deactivated profile list by adding
the line number to your entry. For example, enter:
PR6
System response for a traveller profile:
TRAVELLER LEWIS/ALBERT MR
WILL BE REACTIVATED
ENTER PE TO CONFIRM OR PI TO IGNORE
*PROFILE MODE*
The system automatically displays a request for you to confirm (PE) or ignore (PI)
the reactivation process.
If you confirm (PE) the reactivation process, the system response is:
TRAVELLER LEWIS/ALBERT MR REACTIVATED
*PROFILE MODE*
If you ignore (PI) the reactivation process, the system response is:
IGNORED
*PROFILE MODE*
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
230 Edition 3.1
Working with Company Profiles
Here we define a company profile, show how to create one and explain how to
associate a travellers profile to one.
What Is a Company Profile?
A company profile is one type of profile that contains useful information about a
company that can help you when you make a reservation in Amadeus.
You can update a company profile as required, as well as automatically create a
PNR from a company profile. Additionally, you can associate a traveller profile to
a company profile.
Note: A company profile name must contain a minimum of three and a
maximum of 60 alpha numeric characters, including spaces. However,
special characters are not allowed.
How to Create a Company Profile
To create a company profile, enter:
PCN/AMADEUS MARKETING
PCN Company name transaction code
/AMADEUS MARKETING Slash, company name
System response:
*C* AMADEUS MARKETING
------- GENERAL INFORMATION MUC1A0701 M
1 PCN/ AMADEUS MARKETING
------- TRIP AND TRAVELLER CATEGORIES
2 PTP/ BIZ/BUSINESS
END OF DISPLAY
*PROFILE MODE*
The system automatically adds the following to the general information section of
the profile:
• The company name
• The office identification of the office creating the profile
The system also adds the trip and traveller categories section, as well as the
default "business trip" purpose (BIZ), automatically.
For more information, see HE PCN.
How to Associate a Traveller Profile to a Company Profile
In profile mode, you can associate a traveller to a company profile. The company
profile must be created and stored in the system.
To associate a traveller profile to a company profile:
1. Display the traveller's profile.
PDN/-LEWIS/
Chapter 7 Profiles
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 231
2. Enter the company profile association transaction code followed by the
company name.
PCN/BMW CORP
System response:
*T* LEWIS/ARTHUR MR C BMW CORPn 23LP9N
------- PNR TRANSFERABLE DATA MUC1A0701 M
1 A NM 1LEWIS/ARTHUR MR
------- GENERAL INFORMATION
2 PCN/ BMW CORPo
END OF DISPLAY
*PROFILE MODE*
n The company indicator (C) and the company name is appended to the right of the
traveller's name.
o The company name is also appended to the general Information section of the
profile.
Working with Agency Profiles
Here we define an agency profile and show how to create one.
What Is an Agency Profile?
An agency profile contains information related to your own office. You can use an
agency profile to store information such as special phone numbers, remarks and
preferred providers.
Note: Only one agency profile can exist for each office ID.
You can also create a PNR automatically from an agency profile.
For more information, see HE PROFILE, GP AGY.
How to Create an Agency Profile
To create an agency profile in profile mode, enter:
PYN/ TELIRAMA
System response:
*A* TELIRAMA
------- GENERAL INFORMATION MUC1A0701 M
1 PYN/ TELIRAMA
END OF DISPLAY
*PROFILE MODE*
The system automatically adds the following to the general information section of
the profile:
• The agency name
• The office identification of the office creating the profile
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
232 Edition 3.1
There are two indicators that can appear to the right of the office identification:
• N - indicates that free-flow text information is being added
• M - indicates that the profile is being created, updated or modified
When you retrieve an existing agency profile, the record locator is displayed to
the right of the agency name.
Working with the Management Profile
Here we define a management profile and show how to display one.
What Is a Management Profile?
A management profile enables you to control how profiles are created and how
data is transferred from a profile to a PNR. When an office ID is created, it
automatically includes a management profile.
Management profiles can only be displayed and modified if the local security
attribute PMR (profile management retrieval) is set to Y (yes).
You can display or modify a management profile, but you cannot delete it.
When you create a PNR element in a traveller, company or agency profile, the
system automatically applies the default transfer indicators. If you specify a
transfer indicator in your entry, that transfer indicator applies.
Transfer indicators can be set to the following:
• Automatic elements (A) - Transferred automatically unless overridden at
transfer time.
• Selectable elements (S) - Stored in the PNR, but are not always used for
PNR creation. You must select these at transfer time.
For more information about management profiles, see HE PROFILE, GP MAN.
How to Display a Management Profile
To display the management profile, enter:
PDO
Chapter 7 Profiles
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 233
System response (partial display):
*M*nAMADEUS DEFAULT OFFICE
TRANSFER INDICATOR MUC1A0701o
COMPANYp ASSO TRAq UNASSO TRAr AGENCYs
STt 1 2 S 3 S 4
AP 5 A 6 A 7 A 8 A
TK 9 S 10 S 11 S 12 S
SR 13 S 14 S 15 S 16 S
SR* 17 A 18 A 19 A 20 A
OS 21 S 22 S 23 S 24 S
OSYY 25 A 26 A 27 A 28 A
OP 29 S 30 S 31 S 32 S
AI 33 S 34 S 35 S 36 S
RC 37 S 38 S 39 S 40 S
RM 41 S 42 S 43 S 44 S
RQ 45 S 46 S 47 S 48 S
FD 49 S 50 S 51 S 52 S
FE 53 S 54 S 55 S 56 S
FK 57 S 58 S 59 S 60 S
*PROFILE MODE*
n Management profile indicator and office name
o Office ID
p Company profile transfer indicator
q Traveller associated to a company profile transfer indicator
r Traveller profile transfer indicator
s Agency profile transfer indicator
t PNR transaction code
Each column contains the PNR element that can be transferred to each profile,
followed by the default transfer indicator. Each PNR element is numbered
individually from left to right.
How to Display a Management Profile History
To display the history of the management profile for your office at any time, enter:
PHO
If you have the management profile displayed on your screen already, you can
display the history by entering:
PH
Note: Profile history entries are only allowed for agents who are signed in with
an SU duty code.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
234 Edition 3.1
System response:
*M* AMADEUS DEFAULT OFFICE
MANAGEMENT PROFILE HISTORY MUC1A0701
---------------------------------------------------------------
PROFILE CREATION : 08APR99/1611/MUC1A0701/0000CT
LAST DISPLAY : 04NOV99/0925/MUC1A0701/0001AA
LAST DISPLAY : 04NOV99/0912/MUC1A0701/0001AA
LAST UPDATE : 04NOV99/0925/MUC1A0701/0001AA
---------------------------------------------------------------
* 04NOV99/0925/MUC1A0701/0001AA
TRA : UNASSO. TRAV - AP - A
---------------------------------------------------------------
*PROFILE MODE*
For more information, see HE PHO.
Profiles and PNRs
The system allows you to create profiles directly from PNRs, as well as create
PNRs from profiles.
How to Create a PNR from a Profile
When you have a profile displayed on your screen, you can create a PNR from it.
You have the option of transferring all the automatic PNR elements, transferring
all the automatic and selectable PNR elements, or selecting specific elements to
be transferred.
Here is an example of a profile:
The *T* HALLSTROM/BERT MR C BMW CORP 6G6NZ2
------- PNR TRANSFERABLE DATA NCE1A0900
1 A NM 1HALLSTROM/BERT MR
2 A AP MUC 452 890-B
3 A AP MUC 456 875-H
4 A OS YY VIP BMW CORP
5 S TK OK
6 S FP CHECK
------- GENERAL INFORMATION
7 PCN/ BMW CORP
END OF DISPLAY
>
To create a PNR from the displayed profile, enter:
PT
System response:
--- RLP ---
RP/NCE1A0900/
1.HALLSTROM/BERT MR
2 AP MUC 452 890-B
3 AP MUC 456 875-H
4 OSI YY VIP BMW CORP
>
Only the elements that show the mandatory (M) and automatic (A) transfer
indicators are transferred to the PNR.
Chapter 7 Profiles
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 235
When you want all the PNR transferable elements to be transferred to the PNR,
enter:
PT*
When you have a profile displayed in profile mode, and you make the entry to
create a PNR, the system automatically suspends profile mode and creates the
PNR. To return to profile mode, enter PM.
For more information, see HE PT.
How to Create a Profile from a PNR
You can create a traveller profile or a company profile directly from a PNR.
When you create a profile from a PNR, the system automatically switches to
profile mode.
When transferring PNR elements to a traveller profile, two groups of elements are
transferred:
• Elements that are specifically associated to the name element number
selected
• Elements that do not have specific passenger association
Traveller Profile
To create a traveller profile from a PNR, you use the PC/ transaction code,
followed by a dash (-) and the passenger name element number.
Here is an example of a PNR:
RP/NCE1A0900/NCE1A0900 SL/SU 24DEC0x/1041Z ZM6DVD
1.HARPER/JUSTIN MR
2 LH9621 C 19JUN 1 AGBFRA HK1 0545 0605 0710 *1A/E*
3 AP MUC 456 100-B
4 AP MUC 235 186-H
5 TK OK24DEC/NCE1A0900
6 SSR VGML LH HN1/S2
7 AM LEOPOLDSTRASSE 17, 800 MUENCHEN 81, GERMANY
>
To create a traveller profile from the PNR, enter:
PC/-1
System Response:
*T* HARPER/JUSTIN MR
------- PNR TRANSFERABLE DATA NCE1A0900 M
1 A NM 1HARPER/JUSTIN MR
2 A SR *VGML
3 A AM LEOPOLDSTRASSE 17, 800 MUENCHEN 81, GERMANY
4 S AP MUC 456 100-B
5 S AP MUC 235 186-H
6 S TK OK
END OF DISPLAY
*PROFILE MODE*
>
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
236 Edition 3.1
Company Profile
To create a company profile from a PNR, you use the PC/ transaction code
followed by the company name.
Here is an example of a PNR:
RP/NCE1A0900/NCE1A0900 SL/SU 24DEC0x/1041Z ZM6DVD
1.HARPER/JUSTIN MR
2 LH9621 C 19JUN 1 AGBFRA HK1 0545 0605 0710 *1A/E*
3 AP MUC 456 100-B
4 AP MUC 235 186-H
5 TK OK24DEC/NCE1A0900
6 SSR VGML LH HN1/S2
7 AM LEOPOLDSTRASSE 17, 800 MUENCHEN 81, GERMANY
>
To create a company profile from the PNR, enter:
PC/BMW CORP
System Response:
*C* BMW CORP
------- PNR TRANSFERABLE DATA NCE1A0900 M
1 A AP MUC 456 100-B
2 A AP MUC 235 186-H
3 A SR *VGML
4 A AM LEOPOLDSTRASSE 17, 800 MUENCHEN 81, GERMANY
5 S TK OK
------- GENERAL INFORMATION
6 PCN/ BMW CORP
------- TRIP AND TRAVELLER CATEGORIES
7 PTP/ BIZ/BUSINESS
END OF DISPLAY
*PROFILE MODE*
>
The system automatically transfers the PNR elements to the PNR transferable
data section of the profile. It also creates the company name field (PCN/) in the
general information section of the profile, as well as the default trip purpose (BIZ)
in the trip and traveller categories.
For more information, see HE PC.
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 237
Chapter 8
Itinerary and Invoice
Here we provide you with the basic information you need in order to understand
the Itinerary and Invoice module in the Amadeus central system. We describe
itineraries and invoices, and show you how to display and print them, how to send
them by fax or email, and how to add remarks.
Before You Start
In order to use the Itinerary and Invoice module successfully, you must have a
good understanding of the PNR, Fares, and Ticketing modules.
Objectives
To meet the objectives of the Itinerary and Invoice module, you should know how
to:
• Display, print and add options to itineraries and invoices
• Fax and email itineraries and invoices
• Enter remarks to be printed on itineraries and invoices
Introduction
Itineraries and invoices are documents that provide information to a traveller
about travel plans and amount totals.
An itinerary is a list of the passenger’s travel arrangements. It can include flight
information, hotel and car rental information, and any other miscellaneous
information.
For information about itineraries, see Itineraries on page 238.
An invoice contains the details of the passenger’s routing and fare. It can include
car, hotel, and surface transportation charges as well.
For information about invoices, see Invoices on page 240.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
238 Edition 3.1
Itineraries
An itinerary provides a travel plan for your customer. The itinerary can be
displayed on your terminal, printed in your office or in a remote office, faxed or
sent by email.
You can customize itineraries in the following ways:
• You can issue a separate itinerary for each passenger or a single itinerary
(joint) for all passengers in the PNR.
• The itinerary can include all segments present in the PNR or only selected
segments.
• If a translated version exists in the system, you can issue the itinerary in the
desired language.
• You can enter remarks in the PNR and select remark lines from your mini-
office profile to be printed on the itinerary.
For more information, see HE ITIN.
Type of Itineraries
There are two main types of itinerary: basic and extended.
• Basic - provides summary trip information for the traveller
• Extended - provides detailed trip information for the traveller
What Is Displayed on an Itinerary?
The itinerary can contain information about the following :
• The agency
• The customer
• Mailing and billing addresses
• Flights
• Hotel reservations
• Car rental
• Ground transportation
• Auxiliary segments
• Tours
• Insurance
The information is obtained from the PNR, the office profile, the mini-office profile
and the Amadeus database. Only the data fields that have a value are displayed.
Note: If you do not want the agency information to be printed, it can be
switched off in the office profile.
For detailed information about what is printed on a basic and extended itinerary,
see HE ITIN, GP DTI.
Chapter 8 Itinerary and Invoice
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 239
Working with Itineraries
Here we explain how to display, print and add options to an itinerary.
How to Display an Itinerary
The following table describes the transactions you can use to display an itinerary.
Note: The system displays a joint itinerary by default regardless of the number
of passengers in the PNR.
Table: Display Itinerary Transactions
Entry Description
IBD Display a basic itinerary.
IED Display an extended itinerary.
IBD/P1 Display an itinerary for a specific passenger.
Joint Itineraries
A joint itinerary displays one itinerary for all passengers in the PNR.
To display a basic joint itinerary, enter:
IBDJ
To display an extended joint itinerary, enter:
IBEJ
Note: Use this option if you do not want a separate itinerary for each
passenger.
How to Print an Itinerary
The following table describes the transactions you can use to print an itinerary.
Table: Print Itinerary Transactions
Entry Description
IBP Print a basic itinerary.
IEP Print an extended itinerary.
IBPJ Print a single basic itinerary for all passengers.
IEPJ Print a single extended itinerary for all passengers.
Note: Use this option if you do not want a separate
itinerary for each passenger.
TTP/IEP Print the itinerary with the ticket.
For more print options, see HE IBP.
How to Add Options to an Itinerary
You have several options you can use when displaying or printing itineraries.
These options work with both the display and print entries.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
240 Edition 3.1
Here are some examples:
Table: Itinerary Option Entries
Entry Description
IEP/P1-2 Print extended itinerary with passenger association.
IBD/S3, 5 Display basic itinerary, segments 3 and 5 only.
IED/LP FR Display extended itinerary in French.
Note: If the information is not translated into the
selected language, it is displayed or printed
in English.
For more information, see HE ITIN, GP ITI.
Invoices
An invoice is issued for record keeping and accounting purposes. It contains the
details of the passenger's fare and can also include car, hotel and surface
transportation charges.
Depending on your entry, the invoice also contains either a basic or an extended
itinerary, in the same format as the normal itinerary.
You can customize invoices in the following ways:
• You can issue a separate invoice for each passenger or a single invoice
(joint) for all passengers in the PNR.
• The invoice can include all segments present in the PNR or only selected
segments.
• If a translated version exists in the system, you can issue the invoice in the
desired language.
• You can enter remarks in the PNR and select remark lines from your mini-
office profile to be printed on the invoice.
To allow your office to issue invoices, your office profile must be set up
accordingly, and you have to register invoice numbers in the document bank. See
HE PV for more information.
Types of Invoices
There are two main types of invoice: basic and extended.
• Basic - provides invoice information and a basic itinerary
• Extended - provides invoice information and an extended itinerary
For more information on itineraries, see Itineraries on page 238.
Chapter 8 Itinerary and Invoice
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 241
What Is Displayed on an Invoice?
An invoice is divided into four sections: header, body, invoice totals and footer.
Note: US offices issue market-specific invoices instead of Amadeus default
invoices. For a description of the US market differences, enter:
GGAMAUSINI
Header Information
This section contains agency contact information, invoice number, date, record
locator, mailing and billing address information, and accounting information.
Body Information
This section contains the information about the service being provided to the
passenger, air or auxiliary segments, seating information, car and hotel
segments, and insurance information.
Invoice Totals
This section contains information about fares, taxes, refunds, service fees and
currencies. It also contains a final invoice total.
Footer Information
This section contains information about the form of payment, miscellaneous
charge orders (MCOs), airline record locators, passenger names, ticket numbers
and remarks.
For more details on each section of an invoice, see HE INV, GP DAT.
Working with Invoices
Here we explain how to display, print and add options to an invoice.
How to Display an Invoice
To display a basic invoice, enter:
INVD
The data displayed is the same as the data printed, except for the invoice number
and page number, which are not displayed.
Note: The invoice number is displayed only when a copy (/COPY) or a
manual invoice (/MI) request is used.
To display an extended invoice, enter:
INED
Joint Invoices
To display a basic joint invoice, enter:
INVDJ
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
242 Edition 3.1
To display an extended joint invoice, enter:
INEDJ
Note: There are certain restrictions on invoice display. For more information,
see HE INV.
How to Print an Invoice
The following table describes the transactions you can use to print an invoice.
Table: Print Invoice Transactions
Entry Description
INV Print a separate invoice for each passenger and
include the basic itinerary information.
INE Print a separate invoice for each passenger and
include the extended itinerary information.
Note: If there is no existing TST when you make
the print invoice entry, the system prices the
itinerary and creates a TST or TSTs.
INVJ Print a single basic invoice for all passengers.
INEJ Print a single extended invoice for all passengers.
How to Add Options to an Invoice
You have several options you can use when displaying or printing invoices.
These options work with both the display and print entries.
Here are some examples:
Table: Invoice Option Entries
Entry Description
INV/P1, 3-5 Specific passengers
INV/PAX All passengers (adults and children)
INV/INF Infants only
INV/S3, 6-8 Specific segments
INV/LP FR Display in French
Note: If the information is not translated into the
selected language, it is displayed or printed in English.
For more options, see HE INV.
Chapter 8 Itinerary and Invoice
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 243
Sending Documents
Here we explain how to fax and email itinerary and invoice documents.
How to Fax a Document
Note: You can use any of the itinerary or invoice entries.
To fax an itinerary, enter:
IBP-FAX-FR492947200
IBP- Print basic itinerary transaction code, dash
FAX- Fax indicator, dash
FR492947200 Country code and fax number
If there is an APF (fax) element in the PNR, enter:
IBP-FAXA
For more information, see HE FAX.
How to Email a Document
Note: You can use any of the itinerary or invoice entries.
To email an itinerary, enter:
IBP-EML-JSMITH@AMADEUS.COM
IBP- Print basic itinerary transaction code, dash
EML- Email indicator, dash
JSMITH@AMADEUS.COM Email address
If there is an APE (email) element in the PNR, enter:
IBP-EMLA
To print the ticket and email the itinerary at the same time, enter:
TTP/IEP-EML-JSMITH@AMADEUS.COM
Using Remarks
Remarks are used to customize printed documents such as invoices and
itineraries. Two types of remark exist:
• PNR remarks - You create these remarks directly in the PNR. They are
always printed, and contain either amounts that modify the invoice totals or
free-flow text.
• Mini-office profile remarks - These remarks are stored in your mini-office
profile. They are either printed automatically or when you select them
(customized remarks).
As an option, you can passenger- or segment-associate all remark types.
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
244 Edition 3.1
Note: All remarks except RIB, RID, RIA and RIT can be associated to air and
auxiliary (such as car and hotel) segments.
You can enter a maximum of 127 remark lines, all types included. Each remark
can contain up to 64 characters.
For more information, see HE PVU, GP MSG
How to Enter a Remark In a PNR to be Printed on the Document
Itinerary Remark (PNR)
To add a free-flow text remark to be printed on the itinerary, enter, for example:
RIR CUSTOMS TAKE PLACE IN STOCKHOLM/P2/S5
RIR Itinerary remark transaction code and free-flow text
/P2 Slash, passenger association (optional)
/S5 Slash, segment association (optional)
Invoice Remark (PNR)
To add a free-flow text remark to be printed on the invoice, enter, for example:
RIF VIP ACCOUNT HAS REACHED AWARD STATUS/S3
RIF Invoice remark transaction code and free-flow text
/S3 Slash, segment association (optional)
How to Add Automatic Remarks in the Office Profile
To add automatic remarks in the office profile that will print on invoices and
itineraries:
1. Display the mini office profile.
PV
2. Display the itinerary/invoice messages section of the mini office profile.
PV/M
3. Add a remark.
PVU/V01-ENJOY YOUR TRIP
PVU/ Update transaction code, slash
V01- V, line number, dash, free-flow text
To delete a remark from the mini office profile, enter:
PVU/V01-
For more information, see HE PVU, GP MSG.
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 245
Index
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 246
A
AB, 70
AC, 56
Access indicator, 45
Access levels, 45
displaying, 48
indicators, 45
ACO pages, 25
ACR, 56
Agency profiles
creating, 231
definition, 231
Agent assembly area, 6
Agent preferences, 15
displaying, 16
resetting, 17
updating, 16
Agent profile, 15
deleting, 21
displaying, 16
resetting to default, 20
updating, 20
Agent security rights, 18
Agent sign, 3
Agreement tables, 191
BSP, 191
displaying BSP, 191
displaying ITA, 193
GSA, 191
interline agreement codes, 194
ITA, 191
specific airline, 193
AIR, 187
Alliances, 41
codes, 41
AM, 70
Amadeus Access Sell, 47
Amadeus Access Update, 46
Amadeus Airline Ancillary Services
chargeable manual auxiliary segments, 100
Amadeus Best Pricer, 162
automatic rebooking, 162
lowest possible fare, 165
manual rebooking, 164
options, 166
passenger discounts, 166
requesting cabins, 167
seat availability, 165
Amadeus Full Access, 47
Amadeus Information Pages, 24
accessing, 24
displaying a page in another language, 23
displaying ACO pages, 25
displaying Amadeus pages, 25
displaying provider pages, 25
moving directly to a page, 27
navigating, 23
printing, 24
searching for text, 24
Amadeus Interface Record, 187, 189
Amadeus Online Help, 26
accessing, 27
displaying help for previous entry, 27
displaying steps, 28
Amadeus Security Administrator. See ASA
Amadeus Ticket Changer, 196
re-issuing tickets, 197
validating fare rules, 196
AN, 38
AP, 71
APB, 70
APE, 70
APF, 70
APH, 70
APM, 70
ARNK, 97
Arrival unknown segment, 96
ASA, 17
security rights, 17
Associated cross reference, 120, 124
AST, 175
AU, 100
Automatic SSR explosion, 78
Auxiliary segments, 100
Availability display, 38
adding options, 41
alliances, 41
carrier-preferred, 49
changing the display, 56
codeshare flights, 40
Direct Access, 50
example, 39
moving to the previous display, 44
requesting, 38
requesting a 7-day search, 43
requesting dual-city pair, 42
status codes, 39
types of displays, 38
AXR, 120, 124
B
Bank Settlement Plan, 191
Banker's selling rate, 150
Booking code, 143
C
Cabin baggage, 103
Carrier fares, 132
Carrier-preferred displays, 49
example, 50
requesting, 49
returning to the Amadeus display, 49
Carriers, 37
Child indicator, 65
Codeshare flights, 40
Commission, 188
Company profiles
associating traveller profile, 230
creating, 230
definition, 230
Confidential remarks, 85
Connecting points, 59
Contact element, 70
Contract fares, 132
Corporate codes
displaying by code, 8
displaying by name, 9
Corporate qualifier codes, 6
Corporate remarks, 85
Currency conversion, 151
Index
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 247
D
DAC, 31
DAN, 29
DC, 31
DD, 31
Decode, 31
airlines, 31
flight equipment, 31
locations, 31
Direct Access, 50
changing airlines, 52
indicator, 46
redisplaying, 53
requesting from an availability display, 51
requesting with a long entry, 52
DM, 57
DM I, 58
DNA, 31
DNC, 31
DNE, 31
DNH, 31
DNS, 31
DO, 44
DRT, 59
Dual-city pair display, 42
adding options, 43
Duty codes, 4
E
EF, 122
Electronic payment, 88
Emailing documents, 243
EML, 243
Encode, 29
airlines, 31
flight equipment, 31
locations, 28
options, 30
restricting the display, 30
using wildcards, 30
ER, 74
ERK, 205
ES, 91
ESD, 91
ESX, 91
ET, 74
E-ticketing, 68
E-tickets, 187
displaying, 190
retrieving with ticket number, 190
ETK, 205
Excess baggage charges, 152
Extended ownership agreements, 89
Extended sign, 11
Extra mileage surcharge, 146
Extra seats, 105
F
FA element, 189
fail codes, 175
Fare basis, 133
Fare display, 131
changing, 139
domestic, 136
elements, 132
fare type codes, 138
international, 134
options, 137
shopper display, 136
Fare notes, 139
categories, 140
displaying, 140
paragraphs, 141
Fare quote tools, 148
Banker's selling rate, 150
converting currency, 151
currency, 149
displaying fares in local currency, 151
excess baggage, 152
exchange rates, 149
IATA rate of exchange, 150
mileage, 148
FAX, 243
Faxing documents, 243
FB element, 189
FCMI, 175
FFA, 84
FFD, 84
FFN, 84
FFR, 84
FFU, 84
Flight information, 44
Flight types
change of equipment, 37
connecting, 37
direct, 37
on-stop, 37
Follow up transactions, 142
booking codes, 143
converting fare currencies, 147
displaying mileage, 145
extra mileage surcharge, 146
mileage, 144
reading a routing string, 145
routing, 144
taxes, 142
Form of payment, 188
FQA, 150
FQB, 150
FQC, 151
FQD, 134
FQD /S, 137
FQD C, 139
FQD L, 151
FQK, 142
FQL*, 138
FQM, 148
FQN, 140, 154
FQO, 145
FQP, 153
FQQ, 154, 158
FQR, 144, 155
FQS, 143, 155
FQX, 152
FRC, 147
Frequent flyers, 83
FRM, 146
FXA, 164
FXB, 163
FXD, 167
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
definition, 240 FXL, 165 displaying, 241 FXP, 157 displaying joint, 241 FXR, 163 emailing, 243 FXS, 168 extended, 240 FXT, 157 faxing, 243 FXU, 164 options, 242 FXX, 158 printing, 242
sections, 241
G types, 240
General remarks, 85 with remarks, 244
General Sales Agent, 191 IR, 75
GG AIR, 25 Issuing tickets, 186
GG AIS, 24 commission, 188
GG CAR, 25 displaying e-ticket record, 190
GG CODE, 25 entry options, 189
GG CORP CODES, 8 form of payment, 188
GG CORP NAMES, 9 pre-validation, 188
GG HTL, 25 re-issue, 195
GG NEWS, 25 sequence number, 189
GG TRAINING, 25 ticket number, 189
GG WEA, 25 validating carrier, 188
Ghost segments, 98 Itineraries
GL, 24 basic, 238
GP, 27 definition, 238
GP 1, 26 displaying, 239
Group PNR, 106 displaying joint, 239
GSL, 24 emailing, 243
extended, 238
H faxing, 243
options, 239
HE, 27 printing, 239
HE /, 27 types, 238
HE STEPS, 28 with remarks, 244
Homogeneous recommendations, 170 Itinerary pricing, 156
displaying a ticket image, 158
I fare basis codes, 161
options, 159
IATA rate of exchange, 150 past date pricing, 160
IBD, 239 pricing overrides, 160
IBDJ, 239 selecting a fare, 157
IBEJ, 239 zap off, 161
IBP, 239
IBPJ, 239 J
IED, 239
IEP, 239 JCD, 19
IEPJ, 239 JD, 5
IG, 74 JGA, 20
INE, 242 JGC, 20
INED, 241 JGD, 16
INEDJ, 242 JGH, 21
INEJ, 242 JGR, 17, 20
Infant indicator, 65 JGU, 16, 20
Information segment, 95 JGX, 21
Informative pricing, 152 JI, 4
conditions, 153 JM, 9
follow-up entries, 154 JO, 10
pricing assumptions, 153 Joint invoices, 241
requesting, 153 Joint itineraries, 239
Interline agreement codes, 194 JS, 9
Interline Ticketing Agreement, 191 JTD, 21
INV, 242 JTR, 22
INVD, 241 JTU, 22
INVDJ, 241 JUI, 11
INVJ, 242 JUM, 11
Invoices JUO, 12
basic, 240 JUR, 12
248 Edition 3.1
Index
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 249
JX, 9
K
Keyword element, 79
L
Language preference, 24
Local Security Administrator. See LSA
Long-sell entry, 70
in Master Pricer Expert, 169
LP, 110
LPO, 110
LSA, 17
security rights, 17
M
Management profiles
definition, 232
displaying, 232
displaying history, 233
Manual SSR explosion, 78
Married segments, 92
Master Pricer Expert
adding options, 169
definition, 167
displaying recommendations, 168
homogeneous recommendations, 170
passenger type codes, 170
price to beat option, 170
requesting recommendations, 167
selling, 169
ticketability check, 170
Maximum point mileage, 133
MB, 23
MBAN, 44
MCO, 196
MD, 23
MDAN, 44
Mileage fares, 144
Minimum connecting times, 57
checking PNR itinerary, 58
checking PNR segments, 58
displaying connecting points, 59
options, 58
requesting, 57
Miscellaneous charges order, 196
MOAN, 44
Moving
to the next screen, 23
to the previous screen, 23
MP, 23
MPAN, 44
MPM, 133
MS, 23
MST, 176
MT, 23
MTAN, 44
MU, 23
MUAN, 44
N
Name element, 63
Navigating in Online Help and AIS, 23
NHP, 122
NM, 63
Non-homogeneous condition, 122
Non-participating carriers, 37
NUC, 149
O
Office ID, 6
corporate qualifier codes, 6
office type codes, 7
Office profile, 13
full profile, 15
mini profile, 14
mini profile for another office, 14
Office security, 17
agent rights, 18
ASA rights, 17
copying an agent sign, 20
creating a permanent LSA sign, 18
creating an agent sign, 20
creating the sign bank, 19
deleting an agent sign, 21
display agent sign history, 21
displaying default office settings, 21
LSA rights, 17
office setup, 18
resetting an agent profile, 20
resetting default office settings, 22
sign bank, 19
updating an agent profile, 20
updating default office settings, 22
Office type codes, 7
airline offices, 7
service providers, 7
travel agencies, 7
OP, 87
Open segments, 93
OPQ, 88
Option element, 87
OPX, 88
OS, 81
Other service information element, 80
P
Participating carriers, 37
PAS, 223
Passenger association, 76
Passive segments, 97
Past date record, 111
PC, 235
PCE, 223
PCN, 230
PCZ, 225
PDN, 226
PDO, 232
PDR. See Past date record
PE, 226
PEE, 226
PER, 226
PH, 233
PHO, 233
PI, 226
PID, 223
PIE, 226
PIR, 226
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
PIV, 223 ticketing arrangement, 71
PLC, 228 PNR history, 126
PLS, 225 full history, 128
PLT, 227 modifications, 127
PLX, 228 options, 128
PM, 221 original elements, 127
PME, 221 partial history, 128
PNR sample screen, 127
associated cross reference, 120 PNR modification
cabin baggage, 103 cancelling a name element, 114
checking minimum connecting times, 58 copy, 119
child indicator, 65 deleting a segment, 113
claiming, 109 deleting an itinerary, 113
confidential options, 88 deleting multiple segments, 113
copying, 119 PNR pricing. See Itinerary pricing
definition, 61 PNR print
dual-availability, 69 all, 125
elements. See PNR elements options, 125
end transaction, 73 screen, 125
exploding SSRs, 79 system print messages, 125
extra seats, 105 to another office, 126
PNR rebook features, 62 class, 116 frequent flyers, 84 combined entries, 117 groups, 106 date, 116 history. See PNR history flight number, 116 ignoring, 74 PNR search infant indicator, 65 by flight, 110 long-sell entries, 70 by office, 110 modifying. See PNR modification PNR security, 89 non-homogeneous condition, 122 adding, 91 on queue, 199 cancelling, 91 printing. See PNR print displaying security agreements, 91 purging, 111 retrieving, 92 queuing office, 118 security access modes, 90 rebooking, 115, See PNR rebook security agreement, 89 recalling, 111 security element, 89 record locator, 62 security receiver types, 89 remarks, 85 PNR segments retrieving, 107 arrival unknown, 97 saving, 73 auxiliary, 100 searching. See PNR search ghost, 98 seat maps, 82 information, 95 seat request, 81 married, 93 short-sell entries, 67 open, 93 splitting, 121 passive, 97 SSRs, 78 service, 98 stretcher passengers, 102 special, 92 ticketless, 88 waitlist, 95 transferring ownership, 118 PPA, 224 unaccompanied minors, 101 PPC, 225 PNR association PPH, 224 infants, 66 PPK, 224 passengers, 76 PR, 229 segments, 77 Price to beat, 170 PNR Change flag, 184 Printing issuing a ticket, 185 help and information pages, 24 removing, 185 PNRs, 124 PNR elements Profile mode contact, 70 entering, 221 itinerary, 67 exiting, 221 keyword, 80 Profile sections mandatory, 62 documents, 219 name element, 63 follow up, 220 optional, 75 general information, 219 other service information, 81 itinerary/PNR transferable data, 218 queue option indicators, 87 Profiles received from, 73
250 Edition 3.1
Index
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 251
adding citizenship, 225
adding document info, 223
adding languages, 225
adding PNR data, 222
adding travel policies, 224
creating PNR from profile, 234
creating profile from PNR, 235
creating traveller, 221
deactivating, 228
definition, 218
displaying deactivated list, 228
ending, 226
ignoring, 226
profile elements, 220
reactivating, 229
retrieving company list, 228
retrieving traveller, 226
retrieving travellers list, 227
sections, 218
Provider pages. See Amadeus Information Pages
Pseudo-office ID, 89
PT, 234
Purged PNRs, 111
PV, 14
PVA, 15
PVU, 244
PX, 228
PYN, 231
Q
QA, 213
QAN, 214
QAQ, 214
QCD, 211
QCDD, 211
QCDO, 211
QCDT, 211
QCM, 211
QCMD, 212
QCMO, 212
QCMT, 212
QCR, 203
QCT, 210
QCTD, 210
QCTO, 210
QCTT, 210
QD, 204
QE, 207
QI, 205
QN, 204
QP, 209
QPR, 209
QR, 215
QS, 204
QSB, 207
QT, 203
QTQ, 202
QU, 206
Queue bank
additions, 203
definition, 201
display active queues only, 203
displaying, 202
items worked, 203
last queue count, 203
total PNRs, 203
Queue count
reset to zero, 203
Queue count planner
date-deferred, 210
definition, 210
displaying date-deferred, 211
displaying month-deferred, 211
displaying time-deferred, 210
month-deferred, 210
time-deferred, 210
Queue option indicators, 87
Queue planner
delay, 208
display by PNR record locator, 208
option, 208
removing PNRs, 212
ticketing, 208
Queues
activating, 213
browsing, 207
category, 200
commonly used, 200
confirming status change, 205
customizing, 214
date ranges, 200
delay planner, 208
delay time and date, 205
delay-date, 200
delaying PNRs, 204
delay-time, 200
deleting, 209, 214
displaying, 209
displaying all queues for a PNR, 206
displaying PNRs in specific queues, 208
dual, 200
ignoring changes and exiting, 205
manually placing on queue, 207
nightly file maintenance, 201
option planner, 209
printing, 209
queue bank, 201
queue placement, 207
redisplaying a message, 206
remove current PNR, 204
removing all PNRs, 215
removing PNRs, 206
removing PNRs from specific, 206
special, 200
starting, 204
ticketing planner, 208
types, 200
Queuing office, 118
Quickpath, 23
displaying a list, 27
QV, 208
QVR, 208
QVRD, 208
QVRO, 209
QVRT, 208
QWDD, 212
QWDO, 212
QWDT, 212
QXP, 206
Amadeus System Certification Course Guide
R office, 17
PNR, 89
RC, 86 Segment association, 77
Rebook, 115 Service segments, 98
Record locator, 62 Seven-day availability search, 43
Region codes, 225 Shopper display, 136
Re-issuing tickets, 194 Short-sell entry, 67
Remarks SI, 96
adding, 244 Sign bank, 19
confidential, 85 Signing in, 4
corporate, 85 extended sign, 11
general, 85 remote office, 11
mini-office profile, 243 Signing out, 10
PNR, 243 remote office, 12
wildcards, 87 remotely from a different terminal, 12
Remote office, 11 SK, 80
jump, 11 SM, 82
log-on, 12 SN, 53
sign in, 11 SO, 94
sign out, 12 SP, 121
Reservation booking designator, 134 Special segments, 92
Responsible office, 118 Special service request, 77
RF, 73 SR, 78
RH, 128 SR*, 79
RHA, 128 SS, 68
RHE, 92 SSR. See Special service request
RHI, 128 SSR explosion, 78
RHJ, 128 ST, 81
RHN, 128 Standard access, 45
RHR, 128 Status codes, 39
RHS, 128 Stretcher passengers, 102
RIF, 244 SX, 83
RIR, 244
RM, 86 T
RO, 109
Routing, 144 TC, 56
Routing fares, 144 Terminal address, 6
Routing strings, 145 Text search, 24
RPD, 112 TI /ALL, 32
RPP, 111 Ticket arrangement options, 72
RRA, 120 Ticketability check, 170
RRI, 120 Ticketed point mileage, 133
RRN, 119 Ticketing arrangement element, 71
RRP, 120 Ticketless Access, 48
RT, 107 Ticketless bookings, 88
RT SVC, 108 TIDFT, 33
RTAM, 93 Timatic, 32
RTE, 92 requesting detailed travel information, 33
RTIM, 93 requesting visa and health information, 32
RTQ, 206 Time and date calculations, 31
RX, 86 Timetable display, 54
changing the display, 56
S example, 55
requesting, 55
SB, 115 timetable codes, 55
SC, 56 TIRA, 32
Schedule display, 53 TK, 72
changing the display, 56 TK AT, 72
displaying non-participating carriers, 54 TK MA, 72
example, 54 TK OK, 72
requesting, 53 TK TL, 72
SCR, 56 TK XL, 72
Seat maps, 82 TKT, 188
Seat requests, 81 TN, 55
locations, 81 TPM, 133
passenger types, 82 TQT, 176
Security Travel policies, 224
252 Edition 3.1
Index
© 2012 Amadeus s.a.s. - All rights reserved 253
TST
automatic, 175
confidential, 182
creating manual, 178
definition, 174
deleting, 183
displaying, 176, 177
fail codes, 175
list, 176
manual, 176
numbering, 174, 176
shell, 176
update options, 179
updating, 178, 179
TST history, 185
displaying, 186
TTC, 178
TTH, 186
TTI, 178
TTK, 178
TTP, 186
TTU, 194
U
UM, 102
Unaccompanied minors, 101
Universal sign, 12
V
Validating carrier, 188
VFFD, 85
W
Waitlist
action codes, 94
segments, 94
Work area, 5
moving between work areas, 9
moving to and signing in to another work area,
9
reactivating, 10
sign in to all, 5
sign in to multiple, 5
sign in to specific, 5
signing out of a specific, 10
signing out of all, 10
signing out of multiple, 10
status, 5
temporarily deactivating, 9
WRA, 125
WRAO, 126
WRS, 125
X
XE, 113
XI, 114
Y
YY fares, 131
Z
Zap off, 161
